Dear Customer,

Congratulations and thank you for choosing LANCIA. We wrote this handbook to help you get the most out of your car’s outstanding qualities. We advise to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time. You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you

derive the maximum from your LANCIA’s technological features. You will discover unique features anddetails; you will also find essential information for car care and servicing as well as driving and operat-ing safety not to mention the long-term wellbeing of your LANCIA.

The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services you have acquired and contains details relating tothe following:

• the Warranty Certificate, with terms and conditions for maintaining it• the range of services offered to LANCIA owners.

We are sure that these instruments will help you easily attune to and appreciate both your new carand the LANCIA team that will be on hand to provide you with any help you may require.

Best regards and have a great trip.

MUST BE READ!REFUELLING

Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) no less than 95.

Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.

ENGINE START-UP

Make sure the handbrake is pulled up; put the gear lever into neutral; press the clutch pedal down to the floorwithout touching the accelerator; then:

petrol engines: turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts.

diesel engines: turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the instrument panel warning lights ¢ andmto go out, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts.

PARKING OVER INFLAMMABLE MATERIAL

When functioning normally, the catalytic converter reaches high temperatures. For this reason do not parkthe car over inflammable material, grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.: fire hazard.

K

�PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

A system for continuously monitoring emission system components to ensure greater environmental protection is fitted in your car.

U

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), visit aLancia Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car's electric system can support the required load.�

CODE card

Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car. You should always keep the electronic code written on theCODE card with you in case you need to carry out an emergency start-up procedure.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safetyfeatures, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER HANDBOOK CONTAINS …

… information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and itsmaintenance. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection)â(the car’s wellbeing).

TRAVELLING SAFELY AND IN HARMONY WITH NATURE

Safety and respect for the environment are the guidelines that inspired the Lybra’s design from thedrawing board onwards.

This concept has meant that the Lybra has been able to face and pass the strictest safety tests. Somuch so that, from this point of view, the car is the best in its class and has probably already incorpo-rated features that belong to the future.

In addition, ongoing research into new and effective features to help safeguard the environmentmakes the Lybra and car to imitate for this reason as well.

All versions are in fact equipped with environmental protection devices that reduce harmful exhaustfumes in compliance with the limits provided for by current legislation.

What is more, every single component of the Lybra is fully recyclable. At the end of your car’s life-span any LANCIA dealership would be please to make arrangements for your car to be recycled.Nature benefits in two ways: there is no pollution for waste disposal and the demand for raw materi-als is reduced.

Nature benefits in two ways: there is no pollution for waste disposal and the demand for raw mate-rials is reduced.

SAFEGUARDING THE ENVIRONMENT

Safeguarding the environment has directed the design and manufacturing of the Lybra right fromthe start. The result is the use of materials and the perfection of devices that can reduce or sweep-ingly reduce harmful influences on the environment.

The Lybra, equipped with environment safeguarding devices which curtail harmful exhaust gasemissions, is ready to travel well ahead of the most stringent international pollution control stan-dards.

USE OF ENVIRONMENT-FRIENDLY MATERIALS

None of the car’s components contain asbestos. Padding and the climate control system do notcontain CFC (chlorofluorocarbides) - the gases considered responsible for the destruction of theozone layer. Other substances that might pollute air and water tables, such as the cadmium in therust-proof coating of the bolts and the chromates in some paints, have been completely replacedwith substances that do not harm the environment.

DEVICES FOR REDUCING PETROL ENGINE EMISSIONS

Three-way catalytic converter (catalytic exhaust pipe)

Carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides and unburned hydrocarbons are the main harmful componentsin exhaust gasses.

The catalytic converter is a “miniature laboratory” where a very high percentage of these compo-nents are converted into harmless substances.

This conversion is aided by minute particles of precious metals on the ceramic core enclosed in astainless steel container.

Lambda sensor

All petrol versions are fitted with this device. It ensures that air and fuel are constantly mixed inthe correct proportion. This is a fundamental condition for proper engine and catalytic converteroperation.

Fuel evaporation canister

As it is impossible to stop the build up of petrol fumes, also when the engine is not running, thesystem traps them in a special container holding active carbon. The fumes are sucked in from hereand burnt while the engine is running.

DEVICES FOR REDUCING DIESEL ENGINE EMISSIONS

Oxidising catalytic converter

This device converts the pollution substances in the exhaust gas (carbon monoxide, unburnedhydrocarbons and particulate) into harmless substances, thus reducing the smokiness and smellassociated with diesel engine exhaust fumes.

The catalytic converter consists of a stainless steel case containing a honeycomb ceramic core inwhich there is precious metal which carries out the catalysing action.

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (E.G.R. Cooled) system

This system recirculates or reuses part of the exhaust gas in a proportion which varies according toengine operation conditions.

When necessary, it is used for the control of nitrogen oxide emissions.

THE SIGNS TO HELP YOU DRIVE CORRECTLY

The signs you see on this page are very important. They highlight those parts of the handbookwhere, more than elsewhere, you should stop for a minute and read carefully.

As you can see, each sign has a different symbol to make it immediately clear and easy to identifythe subjects in the different areas:

Personal safety. Important. Total or partial failure tofollow these instructions can placedriver, passengers or others in seriousdanger.

Environmental protection. This shows you the correct proceduresto follow to ensure that the car doesnot harm the environment.

Car wellbeing. Important. Total or partial failure tofollow these instructions will result inthe risk of serious damage to the carand may invalidate the warranty aswell.

9

Battery

Corrosive fluid.

SYMBOLSSpecial coloured labels have been at-

tached near or actually on some of thecomponents of your Lybra. These la-bels bear symbols that remind you ofthe precautions to be taken as regardsthat particular component.

A list of the symbols to be found onyour Lybra is given below with thename of the component to which it re-lates at the side of it.

These symbols are divided into thefollowing four categories: danger, pro-hibition, warning and obligation.

DANGER SYMBOLS

Battery

Explosion.

Fan

May cut in automaticallyeven when the engine isturned off.

Expansion tank

Do not remove the capwhen the coolant is hot.

Coil

High voltage.

Belts and pulleys

Moving parts: keep partsof the body and clothes away.

Climate control tubing

Do not open. Gas underhigh pressure.

10

Battery

Keep away from nakedflames.

Battery

Keep away from chil-dren.

Heat shields - belts -pulleys - fan

Do not touch.

PROHIBITION SYMBOLS

Power steering

Do not exceed the maxi-mum fluid level in the reservoir. Use only the fluid specified in the section “Capacities”.

Catalytic converter

Do not park over inflam-mable materials. See Chap-ter: “Protecting the emis-sion control devices”.

WARNING SYMBOLS

Engine

Use only the oil specified inthe section “Capacities”.

Unleaded petrol vehicle

Use only unleaded petrolwith a rated octane number(RON) of 95.

Windscreen wiper

Only use fluid of the typespecified in the section “Ca-pacities”.

Brake circuit

Do not exceed the maxi-mum fluid level in the reservoir. Use only the fluid specified in the section “Capacities”.

11

Diesel engines

Use diesel fuel only. DIESEL

Expansion tank

Only use fluid of the typespecified in the section “Ca-pacities”.

Battery

Protect your eyes.

Battery

Jack

See the Owner handbook.

OBLIGATION SYMBOLS

13

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DRIVING YOUR CAR

IN AN EMERGENCY

CAR MAINTENANCE

LYBRA STATION WAGON

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

INDEX

CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

You are recommended to read this chaptersitting comfortably in your new Lybra. In thisway you will be able to identify the partsdescribed immediate and see for yourself whatyou have just read.

In short, you will increase your knowledge ofyour Lybra with its controls and other devices.Later, when you start the engine and join thetraffic you will make a host of other pleasantdiscoveries.

DASHBOARD.................................................. 15IGNITION SWITCH ........................................ 16THE LANCIA CODE SYSTEM........................ 17THE ELECTRONIC ALARM .......................... 21INDIVIDUAL SETTINGS................................ 28SEAT BELTS................................................... 34TRANSPORTING CHILDREN IN SAFETY..... 37PRETENSIONERS .......................................... 42FRONT AND SIDE AIRBAGS.......................... 43INSTRUMENT PANEL.................................... 50INSTRUMENTS .............................................. 51WARNING LIGHTS......................................... 53

CHECK CONTROL......................................... 59LANCIA ICS WITH MULTIFUNCTIONALDISPLAY......................................................... 62SOUND SYSTEM ............................................ 73CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ...................... 103AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................... 105SUPPLEMENTARY HEATER ......................... 115STEERING COLUMN STALKS....................... 115CONTROLS .................................................... 118MANUAL GEARBOX ...................................... 121CRUISE CONTROL ........................................ 122INTERIOR EQUIPMENT ................................ 125SUNROOF....................................................... 131DOORS............................................................ 134BOOT .............................................................. 138BONNET ......................................................... 141FUEL FILLER CAP ........................................ 143CELLULAR PHONE SET-UP ......................... 144ROOF RACK AND SKI RACK ......................... 145ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTS................... 146EOBD SYSTEM .............................................. 148ABS ................................................................. 149ESP SYSTEM (ASR - HH - HBA).................... 151SOUND SYSTEM DEVICES............................ 154

14

15

DASHBOARDThe presence and the position of the instruments and warning lights may vary according to the version.

1) Side window vents - 2) Side vents - 3) Headlight slant adjuster - 4) Instrument panel - 5) Instrument panel dimmer - 6) ICS multifunc-tional display: sound system, clock, trip computer and check control - 7) Central vents - 8) Windscreen vent - 9) Passenger’s airbag (wherefitted) - 10) Passenger’s airbag deactivation switch - 11) Glove compartment - 12) Cup/can holder - 13) Hazard light switch - 14) Auto-matic climate control and heated rear window switch - 15) Ashtray and cigar lighter - 16) Front and rear fog light switch - 17) Card pocket -18) Windscreen wiper/washer stalk - 19) Ignition switch - 20) Horn - 21) Steering wheel height adjustment lever - 22) Driver’s airbag -23) Outside light control stalk - 24) Glove compartment/fusebox cover - 25) Bonnet opening lever.

P4T0806fig. 1

16

IGNITION SWITCH The key can be turned to four posi-

tions (fig. 2).

STOP: engine off, key can be re-moved, steering column locked. Someelectrical devices can be worked (e.g.sound system).

MAR: driving position. All electricaldevices can be worked.

AVV: engine ignition.

PARK: engine off, parking lights on,key can be removed, steering columnlocked. To turn the key to PARK,press button A.

STEERING COLUMN LOCK

To engage the lock: remove the ig-nition key at STOP or PARK andturn the steering wheel until it locks.

To release the lock: rock the steer-ing wheel slightly as you turn the ig-nition key to MAR.

fig. 2P

4T00

05

If the ignition switch hasbeen tampered with (e.g.someone has tried to steal

your car), get a Lancia Dealershipto make sure it is still functioningproperly before you start drivingagain.

Always remove the igni-tion key when you get outof the car. This will pre-

vent anyone from accidentallyworking the controls. Rememberto apply the handbrake and, if thecar is faced down on a steep slopeengage the first gear. If it is facingup, engage the reverse gear.

Never remove the ignitionkey while the car is mov-ing. The steering wheel

would automatically lock as soonas you try to turn it. This also ap-plies when the car is being towed.

It is absolutely forbiddento carry out whatever af-ter-market operation in-

volving steering system or steeringcolumn modifications (e.g.: instal-lation of anti-theft device) thatcould badly affect performanceand safety, cause the lapse of war-ranty and also result in non-com-pliance of the car with homologa-tion requirements.

In order to ensure thegreatest efficiency of elec-tronic devices incorpo-

rated in the key, it is recom-mended that the latter should notbe exposed to direct sunlightand/or heavy shocks.

THE LANCIA CODESYSTEM

To further protect your car fromtheft, it has been fitted with an engineimmobilising system (Lancia CODE)which is automatically activated whenthe ignition key is removed. An elec-tronic device, in fact, is fitted in eachignition key grip. The device trans-mits a radio-frequency signal whenthe engine is started through a specialaerial built into the ignition switch.The modulated signal is a password.Only if the control unit recognises thekey can the engine be started.

KEYS

Together with the car are delivered:

– 2 keys A (fig. 3) with incorporatedremote control if the car is fitted withan electronic alarm;

– 1 key with incorporate remote con-trol plus 1 mechanical type key if thecar is not fitted with an electronicalarm.

The CODE card (fig. 4) is also sup-plied with the keys and bears the fol-lowing:

A - The electronic code, to be usedfor emergency starting.

B - The mechanical key code to begiven to the Lancia Dealershipwhen ordering duplicate keys.

C and D - The spaces for electronicalarm remote control stickers.

The code numbers written on theCODE card must be kept in a safeplace (not in the car).

You should always have the elec-tronic code number written on theCODE card with you at all times incase you need to perform an emer-gency start-up.

17

fig. 3P

4T07

42fig. 4

P4T

0743

18

All the keys and the CODEcard must be handed overthe new owner when selling

the car.

IMPORTANT Anomalous glass op-eration (glasses sliding up or downjerkily) may indicate a loss of cali-bration of the anti-crushing safety de-vice. In this case, the system shouldbe reinitialised as described in chap-ter “Electric window winders” in theOwner Handbook, to which this Sup-plement is attached to.

The metal insert A (fig. 6) of the keyoperates:

– the ignition switch;

– the steering column lock disen-gagement;

– the driver’s door lock;

– the boot lock;

– button D, to operate the centraldoor locking system, boot/tailgatelocking, to switch the electronic alarmon (where fitted) and to lock the fuelfiller cap;

– button E, to open the boot/tailgatewhen the alarm is on;

– led F, which indicates the remotecontrol operation and the internalbattery status.

Pressing down (for more than 2 sec-onds) button C will open all door win-dows to aerate the passenger com-partment: window opening is inter-rupted when the button is released.

Similarly, door windows can becompletely closed when closing thedoors by pressing down (for morethan 2 seconds) button D.

Window closing is stopped when re-leasing button D.

The key (fig. 5) is provided with:

– a metal insert A that can be lockedup in the key handle by pressing but-ton B;

– button B, used to snap-open themetal insert;

– button C, to operate the centraldoor locking system, to switch theelectronic alarm off (where fitted) andto unlock the fuel filler cap;

fig. 5

P4T

0744

fig. 6

P4T

0745

19

– the passenger’s side air bag deac-tivating switch;

– the glove compartment lock(where fitted).

To remove the metal insert from thekey grip, press button B.

When pressing button B(fig. 6), take care to preventthe metal insert A from

causing harm or damage when itcomes out. The button B shouldonly be pressed when the key isaway from the body, in particularfrom the eyes, and from objectsthat can be spoilt (e.g. clothes).Make sure the key can never betouched by others, especially chil-dren, who may inadvertently pressthe button B.

2) If the ¢ warning light stays on(withUwarning light) the code wasnot recognised. In this case, turn thekey to STOP and then back to MAR.If the engine remains immobilised, trywith the other keys provided.

If you are still unable to start the en-gine, carry out the emergency startingprocedure and contact your LanciaDealership.

When the car is travelling and thekey is at MAR:

1) If the ¢ warning light comes onwhile the car is moving, this meansthat the system is running a self-test(e.g. due to a voltage drop). The firsttime you stop, you can test the systemas follows: switch off the engine byturning the ignition key to STOP thenturn the key back to MAR: the warn-ing light ¢ should come on and thengo out in about one second. If thewarning light fails to go out, leave thekey at STOP for longer than 30 sec-onds. If the problem persists, contacta Lancia Dealership.

To insert the metal insert A (fig. 5)into the key grip, keep the button Bpressed and turn the insert in the di-rection shown by the arrow untilhearing the locking click. Then releasebutton B.

OPERATION

Each time the ignition key is re-moved from position STOP, orPARK, the Lancia CODE system willdeactivate the engine electronic con-trol unit functions.

When the key is turned to MAR tostart the engine, the Lancia CODEsystem sends a password code to theengine control unit to deactivate thefunction lock. The encoded and vari-able code, randomly selected fromover four billion possible combina-tions, is only sent if, in turn, the sys-tem has recognised the code trans-mitted by the electronic device builtinto the ignition key via an aerial sur-rounding the ignition switch.

1) If the code is recognised, the ¢warning light on the instrument panelwill flash briefly: this means that theprotection system has recognised thekey code and disabled the engine im-mobilising system; turn the key toAVV, to start.

20

2) If the warning light ¢ flashes, thecar is not protected by the engine im-mobilising system. Contact a LanciaDealership immediately and getthem to store the codes of all the keysin the memory.

REPLACING THE BATTERIES

Replace the batteries with equivalentbatteries which can be purchased atcommon stores, if the key led Fflashes briefly once and led L (Fig.12) in front of the steering wheel stayson with fixed light for approximatelytwo minutes (after switching thealarm off), when button (C, D or Efig. 5) is pressed.

DUPLICATE KEYS

When you ask for extra keys, re-member that all the keys, both the newones and those you already possess,must be stored in the memory (up to amaximum of seven keys). Go directlyto your Lancia Dealership, takingwith you all the keys in your posses-sion, the CODE card, personal ID andthe car’s ownership papers. Copies ofthe CODE card can be ordered fromyour Lancia Dealership.

IMPORTANT The codes of anykeys that are not available when thenew storage procedure is carried outwill be deleted from the memory toprevent any lost or stolen keys beingused to start the engine.

Used batteries pollute theenvironment. Dispose ofthem in the special con-

tainers, as specified by current leg-islation or take them to a LanciaDealership, which will deal withtheir disposal.

If the Lancia CODEwarning light flashes athalf a second frequency

after approximately two secondsfrom when the key is turned toMAR, the key code has not bestored in the system’s memory andconsequently the car is not pro-tected by the Lancia CODE systemagainst theft. In this case, go to aLancia Dealership to have the keycodes stored.

IMPORTANT The code may notbe completely transmitted if thekey is turned very rapidly fromSTOP to AVV. This will preventthe engine from starting. Try againturning the key slower.

21

fig. 8

P4T

0748

fig. 7

P4T

0747

Replace the batteries as follows:

– press button B (fig. 7) and bringthe metal insert A to the open posi-tion;

– by means of a fine tip screwdriver,turn the opening device G to : andremove the battery holder H;

– replace the battery I observing theproper bias;

– refit the battery holder into the keyand secure it, by turning the device Gto ;.

ELECTRONIC ALARM (where fitted)

The electronic alarm system fitted inthe car complies with EC directive95/56 and consists of:

– a radio-frequency transmitter(built into the ignition key);

– a radio-frequency receiver;

– an electronic control unit withbuilt-in siren;

– volumetric sensors which can bedeactivated (built-into the front ceil-ing lamp);

– an anti-lifting sensor;

– a bonnet opening switch;

– boot/tailgate opening switch;

– door opening switches;

– warning LEDs.

The electronic alarm is controlled bythe receiver and is switched on bypressing button D (fig. 8) and switchedoff by pressing button C. Both buttonsare built-into the ignition key, whichsends the secret and variable code.

The electronic alarm - which addi-tionally operates the central doorlocking system - protects from the fol-lowing actions:

– illicit opening of doors, bonnet andboot (perimetral surveillance);

– ignition switch operation;

– moving bodies in the passengercompartment (volumetric surveil-lance);

– attempts to lift the car;

– cutting of battery cables.

The volumetric surveillance functioncan be deactivated, as required. Fol-low the instructions given below.

22

fig. 9P

4T08

07

IMPORTANT The engine immobil-ising system is governed by the Lan-cia CODE system and is automaticallyactivated when the ignition key is re-moved.

REMOTE CONTROL (fig. 8)

The remote control is built into theignition key and is equipped with:

– button D for switching the alarm on;

– button C for switching the alarm off;

– button E for opening the boot withthe alarm on;

– LED F.

The buttons operate the control andthe LED flashes while the transmitteris sending the code to the receiver.

This code (of the “rolling code”type) is encoded by means of a spe-cific algorithm and consequentlychanges at each transmission.

The radio-frequency remote controlallows to operate the alarm systemalso from a certain distance (up to ap-proximately 10 metres from the car),without the need of being addressedtowards the receiver and also if thewindows are dirty.

IMPORTANT Change the remotecontrol batteries as soon as possible ifLED F flashes briefly only once whenbutton D is pressed. The LED willwork normally after button D ispressed for the second time after re-placing the batteries.

SWITCHING THE ALARM ON

The alarm can only be switched onwith the ignition key at STOP, PARKor removed.

To switch the alarm on, press andrelease button D (fig. 8) on the igni-tion key.

With the exception of certain markets,a beep will be heard, the direction indi-cators will light up for approximatelythree seconds, the doors will be lockedand LED L (fig. 9) in front of the steer-ing wheel will start flashing.

A self-test is run when the alarm isswitched on. The test is signaled byLED L which flashes as follows:

– four flashes in one second: nofaults found;

– eight flashes in one second:door/bonnet/boot open or faulty sen-sor;

– fixed light: faulty volumetric oranti-lift sensor.

If a fault is found, the concernedcomponent is cut out and the systembeeps to signal the event.

Surveillance

LED L (fig. 9) will flash to indicatethat the system surveillance functionis on.

The LED will flash as long as thesystem is operating.

IMPORTANT The electronic alarmoperation is adapted to the rules inforce in the various countries.

23

Self-testand door/bonnet/boot checks

Check that the doors, bonnet andboot are correctly closed if a secondbeep is heard when the alarm isswitched on. Then try to switch thealarm back on.

The system will cut out the doors,bonnet and boot from the surveillanceif they are not properly closed.

If the doors, the bonnet and the bootare properly closed and the secondbeep is heard again, it means that thesystem self-test function has found afault. Contact a Lancia Dealership.

SWITCHING ON THE ALARMAND CUTTING OUT THEVOLUMETRIC SURVEILLANCE

The function can be cut out (for ex-ample, when pets are left in the car) bycarrying out the following operationsin rapid sequence. With the key atMAR, turn the key to STOP, thenback to MAR and then back to STOPagain. Remove the ignition key. TheLED in front of the steering wheel willlight up for approximately two secondsto indicate the function has been cutout.

To restore the volumetric surveil-lance function, take the key to MARand hold it there for longer than 30seconds.

If you want to operate an electricaldevice which runs when the key is atMAR (e.g. the electrical windowwinders) when the volumetric sur-veillance function is cut out, turn thekey to MAR, operate the requiredcontrol and turn the key back toSTOP within 30 seconds. In this waythe the volumetric surveillance func-tion will not be switched on again.

AUTOMATIC SWITCH-ON(where fitted)

In some markets, the electronicalarm can be programmed to beswitched on automatically.

The electronic alarm is automati-cally switched on (without operatingthe door locking system) after ap-proximately 30 seconds from whenthe car is left. This condition is de-tected by the system by the followingsequence of actions:

– ignition key turned from MAR toSTOP;

– opening and closing of the lastdoor.

The automatic switch-on will be in-terrupted if a door, the bonnet or theboot is opened during the 30 secondtimeout. The 30 seconds timeout willstart from zero after closure.

Press button C (fig. 8) on the igni-tion key to switch the alarm off afteran automatic switch-on.

24

SWITCHING THE ALARM OFF

To switch the alarm off, press re-mote control button C (fig. 8). Then,the system performs the following ac-tions (with the exception of certainmarkets):

– the direction indicators will flashtwice;

– two short siren sound signals(“BEEP”);

– the system will unlock the doors.

IMPORTANT If LED in the carstays on (for up to two minutes or un-til the ignition key is turned to MAR)when the alarm is switched off:

– If the LED stays on (fixed light) theremote control batteries are flat. Re-place them.

– If the LED flashes differentlyfrom usual, an attempt has beenmade to break into the car. The typeof break-in attempt is signalled by thenumber of flashes:

1 flash: front right-hand door

2 flashes: front left-hand door

3 flashes: rear right-hand door

4 flashes: rear left-hand door

5 flashes: volumetric or anti-liftingsensors

6 flashes: bonnet

7 flashes: boot/tailgate

8 flashes: tampered wires to start en-gine

9 flashes: tampered battery wires10 flashes: three or more causes of

alarm.

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION

Do not leave passengers or pets in theparked car and completely close thewindows and the sunroof (where fitted)to ensure the correct operation of thevolumetric sensors. Furthermore, makesure that the doors, bonnet andboot/tailgate are properly closed.

ANTI-LIFTING SENSOR

The anti-lifting sensor detects vari-ations in slant to signal lifting or par-tial lifting (e.g. to remove a wheel) ofthe car.

The sensor can detect minimal vari-ations in car trim along both longitu-dinal axis and transversal axis. varia-tions in trim lower than 0.5°/min.(such as, for example, a slow deflat-ing tyre) are not taken into account.

25

OPENING THE BOOT WHENTHE ALARM IS ON

When the alarm is on, the boot canbe opened by pressing button E(fig. 8) on the ignition key.

In this case, the operating logic ofthe alarm is as follows:

– the volumetric surveillance func-tion is deactivated;

– the anti-lift sensor is deactivated;

– the boot/tailgate sensor is deacti-vated.

The normal surveillance functionsare reactivated when the boot/tailgateis closed.

WHAT TRIGGERSTHE ALARM OFF

The alarm will be triggered off in thefollowing conditions:

– if a door, the bonnet or theboot/tailgate is opened;

– if the battery or the cables are dis-connected or cut;

– if there is an intrusion in the pas-senger compartment, e.g. a brokenwindow (volumetric protection).

– if an attempt is made to start theengine (key at MAR);

– if an attempt has been made to liftthe car.

According to the markets, the alarmcan operate the siren (for up to three26 second cycles) and the directionindicators (for approximately four orfive minutes, only where this is al-lowed). The intervention modalityand the number of cycles can vary ac-cording to the markets.

A maximum number of acoustic/vi-sual cycles is foreseen in all cases.

After the alarm cycle, the system re-turns to its normal surveillance func-tion.

STOPPING THE ALARM

To stop the alarm, press button C(fig. 8) on the remote control. If thisis unsuccessful, owing to run-downremote control battery or to a systemfault, open the door after unlockingthe lock with the key, then put thekey into the ignition switch and turnit to MAR.

To switch the alarm on again, turnthe key to STOP and remove it, thenpress button D on the remote controlafter closing the doors. If the alarm isnot switched on and LED F on the re-mote control gives off only a shortflash, the key battery needs replacing.To replace the battery, follow the in-structions shown in chapter “LanciaCODE System”.

If, with the remote control batterycharged, the alarm cannot beswitched on, contact your LanciaDealership to have the systemchecked.

26

IMPORTANT If the car is to bestored for a long period of time (overthree weeks) and safety conditionspermitting, it is recommended thatcentral locking is actuated by turningthe key in the door lock, so as not toswitch the alarm on and, thus, avoidrunning down the battery.

fig. 10

P4T

0744

fig. 11P

4T07

47fig. 12

P4T

0807

Replace the batteries as follows:

– press button B (fig. 11) and bringthe metal insert A to the open posi-tion;

– by means of a fine tip screwdriver,turn the opening device G to : andremove the battery holder H;

– replace the battery I observing theproper bias;

– refit the battery holder into the keyand secure it, by turning the device Gto ;.

REPLACING THE BATTERIES

Replace the batteries with equivalentbatteries which can be purchased atcommon stores, if the key led Fflashes briefly once and led L (fig. 12)in front of the steering wheel stays onwith fixed light for approximately twominutes (after switching the alarmoff), when button (C, D or E fig. 10)is pressed.

27

Used batteries pollute theenvironment. Dispose ofthem in the special con-

tainers, as specified by current leg-islation or take them to a LanciaDealership, which will deal withtheir disposal.

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL REMOTE CONTROLS

The receiver will acknowledge up to8 remote controls.

If extra remote controls are ordered,in addition to the ones originally sup-plied, remember to carry out the sameprogramming procedure for all the re-mote controls when the car is new.

The control unit will subsequentlyexclude this type of programming toprevent anyone else programming thecontrol unit to acknowledge other re-mote controls.

If, therefore, you ever need a new re-mote control, go directly to a LanciaDealership, taking with you all thekeys in your possession, the CODEcard, personal identification and thecar ownership papers.

MINISTERIAL HOMOLOGATION

In the respect of the legislation inforce in each country in the matter ofradio-frequency devices, please notethat:

– the market-specific homologationnumbers are listed in the followingsection: Radio-frequency remote con-trol: ministerial homologation;

– the homologation number isprinted on the component for marketswhere this is required.

The code marking may also beprinted on the transmitter and/or thereceiver for versions/markets wherethis is required.

28

INDIVIDUALSETTINGS

Height adjustmentLift or lower lever B repeatedly to

raise or lower the seat.

Adjusting the reclining seat back Turn knob C forwards or backwards

to straighten or recline the seat back.

Lumbar adjustment Press button E (fig. 14) to adjust the

driver’s seat lumbar support.

ELECTRICALLYADJUSTABLE SEATS (where fitted) (fig. 15)

Only make adjustments of the dri-ver’s seat when the car is stationary.

The adjustment is only possible whenthe ignition key is at MAR (with theexception of the driver’s seat backfore/aft adjustment, the height adjust-ment and seat back adjustment).

Use controls A and B (fig. 15):

¯˙ to adjust the seat forwards andbackwards (control A);

Only adjust the driver’sseat when the car is sta-tionary.

MANUALLY ADJUSTABLEFRONT SEATS (fig. 13-14)

Moving the seat backwards orforwards

Lift lever A (fig. 13) and push theseat backwards or forwards; you are inthe correct position for driving whenyour hands are resting on the steeringwheel rim and your arms are slightlybent. Once you have released the lever,check that the seat is firmly locked inthe runners by trying to move it backand forth. Failure to lock the seat inplace could result in the seat movingsuddenly and dangerously.

fig. 13P

4T00

07fig. 14

P4T

0270

29

to adjust the height of the frontand rear part of the driver’s seat

and the rear part only of the passen-ger’s seat (control A);

¯˙ to adjust the seat back (control B).

Driver’s seat lumbar adjustment

This device makes it possible to varyback support and improve comfort.Press the front part of the button C (fig.15) to increase the support and the rearpart of the button to decrease it.

Heating (where fitted)

Press button D (fig. 15) to switchthe seat heating on. Press the buttonagain to switch it off.

The LEDs on the dashboard willlight up (A-fig. 16 = driver’s seat, B =passenger’s seat).

Storing the driver’s seat positions(where fitted-fig. 17)

The system allows to store and recalltwo different driver’s seat and exter-nal rearview mirror positions.

The seat and rearview mirror posi-tion can only be stored when the ig-nition key is at MAR.

Adjust the driver’s seat position andthe external rearview mirrors as de-scribed.

Press button “MEM” and either but-ton “1”, “2” or “3” corresponding toeach of the stored positioned at the

same time until two confirmationbeeps are heard.

The previously stored position willautomatically be deleted when a newposition is stored under the same but-ton.

To recall a position, press the re-spective button “1”, “2” or “3” withthe door open. The seat will move au-tomatically and stop when the storedposition is reached. A confirmationbeep will be heard.

IMPORTANT The lumbar adjust-ment and the seat heating functionare not controlled by the stored seatposition system.

fig. 15

P4T

0333

fig. 16 fig. 17P

4T02

71

P4T

0332

30

Rear central seat

Versions with single seat (fig. 22):

To improve passenger safety theheight of the head restraint can be ad-justed.

To raise it, grip the head restraint atthe base and pull it upwards com-pletely until hearing a click.

To lower it, press it downwardskeeping button A pressed until hear-ing a click.

Versions with twin seat (fig. 23):

To adjust the rear central head re-straint height, lift it from its housinguntil hearing a click.

Remember that the headrestraints should be ad-justed to support the back

of your head and not your neck.Only if they are in this position willthey be able to provide effectiveprotection in the event of a rear-end shunt.

fig. 19

P4T

0232

fig. 20P

4T07

01fig. 21

P4T

0702

HEAD RESTRAINTS (fig. 19)

To improve passenger safety, theheight of the front and rear side headrestraints can be adjusted so that thehead rests on them properly.

Front seats (fig. 20)

To adjust the front head restraintheight, move it upwards to the re-quired position. To lower the fronthead restraint, keep button A de-pressed and return it to the requiredposition. The front head restraints canbe adjusted for tilt by moving them inthe direction of the arrows as shownin the figure below. Front head re-straints are not removable.

Rear side seats (fig. 21)

To adjust the rear side head restraintheight, lift it from its housing untilhearing a click.

To bring it back to the original po-sition: press buttons A and lower thehead restraint until it fits into the seatback.

31

FRONT ARMREST (fig. 24)

The armrest can be adjusted up ordown.

To use the armrest, lower it asshown in the figure.

An oddment compartment is con-cealed inside the armrest. Press but-ton A to lift the cover.

IMPORTANT When the armresthas been lifted completely, take carenot to accidentally press button A,otherwise you will open the objecttray cover and the contents will fallout.

REAR ARMREST (fig. 25)

Lower the armrest to the positionshown for use by lowering the lever onthe armrest.

To close, lift the armrest into itshousing.

fig. 24P

4T08

08fig. 25

P4T

0014

fig. 23

P4T

0735

fig. 22

P4T

0012

To raise it easily, grip the head re-straint from the back.

To bring it back to the original po-sition: press buttons A and lower thehead restraint until it fits into the seatback.

32

STEERING WHEEL (fig. 27)

The steering wheel height and axialposition can be adjusted.

1) Move lever A to position 1.

2) Adjust the steering wheel (bypulling, pushing, lifting or loweringit).

3) Return the lever to position 2 tolock the wheel in place.

Only make adjustmentswhen the car is stationary.

INTERNAL REARVIEW MIRROR

Manually adjustable (fig. 28)

This mirror can be adjusted in fourdirections by means of lever A:

1) normal position

2) anti-dazzle position.

The mirror is also fitted with a safetydevice that releases the mirror in theevent of an impact.

Automatically adjustable (where fitted-fig. 29)

This mirror is automatically set today and night position.

fig. 27

P4T

0809

fig. 28P

4T02

72fig. 29

P4T

0016

On versions with single seat the reararmrest is equipped with glass-tinholder (fig. 26).

fig. 26

P4T

0734

33

If the mirrors make it dif-ficult to get through nar-row gaps and in automatic

car washes, fold them from posi-tion 1 to position 2 (fig. 32).

EXTERNAL REARVIEWMIRRORS (fig. 30-31-32)

These mirrors can only be adjustedwhen the ignition key is at MAR.

Turn switch A (fig. 30-31) to posi-tion 1 (left-hand mirror) or to posi-tion 2 (right-hand mirror) to selectthe mirror to be adjusted.

Press switch A to adjust the mirrorin the four directions.

After adjusting, turn switch A backto position 0 to prevent moving themirrors accidentally.

fig. 30

P4T

0056

fig. 31P

4T00

29fig. 32

P4T

0017

The mirrors are automatically demi-sted/ defrosted when the heated rearwindow is operated.

IMPORTANT The curve of the mir-ror surface makes objects seem fur-ther away than they actually are.

Storing rearview mirrorpositions (where fitted)

The external rearview mirror posi-tion is stored along with the driver’sseat position in versions fitted with adriver’s seat electrical adjustment andstoring feature.

The mirrors can be folded manuallyor electrically (where fitted) to reduceside clearance.

Turn switch A (fig. 31) to position 3to fold the mirrors electrically (wherefitted). Turn the switch to position 0to return the mirrors to their normalposition.

34

SEAT BELTSHOW TO USE THE SEAT BELTS (front and rear seats - fig. 33)

To fasten the seat belts, take thetongue of fastener A and push it intobuckle B, until you hear it click.

Pull the seat belt gently. If it jams,let it rewind a little and pull it outagain without jerking.

Instrument panel warning light <will come on if the ignition key isturned to MAR and the driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

To release the seat belts, pressbutton C. Guide the seat belt withyour hand while is rewinding to pre-vent it from twisting.

The seat belt reel mechanism en-sures that the belt automatically ad-justs to the wearer allowing him orher to move in complete freedom.

When the car is parked on a steepslope the reel mechanism may block;this is normal.

Only adjust seat beltheight when the car is sta-tionary.

The reel mechanism prevents thewebbing coming out when it is jerkedor if the car brakes sharply, is in acollision or when cornering at highspeed.

ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT OFTHE SEAT BELTS (fig. 34)

Always adjust the height of the frontseat belt to fit the person wearing it.This could greatly reduce the risk ofinjury in the case of collision.

The belt is adjusted properly whenthe webbing passes approximatelyhalfway between the edge of theshoulder and the neck.

The seat belt can be adjusted to oneof five different heights.

fig. 33P

4T00

19fig. 34

P4T

0018

For maximum safety,keep the back of your seatupright, lean back into it

and make sure the seat belt fitsclosely across your chest and hips.

Never press button (C)when travelling.

35

USE OF THE REAR SEAT BELTS

The rear seat belts must beworn as shown (fig. 35).

You should put the belt on when youare sitting upright and leaning backin your seat.

When no-one is sitting in the rearseats, carefully fold the belts andbuckles and stow them away in thereceptacles in the seat back.

To raise the belt

Lift loop A to the required position.

To lower

Press button B and move loop Adownwards at the same time to therequired position.

After adjustment, alwayscheck that the slider is an-chored in one of the posi-

tions provided. To do this, with thebutton released, exert a furtherpressure to allow the anchor de-vice to catch if release did not takeplace at one of the preset positions.

fig. 35

P4T

0703

FRONT SEAT BELT LOADLIMITING DEVICE

In order to increase passive safety,the front seat belt reels have a built-in load limiting device which collapsein a controlled fashion so to dose theforce on the passenger’s shoulder dur-ing retaining operation.

36

Remember that in thecase of a violent collision,back seat passengers not

wearing seat belts also represent aserious danger to the passengers inthe front.

Proper backrest couplingis guaranteed when eachhandle (B – fig. 35 / a) and

(C – fig. 35 / b), is retracted in itshousing.

Make sure the seat backis correctly hooked onboth sides to prevent seat

back being thrown forwards andinjuring passengers should youbrake sharply.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FORTHE USE OF THE SEAT BELTS

The driver is responsible for re-specting and enforcing the local rulesand laws regarding the use of seatbelts.

Make sure the seat beltsof the front and rear pas-sengers are fastened at all

times. You increase the risk of se-rious injury or death in a collisionif you travel with the belts unfas-tened.

fig. 35/a

P4T

0205

fig. 35/bP

4T02

06

37

Seat belts must also be worn by ex-pectant mothers: the risk of injury inthe case of accident is much greaterfor them and their unborn child too ifthey do not have a seat belt on. Ofcourse, they must position the lowerpart of the belt very low down so thatit passes under the abdomen (fig. 37). HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT

BELTS IN PROPER WORKINGORDER AT ALL TIMES

1) When wearing the seat belts, al-ways ensure they are not twisted andare free to wind in and out.

2) Following a serious accident, re-place the belt being worn at the time,even if it does not seem damaged.

3) When cleaning the belts, washthem by hand with water and neutralsoap, rinse them and let them dry inthe shade. Do not use strong deter-gents, bleach, colourings or any otherchemical substance that could weakenthe fibres.

4) Do not allow the reel mechanismsto get wet: they are only guaranteedto work properly if they remain dry.

fig. 37

P4T

0043

fig. 38P

4T00

44

Never travel with a childsitting on the passenger’slap with a single belt to

protect them both (fig. 38).

fig. 36

P4T

0042

The webbing must not betwisted. The upper sectionmust pass across the

shoulder and chest diagonally. Thelower part must fit closely acrossthe passenger’s hips and not theabdomen, to prevent them fromsliding forwards (fig. 36). Do notuse clips, fasteners etc. to preventthe belt adhering to the passenger’sbody.

IMPORTANT Arrange the child re-straint seat on the rear seat behind thepassenger’s seat. This is the most pro-tected position in the passenger com-partment in the event of a collision.

38

CARRYINGCHILDRENSAFELY

passenger’s air bag, which duringinflation could cause serious in-jury, even mortal, regardless of theseriousness of the crash that trig-gered it. Children may be placedon the front seat of cars fitted withpassenger’s air bag deactivation.In this case, it is absolutely neces-sary to check the warning light Fon the cluster to make sure thatdeactivation has actually takenplace (see paragraph front andside air bags at item front passen-ger air bag).

The front passenger seat shall beadjusted in the most backward po-sition to prevent any contact be-tween child’s seat and dashboard.

For optimal protection in the eventof a crash, all passengers must beseated and wearing adequate restraintsystems.

This is even more important for chil-dren.

According to 2003/20/EC Directive,this prescription is compulsory for allEuropean Community countries.

Compared with adults, their head isproportionally larger and heavier thanthe rest of the body, while the musclesand bone structure are not completelydeveloped. Therefore, correct restraintsystems are necessary, other thenadult seat belts.

SERIOUS DANGER:Never place cradlechild’s seats on the

front passenger seat of cars fittedwith passenger air bag since theair bag activation could cause se-rious injuries, even mortal.

You are advised to carry childrenalways on the rear seat, as this isthe most protected position in thecase of a crash. In any case, chil-dren's seats must absolutely not befitted on the front seat of car’s with

A IRBAG

fig. 39

P4T

0234

39

fig. 40P

4T02

38fig. 41

P4T

0237

The results of research on the bestchild restraint systems are containedin the European Standard ECE-R44.This Standard enforces the use of re-straint systems classified in fivegroups:

Group 0 0-10 kg in weight

Group 0+ 0-13 kg in weight

Group 0 9-18 kg in weight

Group 0 15-25 kg in weight

Group 0 22-36 kg in weight

As it may be noted, the groups over-lap partly and in fact, in commerce itis possible to find devices that covermore than one weight group (fig. 39).

All restraint devices must bear thecertification data, together with thecontrol brand, on a solidly fixed labelwhich must absolutely never be re-moved.

Over 1.50 m in height, from thepoint of view of restraint systems,children are considered as adults andwear the seat belts normally.

GROUP 1

Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg inweight, children may be carried fac-ing forwards, with seats fitted withfront cushion (fig. 41), through whichthe car seat belt restrains both childand seat.

Lineaccessori Lancia offers seats foreach weight group, which are the rec-ommended choice, as they have beendesigned and experimented specifi-cally for Lancia cars.

GROUP 0 and 0+

Babies up to 13 kg must be carriedfacing backwards on a cradle seat,which, supporting the head, does notinduce stress on the neck in the eventof sharp deceleration.

The cradle is restrained by the carseat belts, as shown in fig. 40 and inturn it must restrain the child with itsown belts.

The figure is only an ex-ample for mounting. Attainto the instructions for fas-

tening which must be enclosedwith the specific child restraintsystem you are using .

40

The figure is indicativefor assembly only. The seatshould be installed follow-

ing the instructions that must ac-company it.

The figure is only an ex-ample for mounting. Attainto the instructions for fas-

tening which must be enclosedwith the specific child restraintsystem you are using.

Seats exist which aresuitable for coveringweight groups 0 and 1 with

a rear connection to the vehiclebelts and their own belts to re-strain the child. Due to their size,they can be dangerous if installedincorrectly fastened to the car beltswith a cushion. Carefully followthe instructions for installationprovided with the seat.

GROUP 3

For children from 22 kg up to 36 kgthe size of the child’s chest no longerrequires a support to space the child’sback from the seat back.

Fig. 43 shows proper child seat po-sitioning on the rear seat.

Children taller than 1.50 m canwear seat belts like adults.

correctly in relation to the belts, sothat the diagonal part adheres to thechest and not to the neck and that thehorizontal part clings to the child’spelvis and not the abdomen (fig. 42).

GROUP 2

Starting from 15 kg to 25 kg inweight, children may be restrained di-rectly by the car belts. The only func-tion of the seat is to position the child

fig. 43

P4T

0235

fig. 42P

4T02

36

41

Passenger seat compliance with regulations on child’s seat use

Lancia Lybra complies with the new Directive 2000/3/EC regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats ac-cording to the following tables:

SEATGroup Range of weight

Front Side Centralpassenger rear rear

passenger passenger

Group 0, 0+ fino a 13 kg U U U

Group 1 9 - 18 kg U U U

Group 2 15 - 25 kg U U U

Group 3 22 - 36 kg U U U

Key:

U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for thespecified “Groups”

42

5) Always check the seat belt is wellfastened by pulling the webbing.

6) Only one child is to be strappedto each retaining system.

7) Always check the seat belts do notfit around the child’s throat.

8) While travelling, do not let thechild sit incorrectly or release thebelts.

9) Passengers should never carrychildren on their laps. No-one, how-ever strong they are, can hold a childin the event of a crash.

10) In case of an accident, replacethe seat with a new one.

Below is a summary of the rulesof safety to be followed forcarrying children:

1) The recommended position forinstalling children’s seat is on the rearseat, as it is the most protected in thecase of a crash.

2) In cars fitted with passenger airbag never place child’s restraint sys-tems on the front seat since childrenshall never be seated on the front pas-senger seat.

3) If the passenger’s air bag is deac-tivated always check the warninglightF on the cluster to make surethat it has actually been deactivated.

4) Attain to the instructions for fas-tening the specific child restraint sys-tem which you are using. These in-structions must be provided by themanufacturer. Keep the child re-straint system installation instructionswith the car documents and thisHandbook. Never use a child restraintsystem without installation instruc-tions.

PRETENSIONERSYour car is fitted with pretensioners

on the front side seats to improve pro-tection. These devices are triggered bya sensor in the event of a violent im-pact and pull back a few inches ofwebbing. In this way the pretensionerensures that the belt is adhering per-fectly to the body before the belt be-gins to hold back the wearer.

When the pretensioner has beentriggered the retractor will lock. Theseat belt cannot be drawn back upeven when guiding it manually.

Some smoke may be produced whenthe pretensioner is triggered. Thesmoke is harmless and does indicatethe beginning of a fire.

The pretensioners do not require anymaintenance or lubrication. Any mod-ification of their original state invali-dates its efficiency.

43

If, as the result of exceptional nat-ural occurrences (floods, sea stormsetc.), the device is soaked throughwith water and mud, it must be re-placed.

The pretensioner will give maximumprotection when the seat belt adheressnugly to the wearer’s chest and hips.

The pretensioner canonly be used once. After acollision that has triggered

it, have it replaced at a Fiat Deal-ership. The validity of the device iswritten on the plate located in theglove compartment. Contact Lan-cia Dealership to have pretension-ers replaced as this date ap-proaches.

Under no circumstancesshould the components ofthe pretensioner be tam-

pered with or removed. Any inter-ventions should be carried out byqualified and authorised person-nel. Always contact a Lancia Dealer-ship.

Operations involving bang-ing, vibrations or heating(exceeding 100°C for a

maximum of six hours) in the areaaround the pretensioner may trig-ger or damage the device. Vibra-tions from rough road surfaces or accidental jolting caused bymounting pavements etc. do nothave any effect on the preten-sioner. If, however, you need anyassistance, go to a Lancia Dealer-ship.

FRONT AND SIDEAIRBAGS

The car is equipped with frontairbags for driver (fig. 45/a) and pas-senger (fig. 46), and with side airbags,side bags (fig. 47) and window bags(fig. 48).

fig. 45/a

P4T

0810

AIRBAG

PRETENSIONERS

AND

CLOCK SPRING2019

07

20182017

0102

0304

0506

0809

1011

12

2015

07

2014

2013

0102

0304

0506

0809

1011

12

ATTENZIONE:

CAUTION:

ACHTUNG:

ATTENTION:

fig. 45P

4T08

14

FRONT AIRBAGS

Description and operationThe front airbag (driver and pas-

senger) is a safety device which is im-mediately triggered in the event of afront impact.

fig. 46

P4T

0705

The front Air bag consists of an in-stantly inflatable bag housed in a spe-cial compartment located:

– in the centre of the steering wheelon the driver’s side;

– in the dashboard on the passen-ger’s side (larger bag).

fig. 48P

4T07

07fig. 47

P4T

0706

The front airbag (driver and pas-senger) is a device which protects theoccupants of the car during a head-oncollision of a medium-high degree byplacing a soft bag between the pas-senger and the steering wheel or thedashboard.

In a collision, an electronic controlunit processes the signals from a de-celeration sensor and, where required,inflates the airbag.

The bag inflates instantly and actsas a soft protective barrier betweenthe front seat passengers and thestructures in front of them that couldcause injury. The bags deflates im-mediately afterwards.

Please don’t apply stick-ers or other objects to thesteering wheel, to the air-

bag cover on the passenger's sideor on the side roof lining to the up-holstery on the roof side. Don’tplace objects on the dashboardpassenger’s side (such as mobilephones) because they could tam-per with the correct opening of thepassenger’s air-bag and thancause serious injuries to the vehi-cle occupants.

44

45

A passenger not wearingthe seat belt may crashinto the bag before it is

fully inflated. In this case, the pro-tection is considerably decreased.The airbag, as a consequence, isnot a replacement for the use ofseat belts but rather a comple-ment. We recommend that seatbelts are worn at all times as pre-scribed by legislation in Europeand most other countries world-wide.

In the event of front collisions at lowspeed, the restraining action of theseat belts is sufficient and the airbagis not inflated.

For impacts against very deformableor mobile objects (traffic sign poles,heaps of gravel or snow, parked vehi-cles), rear impacts (e.g. a car crash-ing into the back), side impacts, wedg-ing under other vehicles or barriers(e.g. under a truck or guard rail), theairbag does not offer additional pro-tection with respect to the seat beltsand may even be undesirable.

The fact that the airbag is not trig-gered in these situations, this does notsignify a malfunction.

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG

The passenger’s airbag was designedand calibrated to protect a personwearing seat belts.

When fully inflated, the bag will fillmost of the space between the dash-board and the passenger.

SEVERE DANGER:If the car has apassenger’s airbag,

do not place the child restraint seaton the front seat. If required, alwaysdeactivate the passenger’s frontairbag when a child seat is placed onthe front seat. Although it may not beprescribed by law, we recommendreactivating the airbag as soon as itis no longer necessary to carry chil-dren to provide better protection toadult passengers.

A IRBAG

Warning light F indi-cates also warning light ¬failure. This is indicated

by intermittent flashing, over 4seconds, of warning light F. Inthis event, warning light ¬ couldbe not up to indicate restraint sys-tem failures, if any. Stop the carand contact Lancia Dealership tohave the system checked.

46

The side airbag will work althoughthe front airbag is deactivated.

The key can be inserted and re-moved from the switch with the dooropen in any of the two positions.

The key switch (fig. 49) has twopossible positions:

1) Passenger’s front airbag active:(position ON P) instrument panelwarning light off. Do not carry chil-dren on the front seat.

2) Passenger’s front airbag deacti-vated: (position OFFF) instrumentpanel warning light on. A child maybe carried on the front seat, protectedwith a specific restraint system.

TheFwarning light on the instru-ment panel will stay on until the pas-senger front airbag is reactivated.

Only turn the switch whenthe engine is not runningand the ignition key is re-

moved.

The passenger’s frontairbag deactivated warn-ing light will signal

airbag warning light faults. Inthis case, the situation on the in-strument panel is:

– airbag warning light off;

– passenger front airbag deacti-vated warning light flashing(past the normal four seconds).

Stop the car and contact LanciaDealership to have the systemchecked.

¬

¬

Manually deactivating thepassenger’s front airbag (fig. 49)

The passenger’s front airbag can bedeactivated if it is absolutely neces-sary to carry a child in the front pas-senger seat.

The airbag is deactivated with theignition key by means of the switch onthe right-hand side of the dashboard(fig. 46). The switch can only bereached when the door is open.

fig. 49

P4T

0264

47

SIDE AIRBAGS(SIDE BAG – WINDOW BAG)

Purpose of the side airbags is to in-crease passenger protection in theevent of a side impact of medium tohigh severity.

Side airbags consist of an instantlyinflatable bag:

- the side bag is housed in the frontseat backs. This solution ensures thatthe bag is always in an optimal posi-tion with respect to the passenger, re-gardless of the seat position;

- since the window bag is a “win-dow” system it is housed in the roofside covering, masked with a properfinishing that enables bag deflationdownwards. This solution has beenstudied for protecting the head andtherefore to offer the best passengerprotection in the event of a side im-pact. The “window” solution offersthe aforesaid top protection perfor-mance through the wide deflation sur-face and the self-supporting charac-teristics, the same type of protectionis also offered to rear seat passengers.

IMPORTANT The front and/or sideairbags can be triggered if the car isinvolved in hard impacts or collisionsin the area of the underbody, e.g.: vi-olent impacts against steps, kerbs orprojecting objects fixed to the ground,or if the car falls into large pot-holesor dips in the road surface.

IMPORTANT When the airbag isfired it emits a small amount of pow-ders and smoke. This is not harmfuland does not indicate the beginning ofa fire. Furthermore the surface of theinflated bag and the passenger com-partment may be covered with pow-dery residues. This powder may irri-tate skin and eyes. In the event of ex-posure, wash with mild soap and wa-ter.

In the event of a side collision theelectronic control unit processes thesignals coming from a decelerationsensor and, if required, fires the bags.

The bag inflates instantly and actsas a soft protective barrier betweenthe body of the front seat passengersand the car door. The bag deflates im-mediately afterwards.

In the event of side collisions at lowspeed, the restraining action of theseat belts is sufficient and the airbagis not inflated.

The airbag, as a consequence, is nota replacement for the use of seat beltsbut rather a complement. We recom-mend that seat belts are worn at alltimes as prescribed by legislation inEurope and most other countriesworld-wide.

Side airbags are not deactivated byfront airbag switch operation, as de-scribed in the previous paragraph andtherefore in the event of side impact,protection is guaranteed also to anychild carried on the front passengerseat.

48

When the ignition key isturned to MAR (passengerfront airbag deactivation

switch at ON), the warning lightwill come on for approximately

four seconds and flash for otherfour seconds to remind the driverthat the passenger’s front and sideairbags will be fired in the event ofa crash. The warning light shouldgo out immediately afterwards.

If an attempt has beenmade to steal the car, or ifit has actually been stolen

or has been vandalised in any wayor subjected to flooding, have theairbag system checked over at aLancia Dealership.

If the car changes hands, the newowner must be made aware of the in-dications given above and be giventhis “Owner Handbook”.

IMPORTANT Pretensioners, frontairbags and side airbags are activatedby the electronic control unit accord-ing to the type of impact. Conse-quently, missed activation of one ormore system components does not in-dicate a fault in the system.

GENERAL NOTES

If the ¬ warning lightdoes not turn on whenturning the ignition key to

MAR or if it stays on when travel-ling, this could indicate a failurein safety retaining systems; underthis condition air bags or preten-sioners could not trigger in theevent of collision or, in a restrictednumber of cases, they could trig-ger accidentally. Stop the car andcontact Lancia Dealership to havethe system checked immediately.

The air bag system has a validity of14 years as to the pyrotechnic charge,and 10 years as to the twisted contact.As this date approaches, contact Lan-cia Dealership to have it replaced.

IMPORTANT After an accidentwhich triggered the airbags, go to aLancia Dealership to have the en-tire safety system, the electronic con-trol unit, the seat belts and the pre-tensioners replaced and to have theelectrical system checked.

Any diagnostic, repair or replace-ment operations concerning theairbag system must exclusively becarried out at a Lancia Dealership.

If you are having the car scrapped,have the airbag system deactivated ata Lancia Dealership first.

49

Do not travel with objectson your lap or in front ofyou nor with a pipe, pencil

or similar between your lips; youcould seriously hurt yourself if theairbag inflates in a collision.

Do not wash the seatback in cars with sideairbags with pressurised

steam or water in automatic seatwashing stations.

Do not cover back rest offront seats with trims orcovers there are not set for

the use of side bags.

The airbag does not re-place seat belts but ratherincreases their effective-

ness. Furthermore, the airbag is notfired in the event of low speed frontcollisions, side collisions, rear-endshunts and roll-overs. In thesecases, the passengers are only pro-tected by the seat belts which forthis reason must always be fastened.

It is important to remem-ber that the airbag can befired even when the car is

stationary if it is hit by another ve-hicle travelling at suitable speed. Asa consequence, hever sit children inthe front seat, even if the car is notmoving. On the contrary, the airbagswill not be fired if the car is crashedinto when the key is not inserted orturned. Consequently, in this case,the fact that the system is not fireddoes not indicate a fault.

The airbag is set to befired in the event of colli-sions which are greater

than the pretensioner settings.Consequently, for collisions in thebracket between the two thresh-olds, it is normal for only the pre-tensioners to be fired.

Always drive with bothhands on the rim of thesteering wheel so that the

airbag is free to inflate during ahead-on collision and protect youfrom serious injury. Do not drivewith your body bending towardsthe steering wheel, but sit in an up-right position with your back rest-ing against the seat.

Do not apply stickers orother objects to the steer-ing wheel, to the passen-

ger’s airbag cover or to the sideairbag covers.

50

INSTRUMENT PANELPETROL VERSIONS

fig. 50P4T0733

fig. 51 P4T0635

A Engine coolant temperature gauge with overheating warning light - B Speedometer - C Kilometre counter (and trip me-ter) - D Engine rev counter - E Fuel gauge and reserve warning light - F Warning lights - G Trip meter reset button.

DIESEL VERSIONS

51

INSTRUMENTS

IMPORTANT After stopping theengine (turning the key to STOP), thespeedometer and the rev counter arere-calibrated for approximately onesecond. During this time, the speedome-ter and rev counter needles will hoverand a slight ticking sound may beheard.

SPEEDOMETER (fig. 52)

The speedometer shows the carspeed expressed in kilometres perhour (km/h).

IMPORTANT The speedometermay present different full scale valuesaccording to the versions.

REV COUNTER (fig. 53-54)

If the needle is in the hazard sector(the section with the progressivelycloser lines) it shows your car’s engineis over-revving. Do not travel with theneedle in this sector.

When the engine is idling, the revcounter may show a gradual or sud-den increase in engine speed, accord-ing to the case. This is normal and in-dicates the operation of the climate

control compressor or fans, etc. Inparticular, a gradual variation in en-gine revolution speed safeguards bat-tery charge.

IMPORTANT The hazard sectorscan present different widths and dif-ferent full scale values according tothe various car versions.

IMPORTANT The electronic injec-tion control system will progressivelycut off the flow of fuel when the en-gine is over-revving and the enginewill consequently lose power.

fig. 52

P4T

0636

fig. 53 - petrol versionsP

4T06

37fig. 54 - diesel versions

P4T

0638

52

ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE WITHOVERHEATING WARNINGLIGHT (fig. 55)

This instrument indicates the enginecoolant temperature. It starts sig-nalling the temperature when thisreaches approximately 50°C.

The needle should usually be onmiddle scale values. Reduce your de-mand on the engine if the needle ap-proaches top scale values.

FUEL GAUGE AND RESERVEWARNING LIGHT (fig. 56)

The fuel reserve warning light willcome on to indicate that there are ap-proximately eight litres of fuel in thetank.

Do not travel with the fuel tank al-most empty: the gaps in fuel deliverycould damage the catalyser.

fig. 55

P4T

0051

fig. 56

P4T

0052

The warning light will come on toindicate that the coolant temperatureis too hot. In this case, stop the engineimmediately and contact a LanciaDealership.

IMPORTANT The needle may ap-proach the top scale values if the en-gine cooling radiator external part isobstructed or dirty.

In this case, inspect and remove theobstructions. Accurately clean the ex-ternal part of the radiator as soon aspossible.

53

RIGHT-HANDDIRECTIONINDICATORS

(flashing) (green)

When the direction indicator stalk ispulled up and when the hazard lightsare on (along with the left-hand di-rection indicator warning light).

LEFT-HANDDIRECTIONINDICATORS

(flashing) (green)

When the direction indicator stalk ispushed down and when the hazardlights are on (along with the right-hand direction indicator warninglight).

Ÿ

Δ

KILOMETRE COUNTER(AND TRIP METER) (fig. 57-58)

The following information is shownon display (fig. 57):

– the total number of kilometres dri-ven (six digits) on the first line

– the trip meter reading (four digits)on the second line.

Press button B (fig. 58) for at leastone second seconds to reset the tripmeter.

IMPORTANT The trip meter read-ing will be deleted if the battery is dis-connected.

WARNING LIGHTS The warning lights come on in the

following circumstances:

fig. 57

P4T

0639

fig. 58P

4T00

20

54

SEAT BELTS (red)

When the driver’s seat beltis not fastened correctly.

<

LOW ENGINE OILPRESSURE (red)

When the engine oil pres-sure falls below the normal level.

The warning light should come onwhen the ignition key is turned toMAR and should go out as soon asthe engine starts.

A delay in the light going out is ac-ceptable only when the engine isidling.

If the engine has been taxed heavily,the light may flash when idling. Itshould, however, go out when you ac-celerate slightly.

v

If the warning lightcomes on when the car isrunning, stop the engine

and contact a Lancia Dealership.

GLOW PLUGS (amber) (jtd versions - amber)

When the ignition key isturned to MAR. The light will go outwhen the glow plugs reach the pre-scribed temperature.

Start the engine as soon as the warn-ing light goes out.

If after starting the engine, thewarning light flashes for approxi-mately 30 seconds, you can run theengine but you should contact a Lan-cia Dealership as soon as possible tohave the problem solved.

m OUTSIDE LIGHTS(green)

When the side/taillightsare switched on or the ignition key isturned to PARK.

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS (blue)

When the main beam head-lights are switched on.

3

1

BATTERY NOTRECHARGINGPROPERLY (red)

When there is a fault in the currentgenerating system.

The warning light should come onwhen the ignition key is turned toMAR and should go out as soon asthe engine starts.

w

TRAILER DIRECTIONINDICATORS (green)Contact a Lancia

Dealership for connections

When electrically connected to atrailer and the director indicator stalkor the hazard light switch is operated.

lWhen the outside temperature is

high, the warning light may come onfor a moment only.

55

FRONT BRAKE PADSWORN (red)

When the front brakepads are worn. Have them replaced assoon as possible.

IMPORTANT The car is equippedwith front brake pad wear sensorsonly. Have the rear brake padschecked when the front pads are re-placed.

EOBD SYSTEM ENGINECONTROL SYSTEM(amber)

(in compliance with directive98/69/CE-EURO3)

In normal conditions, the warninglight will come on when the ignitionkey is turned to MAR and should goout as soon as the engine is started.The initial lighting up shows that thewarning light is working properly.

Warning light either stays on orcomes on while travelling:

d

U

Fixed light - warning of a fuelfeed/ignition/injection system failurewhich may increase emissions in ex-haust or cause possible drops in per-formance, poor handling and highconsumption.

In such conditions, you can continuedriving but you should not tax the en-gine and you should moderate thespeed. Prolonged use with the warn-ing light on can cause damage. Con-tact a Lancia Dealership as soon aspossible.

The warning light will go out whenthe failure disappears. In any case,the system will store the error.

Flashing light - warning that thecatalyser can be damaged (see“EOBD system” in this chapter).

If the warning light starts flashing,release the accelerator pedal and slowthe engine down until the warninglight stops flashing. Continue drivingat moderate speed, preventing thewarning light from coming on again.Contact a Lancia Dealership assoon as possible.

If the warning light doesnot turn on when turningthe ignition key to MAR or

if it stays on when travelling, thiscould indicate a failure in safetyretaining systems; under this con-dition air bags or pretensionerscould not trigger in the event ofcollision or, in a restricted numberof cases, they could trigger acci-dentally. Stop the car and contactLancia Dealership to have the sys-tem checked immediately.

AIRBAG FAILURE (red)

The warning light shouldcome on when the ignition

key is turned to MAR and should goout after approximately four seconds.

The warning light will come on per-manently when there is an airbag sys-tem failure.

¬

Contact a Lancia Dealer-ship as soon as possible iftheU warning light either

does not come on when the key isturned to MAR or comes on, withfixed or flashing light, when trav-elling.

56

ABS (ANTI-LOCK BRAK-ING SYSTEM) FAILURE(amber)

The warning light should come onwhen the ignition key is turned toMAR and should go out after ap-proximately four seconds.

The warning light comes on whenthere is a failure in the ABS system.In this case, the normal braking sys-tem continues to work although with-out the ABS assistance but you shouldhave the car seen to at a LanciaDealership as soon as possible.

>

The car is fitted with anelectronic braking device(EBD). The and

warning lights come on at thesame time when the engine is run-ning to indicate that there is anEBD system failure. In this case vi-olent braking may be accompa-nied by early rear wheel lockingwith the possibility of skidding.Drive the car extremely carefullyto the nearest Lancia Dealershipto have the system checked.

x>

LOW HANDBRAKEBRAKE FLUIDAND/OR HANDBRAKE

ENGAGED (red)The warning light should come on

when the ignition key is turned toMAR and should go out after ap-proximately four seconds.

The warning light will come on af-ter the check phase when the brakefluid level in the reservoir drops un-der the minimum level due to a pos-sible leakage in the system or whenthe handbrake is engaged.

x

If the warning lightcomes on when travelling,check whether the hand-

brake is engaged. If the warninglight stays on and the handbrakeis not engaged, stop immediatelyand contact a Lancia Dealership.

x

WATER IN DIESELFUEL FILTER(amber) - (jtd versions)

Lights up when there is water in thediesel fuel filter.

c

The presence of water inthe fuel feed circuit can se-verely damage the injec-

tion system and make the enginemisfire. Go to a Lancia Dealershipas soon as possible when the cwarning light comes on to have thebleeding operation carried out.

57

LANCIA CODE (amber)

In three cases (with thekey at MAR):

1. One flash - the key code has beenrecognised. The engine can be started.

2. Fixed light - the key code wasnot recognised. Carry out the emer-gency start-up procedure to start theengine (see “In an emergency”).

3. Flashing light - the car is notprotected by the device. The enginehowever can be started.

¢

CRUISE CONTROL(where fitted - amber)

The warning light comeson when the switch on the cruise con-trol stalk is turned to ON when thedevice starts governing the engine.

CRUISE

PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG DEACTIVATED(where fitted - amber)

The warning light will come onwhen the passenger front airbag is de-activated.

ESP (amber) (where required)

By turning the key to MARposition, the warning lamp on thedashboard will light up and go out af-ter about 4 seconds.

If the warning lamp does not go outor stays on when the vehicle is run-ning, contact your Lancia Dealer-ship.

The flashing of the warning lampwhen the vehicle is running indicatesthe actuation of the ESP systemand/or the ASR function.

The simultaneous lighting up ofwarning lamp á on the dashboardand of the LED on the switch indicateASR function malfunction. In thiscase, contact your Lancia Dealer-ship.

CHECK CONTROL (red)

When a fault is found bythe check control system.

Warning light F indi-cates also warning light ¬failure. This is indicated

by intermittent flashing, over 4seconds, of warning light F. Inthis event, warning light ¬couldbe not up to indicate restraint sys-tem failures, if any. Stop the carand contact Lancia Dealership tohave the system checked.

CHECK

F á

58

The ESP system operateseven when the undersizedspare wheel is used. How-

ever, it should be kept in mindthat the undersized spare wheel issmaller than the other wheels and,therefore, its grip on the roadbedis reduced. Therefore, warninglamp á ESP might light up underparticular adhesion conditionsand/or driving manoeuvres; verifythat the lamp goes out when theordinary wheel is fitted. When theundersized spare wheel is fitted tothe vehicle, do not exceed a speedof 80 km/h and avoid manoeuvresthat might cause the vehicle to goout of control.

For correct operation ofthe ESP system the tyresmust absolutely be of the

same brand and type on allwheels, in perfect conditions and,above all, of the specified type,brand and size.

HILL HOLDER (amber)(where required)

By turning the key to MAR position,the warning lamp on the dashboardwill light up and go out after about 4seconds.

If the warning lamp does not go outor stays on when the vehicle is run-ning, contact your Lancia Dealership.

*

59

CHECK CONTROL(fig. 59)

The check control function is man-aged by the instrument panel. Thefunction informs the driver of faultsor warnings by displaying warninglights and messages on the ICS dis-play.

For details on warning light operation,see “Warning lights” in this chapter.

The faults and warnings which aredisplayed by the check control func-tion are shown on the screen regard-less of the operative status of the ICS.

The display will light up if the checkcontrol (only versions with LanciaI.C.S. system with navigator - wherefitted) function sends a message when

the ICS system is off and standing by.The corresponding symbol will ap-pear on the last selected screen.

1 - External light fuse/system/bulbfailure warning light

2 - Rear fog light bulb failure warn-ing light

3 - Left-hand brake light bulb fail-ure warning light

fig. 59

P4T

0640

60

4 - Right-hand brake light bulb ail-ure warning light

5 - Brake light bulb failure warninglight

6 - Low engine coolant level warn-ing light (where fitted)

7 - Low windscreen washer fluidlevel warning light (where fitted)

8 - Low engine oil level warninglight (diesel versions only)

9 - Open door or boot/tailgate warn-ing light

10 - Instrument panel > warninglight failure warning light

11 - Instrument panel > and xwarning light failure warning light(the simultaneous lighting up ofthese two warning lights indicates anEBD electronic brake force distribu-tor failure)

12 - Instrument panel á warninglight failure warning light

13 - Check control failure warninglight

14 - Open door or boot icon (salooncar versions)

15 - Open door or tailgate icon (Sta-tion Wagon versions)

16 - Engine oil level gauge (dieselversions only).

The check control function can dis-play two warning lights at the sametime, side by side in addition to warn-ing light 9 (open door or boot/tailgate).

If there are more than two warnings,the respective warning lights will becyclically displayed every two sec-onds. The red CHECK message willappear in the right-hand part of thedisplay. The red CHECK messagewill also appear if the external lightbulb failure warning light 1 comes on.

The external light bulb failure warn-ing light 1 will always come on in theevent of a rear fog light bulb, left-hand brake light bulb or right-handbrake light bulb failure along with therespective warning lights (2-3-4-5).

IMPORTANT The warning lightswill continue to be displayed alsowhen a different screen or displayfunction is selected until the problemwhich caused the warning is removed.The warning lights 1-8-10-11-12-13have priority over the other checkcontrol function information.

WARNING MESSAGES

When the engine is started and a faultis found, the following messages willappear on the display (for approxi-mately five seconds) before the warn-ing lights 1-10-11-12-13 come on:

– LIGHT FAILURE (warning light 1)– ABS LED KO (warning light 10)– EBD LED KO (warning light 11)– LED ESP KO (warning light 12)– MISSING CHECK AND TRIP

COMPUTER SIGNAL (warning light13)

OPEN DOOR ORBOOT/TAILGATE WARNINGLIGHT (9-14-15)

Icon 14 (saloon cars) or 15 (stationwagons) will be displayed in theright-hand part of the main menudisplay while warning light 9 will ap-pear in the lower left-hand part whenthe key is turned to MAR.

If the door or boot/tailgate is leftopen, icon 14 or 15 will disappear af-ter approximately one minute whilewarning light 9 will stay on.

61

– oil level corresponding to thesafety level: first bar on the left red orwhite, according to the versions, sec-ond bar white, other bars empty.

– oil at minimum level: first bar onthe left red or white, according to theversions, other bars empty.

If the level is low or insufficient (0or 1 bar displayed), warning light 8will come on. The warning light willbe displayed also when other screensor functions are selected.

Icon 16 will flash for approximatelyfive seconds and warning light 8 willcome on to indicate an oil level sensorfailure.

In all conditions (low oil level orfaulty sensor), the red CHECK mes-sage will appear for several seconds inthe right-hand part of the display.

IMPORTANT The low engine oillevel warning light 8 has priority overthe other check control function in-formation.

WARNING LIGHT LED ANDLANCIA I.C.S. CONTROL LED (fig. 60 - where fitted)

Red LED A: this LED lights up forapproximately four seconds when thekey is turned to MAR while the checkcontrol function is running. Any faultswill be signalled by the respectivewarning lights and by the CHECKwarning light. The LED will go outafter approximately ten seconds.

Green LED B: this LED is used forlighting the Lancia ICS controls atnight. It will light up when the key isturned to MAR (approximately twoseconds after the red LED A).

Warning light 9 only will appear inthe lower left-hand part of the displayto signal that a door or the boot/tail-gate is open when the system is dis-playing another function.

The car icon 14 or 15 will appearagain in the right-hand part of thedisplay (as described above) when themain menu is selected again.

LOW ENGINE OIL LEVELWARNING LIGHT AND GAUGE(8-16) (jtd versions only)

The engine oil level will appear onthe main screen for approximately tenseconds after the J screen when thekey is turned to MAR.

The engine oil level is displayed onlywhen it is under the minimum safetylevel.

IMPORTANT The system checksthe oil level only when the engine isstarted if at least 20 minutes havepast since the engine was stopped.

The oil level is displayed by meansof six bars. There are two values andtwo display modalities:

fig. 60

P4T

0283

62

LANCIA ICS WITH MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY(version without NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

– Analogue/digital clock

– Trip computer

– Check control function (*)(*) Refer to the specific paragraphs

for description and operation.

CONTROLS

1) Sound system/tape player/CDplayer (where fitted) buttons

2) - ICS and sound system on/offknob, for adjusting volume and audiosettings

3) ICS function selection and con-firmation knob

4) Sound system settings displaybutton

5) Language, clock functions andspeed limit button

6) Trip computer functions button

7) Display brightness button

P4T0708fig. 61

The Lancia ICS (Integrated ControlSystem) features a multifunctional 5”LCD which is directed so that it canalso be read by the passenger.

The multifunctional display controlsthe following functions:

– Sound system with tape playerand CD player (where fitted) (*)

63

SWITCHING THE ICSON AND OFF

The ICS is switched on automati-cally when the engine is started (i.e.when the key is turned to MAR) andswitched off when the key is turned toSTOP.

Press knob 2 (fig. 61) with the igni-tion key off or extracted to operatethe sound system only. The soundsystem will automatically be switchedoff after approximately 20 minutes.

ADJUSTING THE DISPLAYBRIGHTNESS

The display may employ severalminutes to reach the set brightnessaccording to the temperature.

Keep button LIGHT 7 pressed (re-gardless of whether the outside lightsare on or off) to adjust the displaybrightness. The brightness will be ad-justed progressively from minimum tomaximum and from maximum to min-imum in approximately two seconds.Minimum and maximum brightnessconditions will be held for approxi-mately one second.

IMPORTANT The display will beillegible when set to minimum bright-ness.

The display will automatically bedimmed when the outside lights areswitched on. The buttons will be setaccording to the brightness of theother instruments.

The last set brightness will be auto-matically restored whenever the en-gine is started, regardless of whetherthe outside lights are on or off.

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY

The display will show the LANCIAtrademark for approximately fourseconds when it is switched on. Thiswill be followed by two different con-figurations (fig. 62-63) according tothe ICS operative conditions.

The screen is usually split into fourareas containing the following infor-mation (fig. 62):

A – Data related to the sound sys-tem/CD player (where fitted) and tothe engine oil level (diesel versionsonly).

B – Analogue clock and warninglights.

fig. 62

P4T

0627

AD

CB

64

C – Date, digital clock and variouswarning messages.

D – Car icon with open door/boot/tailgate warning lights, trip computerfunctions, SETUP functions, soundsystem functions and EXP functions.

The sound system information willappear in area A only when the soundsystem is on. The message RADIOOFF will appear when the sound sys-tem is not on. The following informa-tion is provided when the CD playeris on (where fitted):

– the selected CD number (from 1to 6)

– the selected track

– the duration of the selected track.

The engine oil level (diesel versionsonly) will not appear if it is over theminimum safety level.

The analogue clock will not be dis-played in area B if any warning lightsare on. The time will be displayed onthe digital clock in area C.

The message SPEED LIMIT EX-CEEDED will appear in area B whenthe set speed limit is exceeded.

The date, the digital clock (when theanalogue clock is not displayed to makeroom for the warning lights) and thewarning messages (ABS LED KO,EBD LED KO, and LIGHT FAIL-URE) will be shown in area C. Thesemessages will be displayed for ap-proximately five seconds when thesystem is switched on and will then bereplaced by the respective warninglights in area B.

The car icon with the open door/boot/tailgate warning lights, the tripcomputer functions, the SETUP func-tions, the sound system functions andthe EXP function is shown in area D.

The message MISSING CHECKAND TRIP COMPUTER SIGNALwill appear if a fault in the connectionbetween instrument panel and ICSoccurs. In this case, go to a LanciaDealership.

A screen split into three main areas(fig. 63) and featuring a RETURNfunction ( ) will appear when eitherthe HELP RADIO, SETUP or TRIPbutton is pressed. The following in-formation will be provided:

E - Press the HELP RADIO 4 but-ton. The sound system operating con-ditions are shown: VOLUME, BASS,TREBLE, BALANCE, FADER, STA-TION 1-2-3-4-5-6, FM 1-2-3. LW,MW.

fig. 63

P4T

0603

F

E

G

65

Press the SETUP button 5. The fol-lowing selectable options will beshown: SPEED LIMIT, SET TIME,SET DATE, ALARM, TYRE PRES-SURE (these values cannot be edited),LANGUAGE 1-2-3-4-5, SUMMERSAVING TIME ON-OFF.

Press the TRIP button 6. The fol-lowing information will be shown:RANGE, AVG CONSUMPTION,TRAV DISTANCE (kilometres dri-ven since last reset), AVERAGESPEED, TIME ELAPSED.

F – Digital clock (when no warninglights are displayed) and warninglights (when there is a fault).

G – Sound system and CD playerdata (when the sound system is on) orthe message RADIO OFF (when thesound system is off).

The RETURN function (representedby the symbol in some screens)will either take you back to the ICSmain menu (fig. 61) or to the previ-ous page of a menu from a sub-menupage.

The symbol (RETURN) in somescreens will turn white when it is se-lected.

DISPLAY SETTINGS (fig. 64)

Press the button SETUP 5 (fig. 61)with the key at MAR. A screen withthe following functions will appear af-ter the LANCIA trademark screen:

– SPEED LIMIT

– SET TIME

– SET DATE

– ALARM (set) and ON/OFF

– TYRES (the prescribed tyre infla-tion pressure)

– SUMMER SAVING TIME ON/OFF

– ITALIANO

– ENGLISH

– FRANCAIS

– DEUTSCH

– ESPANOL.

Select RETURN ( ) after adjust-ing the settings by turning knob 3(fig. 61) and pressing to confirm.This will take you back to the mainmenu.

fig. 64P

4T06

04

66

Setting the clock

Select the SET TIME function (fig. 64)by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) and pressthe knob to confirm. A screen withthe following fields will appear on thedisplay (fig. 65):

– Hours A

– Minutes B

– RETURN C.

Select field A (hours) by turningknob 3 and pressing it to confirm.

Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in-crease the hours and anticlockwise todecrease them. Press knob 3 when therequired time is shown to confirm.

Select field B (minutes) by turning3 and pressing it to confirm.

Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in-crease the minutes and anticlockwiseto decrease them. Press knob 3 whenthe required time is shown to confirm.

Select RETURN C after adjustingthe settings by turning knob 3 andpressing to confirm. This will take youback to the SETUP menu (fig. 64).

The digital clock will be automati-cally adjusted with the analogueclock.

Switching the summer savingtime on and off

The SUMMER SAVING TIMEON/OFF function allows to switch tosummer saving time and back with-out changing the clock settings.

Select SUMMER SAVING TIME ON( ✓ ) to forward the clock by one hourand SUMMER SAVING TIME OFF( ) to go back by one hour.

Select ON or OFF ( ✓ / ) by meansof knob 3 and press it to confirm.

Setting the date

Select the SET DATE function (fig. 64)by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) and pressthe knob to confirm. A screen withthe following fields will appear on thedisplay (fig. 66):

– Day A

– Month B

– Year C

– RETURN D.

fig. 65

P4T

0605

fig. 66

P4T

0606

A B

C

A B C

D

67

Select field A (day) by turning knob3 and pressing it to confirm.

Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in-crease the days (from 1 to 31) andanticlockwise to decrease them (from31 to 1). Press knob 3 when the re-quired day is shown to confirm.

Select field B (month) by turningknob 3 and pressing it to confirm.

Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in-crease the months (from 1 to 12) andanticlockwise to decrease them (from12 to 1). Press knob 3 when the re-quired month is shown to confirm.

Select field C (year) by turning knob3 and pressing it to confirm.

Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in-crease the years and anticlockwise todecrease them. Press knob 3 when therequired year is shown to confirm.

Select RETURN D after adjusting thesettings by turning knob 3 and press-ing to confirm. This will take you backto the SETUP menu (fig. 64).

Switch the alarm function onand off

Select the ALARM function (fig. 64)by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) and pressthe knob to confirm. A screen withthe following fields will appear on thedisplay (fig. 67):

– Hours A

– Minutes B

– RETURN C.

Select field A (hours) by turningknob 3 and pressing it to confirm.

Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in-crease the hours and anticlockwise todecrease them. Press knob 3 when therequired time is shown to confirm.

Select field B (minutes) by turning3 and pressing it to confirm.

Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in-crease the minutes and anticlockwiseto decrease them. Press knob 3 whenthe required time is shown to confirm.

Select RETURN C after adjustingthe settings by turning knob 3 andpressing to confirm. This will take youback to the SETUP menu (fig. 65).

fig. 67P

4T06

07

A B

C

68

Select ON or OFF by turning theknob 3 to switch the function on andoff.

The message ON will appear on themain menu when the alarm functionis on.

A buzzer will ring at the set time forapproximately 12 seconds also if theignition key is removed.

Selecting the language

Select the language by means ofknob 3 (fig. 61) and press the knobto confirm.

The available languages are ITAL-IAN, ENGLISH, FRENCH, GER-MAN, SPANISH.

Speed limit

The SPEED LIMIT functions in-forms the driver with a visual and/oracoustic warning whenever the setspeed limit is exceeded.

Turn knob 3 (fig. 61) to select thefunction and press the knob to con-firm.

A screen with the following fieldswill appear on the display (fig. 68):

– Set speed limit in km/h A

– Set speed limit warning on/off B

– Buzzer on/off C

– RETURN D.

Select field A (set speed) by turningknob 3 and pressing it to confirm.

Then turn knob 3 clockwise to in-crease the speed and anticlockwise todecrease it. Press knob 3 when the re-quired speed is shown to confirm.

Select field B ON or OFF to switchthe SPEED LIMIT function on or offas required and press knob 3 to con-firm.

Select field C ON or OFF to switchthe buzzer on or off as required andpress knob 3 to confirm.

The system will provide the follow-ing warnings when the SPEEDLIMIT function is on and the setspeed is exceeded:

– the buzzer (if the respective func-tion C is on) will sound for approxi-mately four seconds if the speed doesnot drop to at least 5 km/h under thelimit;

– the SPEED LIMIT function will bedisplayed instead of the main menu(fig. 68) to allow to change the setvalue or switch the buzzer and func-tion on or off.

fig. 68P

4T06

08

AB

C

D

69

– the message SPEED LIMIT EX-CEEDED will appear on the display;

– the sound system (if on) will bemuted (MUTE function).

The message SPEED LIMIT EX-CEEDED will remain on the displayuntil the speed drops to at least 5km/h under the speed limit or untilthe SPEED LIMIT function isswitched off.

Select RETURN D after adjustingthe settings by turning knob 3 andpressing to confirm. This will take youback to the SETUP menu (fig. 64).

Tyre inflation pressure

Select the TYRE function by turn-ing knob 3 (fig. 61) and press theknob to confirm. The prescribed tyreinflation pressure according to theload will be displayed.

IMPORTANT This function pro-vides the prescribed value and not theactual tyre inflation pressure. Checkthe tyre inflation pressure on a regu-lar basis.

TRIP COMPUTER (fig. 69)

Press the TRIP button 6 (fig. 61)with the key at MAR. A screen withthe following functions will appear af-ter the LANCIA trademark screen:

– RANGE

– AVG CONSUMPTION (TRIPMODE)

– FLASH CONSUMPTION (KEYMODE)

– TRAV DISTANCE (kilometresdriven since last reset)

– AVERAGE SPEED

– TIME ELAPSED (since the laststart-up or reset)

– KEY/TRIP

– TRIP RESET.

If the TRIP function is on (manualdata resetting), you can reset data byselecting and confirming the TRIPRESET field in the function screens.

At the end of the settings, eitherpress TRIP 6 again (fig. 61) to goback to the main menu, or HELPRADIO 4 to go to the sound systemfunctions screen, or SETUP 5 to go tothe display setting screen.

fig. 69

P4T

0628

70

IMPORTANT When the engine isstarted (i.e. the key is turned to MAR)the trip computer processes the datarequired for the various functions.

During this phase, the range, con-sumption, etc. values are not dis-played for approximately 30 seconds.

Range (fig. 70)

Select the RANGE function by turn-ing knob 3 (fig. 61) and press theknob to confirm. The approxima-te distance (expressed in km androunded up or down by 1 km) whichcan be travelled with the fuel left inthe tank providing the same meanconsumption conditions computedsince the function was switched on.

The range value is updated by thesystem every 30 seconds. The calcu-lation accuracy is lower than 1 km.

IMPORTANT If the range is lowerthan 50 km and the fuel has reachedthe reserve level, a dotted line will ap-pear instead of the range value. If onthe other hand the range is lower than50 km but the fuel has not yetreached the reserve level, the value 50will appear and not change.

Select RETURN after adjusting thesettings by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) andpressing to confirm. This will take youback to the main menu (fig. 69).

Average consumption (visible with the TRIP function on) (fig. 71)

Select the AVG CONSUMPTIONfunction by turning knob 3 (fig. 61)and press the knob to confirm. Themean consumption for the last fiveminutes (expressed in l/100 km androun-ded up or down by 0.1 l/100km.) is displayed.

The mean consumption value is up-dated by the system every second.The calculation accuracy is lowerthan 0.1 l/100 km.

Select RETURN by turning knob 3(fig. 61) and pressing to confirm.This will take you back to the tripcomputer main menu (fig. 69).

Instant consumption (visiblewith the KEY function on)

Selecting and confirming the IN-STANT CONSUMPTION function,the display will show the vehicle fuelconsumption when travelling; it isuseful to know the fuel consumptionaccording to the type of driving (in1/100 Km and with setting of 0.11/100 Km)

fig. 70P

4T06

10fig. 71

P4T

0611

71

DISTANCE (distance driven) (fig. 72)

Select the DISTANZA (DISTANCETRAV) function by turning knob 3(fig. 61) and press the knob to confirm.The distance driven since the trip com-puter was reset (expressed in km androunded up or down by 0.1 km) willappear (see “Resetting the trip com-puter”).

The distance driven value is updatedby the system every second. The cal-culation accuracy is lower than 1 km.The maximum value which can bedisplayed is 25,000 km.

Select RETURN after adjusting thesettings by turning knob 3 (fig. 61)and pressing to confirm. This willtake you back to the trip computermain menu (fig. 69).

Average speed (fig. 73)

Select the AVERAGE SPEED func-tion by turning knob 3 (fig. 61) andpress the knob to confirm. The meanspeed since the beginning of the tripis displayed (expressed in km/h androunded up or down by 0.1 km/h).The mean speed is computed by thesystem only when the engine is run-ning.

The mean speed value is updated bythe system every second. The calcula-tion accuracy is lower than 0.1 km/h.

Select RETURN after adjusting thesettings by turning knob 3 (fig. 61)and pressing to confirm. This willtake you back to the trip computermain menu (fig. 69).

Time elapsed (trip time) (fig. 74)

Select the TIME ELAPSED functionby turning knob 3 (fig. 61) and pressthe knob to confirm. The time sincethe trip computer was reset (ex-pressed in hours and minutes) is dis-played (see “Resetting the trip com-puter”).

The mean speed value is updated bythe system every second. The calcula-tion accuracy is lower than 2 seconds.The maximum value which can bedisplayed is 99 h and 59 minutes.

Select RETURN after adjusting thesettings by turning knob 3 (fig. 61)and pressing to confirm. This willtake you back to the trip computermain menu (fig. 69).

fig. 74

P4T

0614

fig. 73P

4T06

13fig. 72

P4T

0630

72

Trip computer operationmodalities

The KEY and TRIP functions (fig. 75)can be used to set the two operative con-ditions of the system.

The main different between the twoconditions consists of the way the tripcomputer displays data and the waythe data is reset.

With the KEY function on ( ✓ ), thetrip computer screen is automaticallydisplayed each time that the engine isstarted and the data is automaticallyreset.

With the TRIP function on ( ✓ ), thedata must be manually reset bymeans of the TRIP RESET functionand the trip computer screen can bedisplayed by pressing the buttonTRIP 6 (fig. 61).

Select KEY or TRIP by turningknob 3 (fig. 61) and press the knobto confirm. Press knob 3 again toswitch between one modality and theother.

Resetting the trip computer

The trip computer data can be resetby selecting the TRIP RESET func-tion (fig. 75) by turning knob 3(fig. 61) and pressing the knob toconfirm. Simply confirm to reset allthe stored data.

The TRIP RESET function is onlyavailable in TRIP mode.

If the TRIP function is on (manualdata resetting), you can reset data byselecting and confirming the TRIPRESET field in the function screens.

fig. 75

P4T

0628

73

SOUND SYSTEM(built into the Lancia I.C.S. - version without NAVIGATION system)

fig. 76 P4T0709

The sound system is fitted with au-tomatic functions for volume ad-justment; should it be required tochange their parameters see para-graph: EXPERT FUNCTIONS (CUS-TOMISING OPERATING PARAME-TERS) - EXP (14).

If you drive with the vol-ume too high you put bothyour own life and that of

others in jeopardy.

74

CONTROLS

1 - Radio station, PTY programmepre-set button and CD one track for-ward button

2 - Radio station, PTY programmepre-set button and CD repeat trackbutton

3 - Radio station, PTY programmepre-set button and CD random trackbutton

4 - Radio station, PTY programmepre-set button

5 - Radio station, PTY programmepre-set button and previous CD but-ton

6 - Radio station, PTY programmepre-set button and next CD button

7 - Sound system function button(radio, tape player, CD player - wherefitted)

8 - AUDIO functions (Bass/Tre-ble/Balance/Fader/Volume) andMUTE function (volume muting) se-lecting button.

9 - Power knob: display, sound sys-tem and volume

10 - LOUDNESS function button(automatic in HI-FI systems)

11 - Traffic Programme and Alter-native Frequency function buttons(for RDS programmes)

12 - SCAN function (automatic ra-dio station scanning) and MSS (Mu-sic Search System) function (for skip-ping or repeating a track) button

13 - IS function button (to seek thebest received radio stations)

14 - EXP function button (to cus-tomised sound system settings)

15 - Function and setting selectionand confirmation knob

16 - Radio waveband selection but-ton (LW, MW, FM) and tape AU-TOREVERSE function. In some ver-sions, the message DIR may appearinstead of the symbol shown underthe BAND message.

17 - Radio programme tuning upand tape fast forward button

18 - Radio programme tuning downand tape rewind button

19 - Dolby/Mono function selectionbutton

20 - Maximum reception sensitivityfunction button

21 - RADIO settings button

22 - LIGHT button (for adjustingdisplay brightness)

23 - Eject tape button

CONTROLS ON STEERINGWHEEL (fig. 77 - where fitted)

The main sound system controls areduplicated on the steering wheel. Thecontrols can consequently be operatedwithout distracting the driver.

fig. 77

P4T

0811

75

A - Volume up button

B - MUTE button

C - Volume down button

D - Radio programme tuning upand tape fast forward button

E - Sound system function button(radio, tape player, CD player - wherefitted)

F - Radio programme tuning downand tape rewind button

Adjusting the volume

Press button A to turn the volumeup or button C to turn it down, asshown in “Adjusting the volume”.The button operation is identical tothat of knob 9 (fig. 76) on the Lan-cia I.C.S.

Muting the volume (MUTE function)

Press the MUTE B button to switchthe function on and off. The volumewill immediately be turned down tozero. The button operation is identi-cal to that of the AUDIOz 8 buttonon the Lancia ICS (Mute function).

Radio, Tape, CD selection(SRC function)

Repeatedly press the MODE E but-ton to cyclically select the functions:Radio, Tape (if a tape is in thedeck), CD (if a CD player is fitted)and Phone (if a cellular telephonefree-hands kit is fitted).

The operation of the E button isidentical to that of the SRC 7 button(fig. 76) on the sound system.

Radio, Tape, CD settings

Buttons D and F implement threedifferent functions, according to themode selected by means of the E but-ton (Radio, Tape or CD).

The operation of the buttons is iden-tical to that of the buttons 17 and 18(fig. 76) on the Lancia ICS (describedin detail in the following paragraphs).

1) Radio: tuning

Press button D or F to tune to radiostations in the selected waveband.

2) Tape: fast forward/rewind

Press button D or F to fast forwardor rewind the tape as described in“Fast forward/rewind”.

76

3) CD: next track/previous track

Press button D or F to play the nextor previous track on the CD which isbeing played as described in “Select-ing or repeating a track”.

USEFUL ADVICE

Road safety

You should familiarise with the var-ious function of the sound system(e.g. storing stations) before drivingoff.

Reception conditions

Reception conditions vary all thetime while the car is moving. Recep-tion may be effected by mountains,buildings or bridges, especially whenyou are a long way from the broad-casting transmitter of the station youare listening to.

IMPORTANT A considerable in-crease in volume could occur whentraffic information is given.

Care and maintenance

The basic structure of the sound sys-tem ensures long-term operationwithout the need for any particularmaintenance. Get in touch with aLancia Dealership if anything goeswrong.

Do not leave tapes in direct sunlightor expose them to excessive heat. Putthe cassettes back into their boxes af-ter use.

Use good quality tapes, no longerthan C-90 to ensure optimal play-back.

Only clean the front panel with asoft, anti-static cloth. Cleaning or pol-ishing agents could damage the sur-face.

Dirt on the player head from tapescan, in time, reduce treble duringplayback.

We recommend you clean the headperiodically with a specific headcleaner tape (non abrasive).

Keep CDs away from dust. Do nottouch the surface to prevent skipping.

Do not insert damaged or deformedCDs in the magazine.

Do not expose discs to sources ofheat or sun rays.

Clean dirty CDs with a soft clothfrom the centre outwards.

If you drive with the vol-ume too high you put bothyour own life and that of

others in jeopardy. You should ad-just the volume so that you canhear noises from outside the car(e.g. horns, ambulance/police si-rens, etc.).

77

Button Radio Tape CD changer Phone-inPress Press for Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longerbriefly 2 to 4 seconds than 4 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds

a

b

c

d

e

f

(■) Store pre-set stations under buttons 1-6 (◆) Store PTY programme type (M) CD function status on

Select pre-set station (1-6)PTY: select PTYprogrammetype

Select pre-setstation (1-6)PTY: select PTYprogrammetype

Select pre-setstation (1-6)PTY: select PTYprogrammetype

Select pre-setstation (1-6)PTY: select PTYprogrammetype

Select pre-setstation (1-6)PTY: select PTYprogrammetype

Select pre-setstation (1-6)PTY: select PTYprogrammetype

Store(■)PTY:Store(◆)

Store(■)PTY:Store(◆)

Store(■)PTY:Store(◆)

Store(■)PTY:Store(◆)

Store(■)PTY:Store(◆)

Store(■)PTY:Store(◆)

PTY ON TRACK REPEATON/OFF

Select REPEATor REPEAT MAG

SelectTRACK RANDOM ON/OFF

Next CD

Previous CD

1TRK

2RPT

3RND

4

5CD–

6CD+

78

Button Radio Tape CD changer Phone-inPress Press for Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longerbriefly 2 to 4 seconds than 4 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

p(■) Store pre-set stations under buttons 1-6 (◆) Store PTY programme type (M) CD function status on (•) Cyclical selection

TAPE, CD, RADIO,PHONE (•)

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE,FADERVOLUME (•)

SelectLOUDNESSON/OFF

TP functionON/OFF

Select LEARNSCAN ON/OFF(approximately10 seconds)

FM: IS LEARNfunction

Displayfrequenciesand customisedsettings

Turn to selectfunctionsPress toconfirmselections

FM1, FM2, FM3, MW, LW

AUDIO MUTEON/OFF

ON/OFFTurn left: volume downTurn right: volume up

AF functionON/OFF

EXPERTMODE ON

FM: AUTOSTORE AM: AUTOSTORE

CD, RADIO,PHONE, TAPE(•)

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE,FADERVOLUME (•)

ON/OFFTurn left:volume downTurn right: volume up

SelectLOUDNESSON/OFF

TP functionON/OFF

Select MSSON/OFF

Manual tapeREVERSE

AUDIO MUTEON/OFF

EXPERTMODE ON

RADIO, PHONE,TAPE, CD, (•)

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE,FADERVOLUME (•)

ON/OFFTurn left:volume downTurn right: volume up

SelectLOUDNESSON/OFF

TP functionON/OFF

Select TRACKSCAN ON/OFF(approximately10 seconds)

CD changerstatus (M)

AUDIO MUTEON/OFF

EXPERTMODE ON

TAPE, CD, RADIO, PHONE(•)

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE,FADERVOLUME (•)

ON/OFFTurn left:volume downTurn right: volume up

SelectLOUDNESSON/OFF

AUDIO MUTEON/OFF

EXPERTMODE ON

SRC

AUDIO

z

VOL

LOUD

TPAF

SCANNMSS

IS

EXP

15

BAND

79

AM: Automaticsearch

FM: LEARNSCANFM SEARCH

PTY: Select nextprogrammetype

AM: Automaticsearch

FM: LEARNSCANFM SEARCH

PTY: Selectpreviousprogrammetype

SelectSTEREO/MONO

Selectmaximumreceptionsensitivity

Radio settingscreen

Adjustdisplaybrightness

Open flapEject tape

AM: Manualtuning

FM: Select IS SCAN or RDS SEARCH

PTY: Automatic search or selected PTYprogrammetype

AM: Manualtuning

FM: Select IS SCAN or RDS SEARCH

PTY: Automatic search or selected PTYprogrammetype

Adjust displaybrightness

FM: Manual tuning

FM: Manualtuning

Adjust displaybrightness

Fast forwardWith MSS on:Skip track/seeknext track

RewindWith MSS on:Skip track/seekstart of track

Select Dolby BON/OFF

Adjust displaybrightness

Open flapEject tape

Adjust displaybrightness

Select next track

Select previoustrack

Adjust displaybrightness

Open flapEject tapeFast forward

Rewind

Adjust displaybrightness

Rewind

Adjust displaybrightness

Open flapEject tape

Adjust displaybrightness

©

ß

DOLBYMONO

DX

HELPRADIO

LIGHT

˚

Button Radio Tape CD changer Phone-inPress Press for Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longer Press Press for longerbriefly 2 to 4 seconds than 4 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds briefly than 2 seconds

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

(■) Store pre-set stations under buttons 1-6 (◆) Store PTY programme type (M) CD function status on

80

GENERAL

Anti-theft protection

This sound system is equipped withan anti-theft protection system con-sisting of a four-digit secret code.

The protection system makes thesound system useless if it removed(stolen) from the dashboard.

CODE card

The model, the serial number andthe respective secret code are shownon the sound system papers.

The serial number is identical tothat printed on the device chassis.

The CODE card facilitates searchesif the sound system is lost. Further-more, the ownership paper speeds upcompensation procedures on behalf ofinsurance companies.

Keep the papers in a safe place.

Safety

The sound system will be electroni-cally protected if the electrical poweris disconnected when the code is on.

Only you can start the device againby entering its specific code.

Display

If the device has been disconnectedfrom the power supply, enter the se-cret code and set the time and thedate.

For instruction on setting the clockand adjusting the device brightness,see “Lancia ICS with multifunctionaldisplay”.

Operation with cellular phone

The sound system can be connectedto a free-hand cellular phone kit.

The sound will be muted when thecellular phone is in use.

SWITCHING THE SOUNDSYSTEM ON AND OFF

The sound system will be automati-cally switched on when the engine isstarted (i.e. when the key is turned toMAR) along with the ICS and isswitched off when the key is turned toSTOP.

The sound system can be switchedon when the key is off or removed by pressing knob 9 (fig. 76). It willswitched off automatically after ap-proximately 20 minutes. In this case,the display brightness cannot be ad-justed.

The switching on and off modalitycan be changed by means of the IGNfunction (see the EXPERT functionwhich can be accessed by pressing theEXP 14 button).

FUNCTION AND SETTINGSELECTION ANDCONFIRMATION BUTTON (15)

Knob 15 (fig. 76) on the right-handside of the control panel is used to se-lect and confirm the settings.

81

Turn the knob clockwise or anti-clockwise to go from one parameterto the other.

The selected parameter will appearbrighter.

Press the knob to confirm the dis-played parameter selection.

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME

Volume

Turn knob 9 (fig. 76) to adjust thevolume. Turn the knob clockwise toturn the volume up and anticlockwiseto turn it down.

A 16 bar symbol will appear on thedisplay. The bars will light up pro-gressively as the volume increases.The symbol will disappear automati-cally approximately five seconds afterthe adjustment.

The volume can also be adjusted bymeans of the buttons on the steeringwheel (where fitted). Press button A(fig. 74) to turn the volume up andbutton C to turn it down.

Setting the traffic announcementvolume

Use the TAVOL function for thispurpose (see the EXPERT functionswhich can be accessed by means ofthe EXP 14 button).

Setting the switch-on volume

Use the ONVOL function for thispurpose (see the EXPERT functionswhich can be accessed by means ofthe EXP 14 button).

Setting the volume according tocar speed

Use the SCVOL function for thispurpose (see the EXPERT functionswhich can be accessed by means ofthe EXP 14 button).

Muting the volume z (MUTE)

Press the AUDIO z 8 button forlonger than one second to mute thevolume.

Press the AUDIOz 8 button againfor longer than one second to restorethe volume.

Muting the volume during aphone call

Use the PHONE function for thispurpose (see the EXPERT functionswhich can be accessed by means ofthe EXP 14 button).

RADIO SETTINGS BUTTON (21)

Press the HELP RADIO 21 button(fig. 76) with the key at MAR. Ascreen showing the settings will ap-pear after the LANCIA trademarkscreen. The settings are:

– VOLUME

– BASS

– TREBLE

– BALANCE

– FADER

– STATION 1

– STATION 2

– STATION 3

– STATION 4

– STATION 5

– STATION 6

82

– FM1

– FM2

– FM3

– LW

– MW.

See “Audio settings” for details onhow to adjust the VOLUME, BASS,TREBLE, BALANCE and FADERfunctions.

The names or the frequencies of thesix pre-set stations refer to the se-lected waveband (FM1 - FM2 - FM3- LW - MW).

Select RETURN ( ) and confirmto return to the main menu.

The ( ) symbol will turn whitewhen it is selected.

AUDIO SETTINGS (8)

Press the AUDIOz 8 button (fig. 76)with the key at MAR. A screen (fig. 78)showing the settings will appear afterthe LANCIA trademark screen. The set-tings are:

– BASS

– TREBLE

– BALANCE

– FADER

– VOLUME.

Repeatedly press the AUDIO z 8button to cyclically switch from onefunction to the other.

The active function is shown in theright-hand part of the display whilethe settings are shown by a bar sym-bol in the left-hand part of the dis-play. Turn knob 9 (fig. 76) to adjustthe settings:

– BASS: to adjust the bass tones(from -6 to +6)

– TREBLE: to adjust the trebletones (from -6 to +6)

– BALANCE: to balance the soundbetween the speakers on the right-hand side and the left-hand side ofthe passenger compartment (from 15L = left to 15 R = right)

– FADER: to balance the sound be-tween the front and rear speakers(from 15 R = rear to 15 F = front)

– VOLUME: to adjust the volume(from 0 to 16).

The system will automatically quitthe AUDIO settings screen five sec-onds after the last adjustment.

fig. 78P

4T06

29

83

IMPORTANT The various AUDIOsettings are stored for the differentfunctions (TAPE - RADIO - CD -PHONE). The settings are re-pre-sented when the function is selected.

Loudness function (10)

Press the LOUD 10 button (fig. 76)to switch the function LOUDNESS onand off.

The loudness function improves lowvolume playback.

The message “LOUD” will appearon the display when the function ison.

The Loudness function is automaticin HI-FI sound system versions.

Dolby/Mono function (M-MONO)(19)

Press the M -MONO19button (fig. 76)to switch the function on and off.

You should use this function whenyou are tuned to a very poor stationto reduce the background noise. Themessage “STEREO” will disappearwhen the function is on.

You should use this function whenplaying back a poorly recorded tapeto reduce the background noise. ThesymbolM will appear on the displacewhen the function is on.

The Dolby noise reduction device ismade under licence from the DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation.Dolby and double D (M) symbol areregistered trademarks of the DolbyLaboratories Licensing Corporation.

SELECTING A FUNCTION(RADIO/TAPE/CD)

Press the SRC 7 button to displaythe various functions. Press the but-ton briefly again to make your choice:

– TAPE

– CD (where fitted)

– RADIO (FM, MW or LW)

– PHONE (if a free-hands cellularphone system is fitted only).

The system will automatically quitthe function selection screen a fewseconds after the last selection.

RADIO

Selecting the waveband

FM waveband: repeatedly press theBAND 16 button until the requiredwaveband appears on the display(“FM1”, “FM2” or “FM3”).

AM waveband: repeated press theBAND 16 button until the requiredwaveband appears on the display(“MW” medium waves or “LW” longwaves).

84

Last Station Memory

After the selection, you can listen tothe last programme/station tuned toin the specific waveband (Last Sta-tion Memory).

With the Last Station Memory func-tion, the device memorises the settingsmade before it was turned off - sta-tion, tape, CD - and represents themthe following time the device is turnedon.

Stereo reception - FM

When the radio is tuned to a stereostation the message “STEREO” willappear on the display.

Tuning to Traffic Programmes(TP)

TP (Traffic Programme) = An RDSstation broadcasting traffic announ-cements.

Switching TP function on and off

Press the TP/AF 11 (fig. 76) buttonbriefly.

The message “TP” will appear onthe display when the function is on.

IMPORTANT If the station tuned tois not an RDS station broadcastingtraffic announcements, a search for asuitable station will be started.

Interrupting traffic announcements

Press the TP/AF 11 button briefly.The traffic announcement functionwill however be kept on.

The sound system features the EONfunction which allows the system toautomatically tune to another stationproviding traffic announcements inthe same network as the one you arelistening to (only when the TP func-tion is on). It will automatically switchback to the original station when theannouncement is over.

IMPORTANT Traffic announce-ments are played at pre-set volume.The volume can be changed by meansof the EXPERT function.

If you wish to listen to traffic an-nouncements only, switch the “trafficprogramme” function on by means ofthe TP/AF 11 button and turn thevolume completely down with knob 9(fig. 76).

Tape or CD playback will be inter-rupted during traffic announcements.

Alternative frequencies (AF)

When tuned to an RDS stationwhich is broadcast by several stationson different frequencies, the soundsystem will automatically switch tothe best received frequency.

85

IMPORTANT In poor reception ar-eas, the attempts to switch to alterna-tive frequencies may lead to frequentinterruptions of sound. In this case,the AF function can be switched off.

Switching the AF function off

IMPORTANT This function canonly be turned off when tuned to sta-tions with alternative frequencies.

Press the TP/AF 11 button for ap-proximately three seconds until themessage “AF --” appears on the dis-play. The message “AF OFF” will ap-pear when the button is released andthe message “AF” will not appear anylonger.

Switching the AF function back on

Press the TP/AF 11 button for ap-proximately three seconds until themessage “AF ON” appears on the dis-play and release the button.

The message “AF” will appear onthe display.

Tuning to RDS stations (IS LEARN function)

Up to 30 programmes can be storedin the IS memory (a memory area notcorresponding to the pre-set stationbuttons) with a touch of the ISLEARN button.

The stored programmes can be re-called in sequence.

Use the IS memory function to re-programme pre-set station buttons orwhen you are in a new reception areabut you do not want to delete the pre-viously stored stations.

Starting the IS LEARN automaticstation search

Select either “FM1”, “FM2” or“FM3” by means of the BAND 16button (fig. 76).

Press the IS 13 button: the message“IS ...” will appear on the displaywhile the tuner is searching wave-band.

IMPORTANT Always wait for theautomatic Intelligent Search (IS) toend. If no station can be received, theautomatic intelligent search functioncan remain on, e.g. in an under-ground garage or if the aerial isfaulty. In this case, you can stop theautomatic search function by pressinga pre-set station button from 1 to 6.

The automatic IS intelligent searchfunctions stores up to 30 stations withoptimal reception.

During automatic IS intelligentsearch, RDS programmes will bestored first and ordered by pro-gramme code. Then FM stations willbe stored.

Recalling the IS memory content

Select IS operating mode by press-ing either button 17 or 18 for ap-proximately three seconds until themessage “IS --” appears on the dis-play.

The message “IS ON” will appearwhen the button is released.

86

In this case, the search will followthe station code order.

Press either button 17 or 18 brieflyto recall the stored stations in the re-quired order. During selection, themessage “IS-SCAN” will appear onthe display.

Switching the IS operative mode off.

Press either button 17 or 18 for ap-proximately three seconds until themessage “IS --” appears on the dis-play.

The message “IS OFF” will then ap-pear on the display.

In this condition, the search will bemade according to the order of pro-gramme frequency.

The automatic station search is de-scribed in detail in the specific para-graph.

The sound system stores the lastsearch modality in memory (“IS ON”or “IS OFF”).

Pre-set station buttons 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Select the waveband (FM1, FM2,FM3, MW or LW) by means of theBAND 16 button.

Tuning to an RDSstation/programme

If the RDS station/programmetuned to in the selected waveband(e.g. “FM1”) is stored at one of thepre-set station buttons numberedfrom 1 to 6, the respective digit willappear on the display, e.g. “3” forpre-set station 3.

Storing RDS stations/programmes

Press a pre-set station button num-bered from 1 to 6 for longer than twoseconds until you hear the stationagain.

The AF tuning function will bestored with the station.

Recalling stored RDSstations/programmes

Select the waveband (FM1, FM2,FM3, MW or LW) by means of theBAND 16 button.

Press a pre-set station button num-bered from 1 to 6 briefly.

The stored stations will be kept inmemory even when the sound systempower is disconnected.

Tuning to RDS stations/programmes with automaticstation search

1) Select the waveband (FM1, FM2,FM3, MW or LW) by means of theBAND 16 button.

For automatic searches in FM1,FM2 or FM3 wavebands, switch theIS operative mode off. In order to dothis, press either button 17 or 18 forapproximately three seconds until themessage “IS --” appears on the dis-play. The message “IS OFF” will thenappear on the display.

87

Automatic search in the FM wave-bands works according to two levelsof sensitivity. During the first scan inthe reception band, the system seeksonly the stations presenting high in-tensity fields (local stations). Duringthe second scan, the system seeks sta-tions with low intensity fields (distantreception). The message “DX” willappear on the display during thesearch.

2) Press either button 17 or 18 brie-fly to start automatic search in the re-quired direction. The respective fre-quency will appear on the display(e.g. “99.40”).

When a station with identificationcode is found, the code is shown onthe display. If not, the frequency isshown.

If the RDS station/programme tunedto in the selected waveband (e.g.“FM1”) is stored at one of the pre-setstation buttons numbered from 1 to 6,the respective digit will appear on thedisplay, e.g. “3” for pre-set station 3.

3) To store the tuned station undera pre-set station button, follow theprocedure described in the previousparagraph “Pre-set station buttons”.

Manual frequency tuning

1) Select the waveband (FM1, FM2,FM3, MW or LW) by means of theBAND 16 button.

2) Press either button 17 or 18 forapproximately six seconds until themessage “MAN” appears on the dis-play with the frequency (e.g. “MAN100.60”).

Hold either button 17 or 18 pressedto fast forward.

3) Tune in the required direction bypressing either button 17 or 18. Pressbutton 17 to increase the frequencyby 50 kHz units in FM and 1 kHzunits in AM. Press button 18 to re-duce frequency in the same fashion.

If the RDS station/programme tunedto in the selected waveband (e.g.“FM”) is stored at one of the pre-setstation buttons numbered from 1 to 6,the respective digit will appear on thedisplay, e.g. “3” for stored station 3.

4) To store the tuned station at apre-set station button, follow the pro-cedure described in the previousparagraph “Pre-set station buttons”.

5) Ending manual frequency tuning:press a pre-set station button num-bered from 1 to 6 briefly.

IMPORTANT If no button is pres-sed for more than 60 seconds, themanual frequency tuning function isswitched off automatically.

88

Automatic station storing(AUTOSTORE)

To automatically store the strongeststations in local reception mode in theselected waveband under the pre-setstation buttons numbered from 1 to 6.

Select the waveband (FM1, FM 2,FM3, MW or LW) by repeatedly press-ing the BAND 16 button (fig. 76).

Press the BAND 16 button for ap-proximately six seconds until the mes-sage “AS” and the frequency appearon the display.

The best received station at the endof the search will be tuned to.

Programme types (PTY)

Many radio stations in the FM band(FM1, FM2, FM3) offer a “Pro-gramme type” (PTY) service. For ex-ample, when a news bulletin is beingbroadcast the message “NEWS” willappear on the display.

The PTY function can act a searchfilter to tune only to stations broad-casting programmes with the pre-setPTY code (e.g. “POP”).

Programme types

The programme types offered by aradio station can change:

NEWS News bulletins andcurrent affairs

AFFAIRS Politics and events

INFO Special informationprogrammes

SPORT Sports programmes

EDUCATE Educational and trai-ning programmes

DRAMA Drama and literature

CULTURE Culture, church andreligion

SCIENCE Science

VARIED Variety

POP Pop music (hits)

ROCK M Rock music

EASY M Easy listening

LIGHT M Light classical music

CLASSICS Classical music

OTHER M Musical programmesnot included in thecategories listed (e.g.folklore)

WEATHER Weather forecasts

FINANCE Financial news bul-letins

CHILDREN Programmes for chil-dren

SOCIAL A Social information

RELIGION Religious and philo-sophical programmes

PHONE IN Listeners’ phone-inprogrammes (differ-ent from the “phonein” function activeonly when connectedto a free-hands cellu-lar phone kit)

TRAVEL Tourism

LEISURE Leisure, hobbies andspare time activities

JAZZ Jazz music

89

COUNTRY Country music

NATIONAL National programmes

OLDIES Golden Oldies

FOLK M Folk music

DOCU Special reports

NO PTY No programme typeidentification code

Automatic PTY search

There are two possible ways to selecta automatic programme type search.

1) Six programme types are as-signed to the 1-6 PTY buttons (pre-set station buttons). The pre-set as-signment can be changed at will.

2) You can choose a programmetype from the stored list and start theautomatic search.

The procedure is described in thefollowing paragraphs.

PTY function

1) Starting the PTY function

Press the TP/AF 11 button for ap-proximately six seconds until the mes-sage “PTY ON” appears on the dis-play. Then the last selected programmetype will appear (e.g. “POP”).

2) Setting the programme type

Press a button from 1 to 6 briefly.The automatic PTY search will startfrom the first station offering the se-lected programme type. The pro-gramme type will be shown briefly(e.g. “POP”) followed by the stationcode and the message “PTY”.

- Alternatively -

Repeatedly press either button 17 or18 until the required programme typeappears on the display.

Press either button 17 or 18 for ap-proximately two seconds to start thePTY automatic search.

The PTY automatic search will au-tomatically stop at the following sta-tion offering the selected programmetype. The programme type (e.g.“POP”) and the message “PTY” willappear on the display.

IMPORTANT If no station offersthe selected programme type, thesound system will tune to the lasttuned station and the PTY functionwill be abandoned.

3) Switching the PTY function off

This will occur automatically afterapproximately 10 seconds.

Pre-set PTY programme buttons

Pre-set station buttons

The standard setting is: 1 NEWS,2 SPORT, 3 POP, 4 ROCK M, 5CLASSICS and 6 EDUCATE.

90

Each pre-set station button can beset to a programme type as required:

1) Switch the PTY function on.Press the TP/AF 11 button for ap-proximately six seconds until the mes-sage “PTY ON” appears on the dis-play. Select the required programmetype (e.g. “NEWS”).

2) Repeatedly press either button 17or 18 until the required programmetype appears on the display.

3) Press one of the pre-set stationbuttons for longer than two seconds.

RDS station frequency

The frequency of the RDS stationcurrently tuned to can be displayed.

Press the EXP 14 button briefly.

The transmission frequency will bedisplayed for approximately ten sec-onds in the place of the station name.

Scanning pre- set stations (SCANfunction) (12)

The scan function automaticallyscans the stations stored with the ISfunction. Each station will be playedfor ten seconds.

Press the SCAN 12 button to switchthe function on.

Maximum reception sensitivity(DX function) (20)

The DX function is used to obtainthe maximum radio station sensitiv-ity allowing to automatically tune tolocal stations regardless of the otherradio functions.

Press DX 20 to switch the functionon and off.

The message “DX” will appear onthe display when the function in on.

EXPERT FUNCTION(CUSTOMISING THEOPERATING PARAMETERS) -EXP (14)

To make the everyday use of thesound system as easy as possible, theEXPERT function can be used to cus-tomise certain settings which need tobe used only once or very occasion-ally.

Press the EXP 14 button (fig. 76)with the key at MAR to access theEXPERT functions. The EXPERTfunction screen with appear after theLANCIA trademark screen.

Press the EXP 14 button again toquit the EXPERT function.

fig. 79

P4T

0616

91

Possible EXPERT setting list (fig. 76)

– RDS CLOCK SYNC (SYNC ON/OFF) - To switch synchronisation ofclock to RDS station signals on andoff.

– TA VOLUME ADJUST (TAVOL)- To set the minimum volume fortraffic announcements.

– AUTO-LEARN TP (LRN ON/OFF) - To automatically search fortraffic announcement programmes.

– RDS REGION (REG ON/OFF) -To switch the automatic regional pro-gramme tuning function on and off.

– RADIO-ON MAXIMUM VOLU-ME (ONVOL) - To set the maximumswitch-on volume.

– BDLY ON/OFF - To set thebooster switch-on delay (where fit-ted).

– IGNITION LOGIC (IGN ON/OFF)- To switch the sound system on au-tomatically with the engine.

– PHONE SETTING (PHONE ON/OFF) - To mute the sound for incom-ing or outgoing phone calls with con-nected free-hands kit.

– PHONE AMPLIFICATION (PHO-NE 00/03) - To set the cellular phoneinput sensitivity (to be calibrated whenthe free-hand phone kit is fitted).

– SPEED-CONTROLLED VOLU-ME (SCVOL) - To set the volume ac-cording to the car speed (SCV).

– THEFT-PROTECTION CODE(CODE) - To activate the safety code.

The information concerning the set-tings is given in the right-hand partof the display :

– function description

– buttons 4-5 (fig. 76) for adjustingthe setting

– buttons to select the new function(17 for the following function - 18 forthe previous function) (fig. 76).

The current function setting isshown in the left-hand side of the dis-play.

The last selected setting is recalledwith the EXPERT function.

Selecting and adjusting thesettings

Select the setting to be checked orchanged with the buttons 17 and 18(fig. 76).

For example, to adjust the maxi-mum switch-on volume, select theONVOL function with the buttons 17or 18. The ONVOL function and thecurrent setting (e.g. ONVOL 13) willappear on the display. The stationwhich the radio is tuned to will beplayed at the set volume.

Adjust the volume as required withthe buttons 4 and 5:

– press button 5: to turn the volumeup

– press button 4: to turn the volumedown.

Press the button repeatedly to adjustthe setting gradually or hold it pres-sed to adjust the setting fast.

When you have made the requiredsetting, you can make other adjust-ments (use buttons 17 and 18 to se-lect the function) or quit the EX-PERT function by press the EXP 14button.

92

Switching synchronisation ofclock to RDS station signals on and off

Select the RDS CLOCK SYNC(SYNC ON/OFF) setting (fig. 80):

– button 5 = “SYNC ON”. The sys-tem clock is synchronised with theRDS data.

– button 4 = “SYNC OFF”. The syn-chronisation feature can be switchedoff in areas where no RDS TIMER sig-nals are received.

Very often the timer signal broad-cast by the stations is wrong.

Setting the minimum volume fortraffic announcements

Select the TA VOLUME ADJUST(TAVOL) setting (value from 4 to 31)(fig. 81):

– button 4 = VOL - (to turn the vol-ume down).

– button 5 = VOL + (to turn the vol-ume up).

During setting, the volume heard isthat selected for traffic announce-ments.

Automatically trafficannouncement programmessearch

With “LRN OFF” (standard) thesound system remains tuned to the se-

lected station until it is basically il-legible.

With “LRN ON” the sound systemtunes to a new station as soon as thereceived signal quality decreases.

If you are travelling in an areawhere the reception of RDS pro-grammes broadcasting traffic an-nouncements is poor, you can stop theradio station search.

Select the AUTO-LEARN TP (LRNON/OFF) setting (fig. 82):

– button 5 = “LRN ON” to auto-matically search for traffic announce-ments,

– button 4 = “LRN OFF” if you donot want to automatically search fortraffic announcements.

fig. 80

P4T

0616

fig. 81P

4T06

17fig. 82

P4T

0618

93

Switching automatic regionalprogramme tuning function onand off

If an RDS programme consists ofseveral regional programmes, thesound system can switch betweenprogrammes due to changes in recep-tion.

Select the RDS REGION (REG ON/OFF) setting (fig. 83):

– button 5 = “REG ON” automaticregional programme tuning is possi-ble.

– button 4 = “REG OFF” automaticregional programme tuning is notpossible.

Setting the maximum switch-onvolume

Select the RADIO-ON MAXIMUMVOLUME (ON VOL) setting (valuefrom -- to 31) (fig. 84):

– button 5 = VALUE + (to turn thevolume up).

– button 4 = VALUE – (to turn thevolume down).

Volume is limited only if the volumeof the sound system is higher than theset volume when it is switched off.

Setting the booster switch-ondelay (where fitted)

Select the BDLY ON/OFF setting(fig. 85):

– button 5 = “BDLY ON”.

– button 4 = “BDLY OFF”.

This function eliminates “boosts”when switching the system on and off.

fig. 83

P4T

0619

fig. 84P

4T06

20fig. 85

P4T

0621

94

Switching the sound system onautomatically with the engine

Select the IGNITION LOGIC (IGNON/OFF) setting (fig. 86):

– button 5 = “IGN ON”. The soundsystem can be switched on/off bymeans of the car’s ignition switch.

– button 4 = “IGN OFF”. The soundsystem can be switched on/off bymeans of the knob 9 (fig. 76) only.

Muting the sound for incomingor outgoing phone calls withconnected free-hands kit

Select the PHONE SETTING (PHO-NE ON/OFF) setting and use buttons4 and 5 to adjust (fig. 87):

– “PHONE OFF”. No telephoneconnected

– “PHONE ON”. When the tele-phone is in use, the sound system isautomatically muted.

The “PHONE ON” function is ac-tive providing the phone mute on thecellular phone support is connected.

“PHONE IN” The telephone con-versation can be heard by means ofthe car speakers.

The “PHONE IN” is active provid-ing your cellular phone is connectedto the free-hand control unit (wherefitted).

If the sound system is off, telephonecalls (incoming or outgoing) are how-ever possible:

– the sound system will switch onautomatically

– the sound system will set to thesame sound conditions as the last tele-phone call (BASS, TREBLE, FADER,BALANCE)

– the sound system will automati-cally switch off at the end of the call.

Setting the cellular phone inputsensitivity (to be calibrated whenthe free-hands kit is fitted)

To adapt to the level of signal emis-sion of the installed free-hands kit.This setting is to be made by theLancia Dealership when the free-hands kit is fitted.

Select the PHONE AMPLIFICA-TION (PHONE 00/03) setting anduse buttons 4 and 5 to adjust(fig. 88):

– “PHONE 00” Low input sensitiv-ity

– “PHONE 03” High input sensitiv-ity.

fig. 86

P4T

0622

fig. 87P

4T06

23

95

Set the volume according to thecar speed (SCV)

IMPORTANT For road safety rea-sons, this setting must not be made bythe driver.

Select the SPEED-CONTROLLEDVOLUME (SCVOL) setting (valuefrom -- to 34) (fig. 89):

– “SCVOL 19”: standard setting

– “SCVOL - -”: setting off

– “SCVOL 34”: top effectiveness

Adjust the setting as follows:

1) With the car at a standstill andthe engine running: set required vol-ume by means of knob 9 (fig. 76).

2) Press the EXP 14 button for ap-proximately three seconds until themessage “EXPERT” appears on thedisplay.

3) Select “SCVOL” settings bymeans of either button 17 or 18 .

4) For higher speeds: press eitherbuttons 4 or 5 to set the required vol-ume:

– button 5: VOL + (to turn the vol-ume up)

– button 4: VOL - (to turn the vol-ume down).

5) Press the EXP 14 button forlonger than two seconds.

Activating the safety code

If the message “CODE” appears onthe display, the code is not on.

If the message “SAFE” appears onthe display, the code is on.

IMPORTANT For more detailed in-structions, see the following chapter.

SAFETY CODE

The sound system safety code iswritten on the CODE card (fig. 90).The code is not activated by the man-ufacturer.

If you have activated the sound sys-tem safety code: the sound system willbe electronically protected if the elec-trical power is disconnected. It canonly be used again by entering thecode.

fig. 88

P4T

0624

fig. 89P

4T06

25

LANCIA

fig. 90

P4T

0306

96

Is the code on?

Select the EXPERT function andpress either button 17 or 18 until ei-ther the message “SAFE” or “CODE”(THEFT-PROTECTION CODE set-ting) appear on the display (fig. 91):

– SAFE = Code on

– CODE = Code off.

Activating the code

1) Select EXPERT function andpress either button 17 or 18 until themessage “CODE” appears on the dis-play.

2) Activate setting by briefly press-ing button 2. The message “- - - -”will appear on the display.

3) Enter the code with buttons from2 to 5 (fig. 76).

Button 2 is used to enter the firstcode digit, button 3 to enter the sec-ond digit, button 4 to enter the thirddigit and button 5 to enter the fourthdigit.

For example, to enter the code 1 7 0 3,press button 2 briefly once only. Themessage 1 - - - will appear on the dis-play.

Enter the second digit by brieflypressing button 3 seven times. Themessage 1 7 - - will appear on the dis-play.

You can now enter the third digit.Press button 4 ten times. The message1 7 0 - will appear on the display.

Finally, complete the code by press-ing button 5 three times. The message1 7 0 3 will appear on the display.

Press the button longer to decreasethe digit by one unit.

4) To confirm the code: press theEXP 14 button briefly. The message“SAFE” will appear on the display.The code is on.

To quit the EXPERT function: pressthe EXP 14 button for approximatelythree seconds.

Deactivating the code

1) Select the EXPERT function andpress buttons 17 or 18 until the mes-sage “SAFE” (THEFT-PROTEC-TION CODE setting) appears on thedisplay.

2) To activate settings, press button2 briefly. The message “1 - - - “ willappear on the display.

3) Enter the code (see “Safety code”)as described in “Activating the code”by pressing the buttons numberedfrom 2 to 5.

4) Confirm the code by pressing theEXP 14 button briefly until the mes-sage “CODE” appears on the display.The code is no longer active.

IMPORTANT If an incorrect code isentered, the message “SAFE” will beshown on the display. Repeat the en-tire procedure. Respect stand-bytimes between attempts (see “Stand-by times”).

fig. 91

P4T

0626

97

Resetting for use

The sound system will be electroni-cally protected if the code is on andthe electrical power is disconnected(e.g. if the battery is disconnected forservicing).

Reconnect the electrical power andproceed as follows:

1) Switch the sound system on. Themessage “SAFE” will appear on thedisplay. After approximately threeseconds the message “1 - - - - “ willappear. “1” identifies the number ofattempts to enter the code.

2) Enter the code (see “Safetycode”) as described in “Activating thecode” by pressing the buttons num-bered from 2 to 5.

3) To confirm the code: press theEXP 14 button briefly. The message“SAFE” will appear temporarily onthe display. The sound system willstart working after approximatelythree seconds.

IMPORTANT If an incorrect code isentered, the message “SAFE” will re-main on the display and the soundsystem will not work. Repeat the en-tire procedure.

Respect stand-by times between at-tempts (see “Stand-by times”).

Stand-by times

Specific stand-by times (between at-tempts) are featured to avoid enteringand deactivating the code by at-tempts. During the stand-by time, thesound system can be switched on andoff but it will not work.

Do not switch the sound system onduring the stand-by times. The soundsystem, however, should be connectedto the electrical power.

The message “SAFE” will appear onthe display to indicate the stand-bytime is not over.

The digit indicating the following at-tempt (e.g. “2 - - - -”) will appear onthe display when the stand-by time isover.

The following table shows the stand-by times between attempts.

After the sixth attempt, we recom-mend you contact a Lancia Dealer-ship either to have the secret code en-tered or deactivated.

98

TAPE PLAYER

Switching the tape player on

Insert a tape cassette in the LanciaICS panel deck. The message “TAPEA” or “TAPE B” will appear on thedisplay.

If there is a tape in the deck, repeat-edly press the SRC 7 button until themessage “TAPE” appears on the dis-play.

Reversing the tape side

Press the BAND 16 button briefly.

Tape side will change automaticallywhen the end of the tape is reached(AUTOREVERSE function).

The meaning of the symbols on thedisplay is:

“TAPE A” = upper tape side

“TAPE B” = lower tape side.

MSS function

MSS = Music Search System

This function skips or repeats atrack.

The MSS function works with overthree second pauses between tracks(without announcements).

Musical tracks with very low sec-tions (e.g. classical music) are notsuited for this function as the systemmistakes the sections for pauses.

Switching the MSS function on

Press the SCAN/MSS 12 buttonduring tape playback. The message“MSS ON” will appear on the display.

MSS will start according to the tapedirection.

Starting the MSS function

Press either button 17 or 18 duringtape playback.

Press button 17 to skip the track be-ing played.

Press button 18 to repeat the trackbeing played.

Ineffective Stand-byattemps time

(on the display) (approximate)

121 seconds

21.5 minutes

35.5 minutes

422 minutes

51.5 hours

66 hours

724 hours

8

]]]]]]]

99

Multimedia CDs containsound and data tracks.Playing these CDs can

cause noise loud enough to jeop-ardise road safety and damage fi-nal system stages and speakers.

CD PLAYER

The sound system is set up to oper-ate a compatible CD player (availablefrom Lineaccessori Lancia).

Ending the MSS function beforetime

Press either button 17 or 18.

Switching the MSS function off

Press the SCAN/MSS 12 buttonduring tape playback. The message“MSS OFF” will appear on the dis-play.

Fast forward/rewind

Press either button 18 or 17. Themessage “<< WIND” or “WIND >>”will appear on the display.

Stopping the function

Press either button 17 or 18 briefly.

Tape playback will start automati-cally.

Switching the tape off

Press button 23 (fig. 76): the tapewill be ejected.

- Alternatively -

Press the SRC 7 button. The sou-rcewill change from TAPE to CD (if theCD CHANGER is fitted) or RADIO.

Source selection is sequential: RA-DIO, TAPE, CD.

IMPORTANT The source is switchedimmediately but the tape player willend the current function if the tapefast forward/rewind function is on.

General information

Tape playback will be interruptedby a traffic announcement when theTP function is on.

IMPORTANT You can interrupt theannouncement being broadcast with-out altering the possibility of receiv-ing other announcements by brieflypressing the TP/AF 11 button.

Contact a Lancia Dealer-ship exclusively for fittingand connecting the CD

player.

The Lineaccessori Lancia CD playeris equipped with a magazine (chan-ger) which can hold up to six CDs.

100

Filling the magazine

The magazine contains six trays forone CD each.

To playback a CD, extract a trayfrom the magazine (fig. 92) and in-sert a CD (fig. 93).

Make sure the CD label is facing theright way, i.e. towards the tray. If not,the player will not work.

The player cannot be used to play 8cm CDs unless a specific adapter,which can be purchased at HI-FIstores, is fitted.

Inserting the magazinein the CD player

Proceed as follows:

– Move the sliding flap A (fig. 94)completely to the right until it locks.

– Check that switch B is in position“1”.

fig. 92

P4T

0252

fig. 94P

4T02

54

fig. 93

P4T

0253

– Insert the magazine C (fig. 95) inthe CD player with the labelled side(see arrow) facing upwards.

– Close the sliding flap D (fig. 96)after inserting the magazine to avoidgrit and dust from getting inside theplayer.

Removing the magazine from theCD player

Proceed as follows:

– Move the sliding flap A (fig. 94)completely to the right until it locks.

– Press the eject button E (fig. 97)on the CD player.

fig. 95

P4T

0255

101

Selecting or repeating a track

Briefly and repeatedly press eitherbutton 17 or 18 until the requiredtrack number appears on the display.

17: next track

18: either repeats the track beingplayed back or plays the previoustrack.

Playing each track on theselected CD for ten seconds(SCAN function)

Press the SCAN/MSS 12 buttonbriefly. The message “SCAN ON” willappear briefly on the display.

To stop the function, press theSCAN/MSS 12 button briefly. Themessage “SCAN OFF” will appear onthe display briefly.

Removing the CDs fromthe magazine

Remove the CDs in order after re-moving the respective supports fromthe magazine.

CD PLAYER OPERATION

Seleting the CD CHANGERsource

Briefly and repeatedly press SRC 7button until the message “CD” ap-pears on the display.

Selecting a CD

Briefly and repeatedly press button5 or 6 until the required CD numberappears on the display.

5: previous CD

6: next CD.

fig. 97

P4T

0257

fig. 96

P4T

0256

102

Fast forward/backward (TRACK FAST)

To fast play a track at low volume:

– FORWARD: press button 17 andhold it pressed.

– BACKWARDS: press button 18and hold it pressed.

Repeating a track (TRACK REPEAT)

To playback a track repeatedly:press button 1. The message “TRKON” will appear on the display.

A different track can however be se-lected with the TRACK REPEATfunction.

To stop the function, press button 1.The message “TRK OFF” will appearon the display.

Repeating a CD (REPEAT)

To play the current CD repeatedly:press button 2. The message “RPTCD” will appear on the display.

A different CD can however be se-lected with this function.

To stop the function, press button 2.The message “RPT MAG” will appearon the display.

Playing the tracks in randomorder (TRACK RANDOM)

To play the tracks in random order:press button 3. The message “RNDON” will appear on the display. Theselected CD tracks will be played inrandom order.

To end random track playback,press button 3. The message “RNDOFF” will appear on the display.

IMPORTANT The TRACK RAN-DOM function cannot be combinedwith the TRACK REPEAT and RE-PEAT functions.

Ending CD operation

Press the SRC 7 button to listen tothe radio.

IMPORTANT Press the TP/AF 11button briefly to interrupt the an-nouncement in progress without in-hibiting the reception of other an-nouncements.

CD status display

Briefly press the EXP 14 button. Amessage will appear on the display in-dicating if a special function is on(e.g. “TRK ON”).

103

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

P4T0812fig. 98

104

1 - Windscreen defrosting and demi-sting vents

2 - Front side windows defrostingand demisting vents

3 - Central directional and adjustablevents

4 - Side directional and adjustablevents

5 - Front footwell air vents

6 - Rear footwell air vents

7 - Rear directional and adjustablevents

The passenger compartment climatecan be controlled (i.e. heating, venti-lation and cooling, where fitted) asfollows:

– manually, by selecting the func-tions by means of the control panelbuttons;

– automatically, by means of thesystem electronic control unit.

The air is let into the passengercompartment through a set of ventson the dashboard, on the front doorpanels, on the central unit and on thefloor as shown in (fig. 98).

Fixed vents C (fig. 100) for defrost-ing or demisting the front side win-dows are located in the front doorpanels.

fig. 99P

4T00

35fig. 101

P4T

0022

fig. 100

P4T

0711

DIRECTIONAL ANDADJUSTABLE VENTS (fig. 99-100-101)

The vents can be turned upwards ordownwards and towards the left andthe right with control A.

The amount of air is adjusted withcontrol B.

O = all open

● = all closed.

105

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM:HEATING, VENTILATION AND COOLING

fig. 102P4T0038

1 - Set internal temperature display(driver’s side).

2 - Knob for adjusting internal tem-perature (driver’s side).

3 - Set internal temperature display(passenger’s side).

4 - Knob for adjusting internal tem-perature (passenger’s side).

5 - Buttons for selecting air distrib-ution.

6 - Buttons for adjusting fan speed.

7 - Set air distribution.

8 - Set fan speed

9 - Outside temperature (in degreescentigrade)

10 - Button for switching on/offmaximum defrosting/demisting ofwindscreen and front side windows,heated rear window and externalrearview mirrors.

11 - Button for switching on/off theheated rear window and the externalrearview mirror defroster.

106

12 - Button for manual switchingon/off the air recirculation function.

13 - Button for switching on/off theclimate control system compressor(where fitted).

14 - Button for aligning the set tem-peratures on passenger and driver’sside.

15 - Button for selecting automaticsystem operation.

16 - Button for switching the systemoff.

The cooling system (whe-re fitted) uses R134a re-frigerating fluid as it will

not pollute the environment if itaccidentally leaks. Under no cir-cumstances should other fluids beused which are incompatible withthe system components.

GENERAL

The car is equipped with a doubleclimate control system governed byan electronic control unit which sep-arately adjusts the temperature ondriver’s and passenger’s side.

For optimal control of temperaturein the two areas of the passengercompartment, the system is equippedwith a double sun ray sensor.

The system features a pollution sen-sor which can automatically switchthe air recirculation function on to re-duce the unpleasant effects of pol-luted air in cities, queues, tunnels andwhen the windscreen washer is oper-ated (with the characteristic smell ofalcohol).

The air quality is controlled by anactive carbon dust/pollen filter whichhas the double function of mechani-cally filtering the particles dispersedin the air and attenuating the peakaccumulation of certain pollutants.

The climate control system auto-matically controls and adjusts the fol-lowing parameters and functions:

– temperature of air let into the pas-senger compartment (separately ondriver’s and passenger’s side)

– fan speed (continuous variation)

– air distribution

– recirculation on/off

– climate control system compressoron/off (where fitted).

The amount of air let into the pas-senger compartment does not dependon the speed of the car. It is in factadjusted by an electronically con-trolled fan.

The following settings can be ad-justed manually:

– fan speed (continuous variation)

– air distribution

– recirculation on/off

– climate control system compressoron/off (where fitted).

107

IMPORTANT The manual settingshave priority over the automatic set-tings until the user returns the systemto automatic control. The manual set-tings will be stored when the engine isstopped and represented at the fol-lowing start-up.

The functions which cannot be setmanually are always automatic.

The air let into the passenger com-partment is always controlled auto-matically (unless the system is off) ac-cording to the temperatures set on thedriver’s and passenger’s displays.

On certain versions (where pro-vided), the system is completed by asensor fog fitted behind the drivingmirror and able to monitor a presetarea relevant to windscreen internalsurface and to operate the system au-tomatically to prevent or to reducefogging through the following opera-tions: air recirculation opening, com-pressor activation, air distribution to

windscreen, fan speed sufficient fordefogging and MAX-DEF function ac-tivation in case of hard fogging.

To guarantee sensor fogproper operation, licensetag, parking disc or labels

shall not be stuck on the “moni-toring” area between sensor andwindscreen. Keep sensor andwindscreen clean, preventing anyaccumulation of dust or other sub-stances.

In addition to this function, the fil-ter efficaciously reduces the concen-tration of pollutants thanks to a layerof active carbon inside the filter.

The filtering action is carried out onthe air let in from outside (recircula-tion off).

Have the filter checked at least oncea year at a Lancia Dealership, ide-ally at the beginning of summer.

You should have the filter checkedand if required replaced more fre-quently if the car is mainly used inpolluted or dusty areas.

Active carbon dust/pollen filter

The filter has the specific capacity ofcombining a mechanical air cleaningaction and an electrostatic effect sothat the air let into the passengercompartment is purified from parti-cles such as dust, pollen, etc.

The efficacy of the cli-mate control system maybe considerably reduced if

the filter is not replaced.

108

HOW TO USE THE CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM

The system can be switched on thevarious ways. We recommend start-ing by pressing the AUTO button andsetting the required temperatures onthe display.

In this way, the system will startworking fully automatically to reachthe required temperature as soon aspossible. It will maintain the temper-ature by adjusting the amount anddistribution pattern of the air let intothe passenger compartment and man-age the recirculation function and theclimate control system compressor(where fitted).

When the system is working auto-matically, the only possible manualfunctions are:

– MONO, to align the passenger’sside temperature to the driver’s sidetemperature.

– ECON, to switch the climate con-trol compressor off (where fitted)

– air recirculation function, toswitch the function on and off con-stantly

– Z for faster window demisting/defrosting

– ( for demisting/defrosting theheated rear window and the externalrearview mirrors.

The temperature settings can bechanged at any time during auto-matic system operation. The systemwill automatically adjust to the newrequest.

Furthermore, the fan speed and theair distribution pattern can bechanged by means of the specific but-tons. In this way, the functions passfrom automatic to manual control un-til the AUTO button is pressed.

With one or more functions manu-ally on, the air temperature let intothe passenger compartment is auto-matically managed by the system un-less the climate control system com-pressor is off (where fitted). In thiscondition, in fact, the air let into thepassenger compartment cannot havea lower temperature than that of theexternal air.

109

CONTROLS (fig. 102)

Knob for adjusting airtemperature (2, 4 - fig. 102)

Turn the knobs towards the right ortowards the left to raise or lower theair temperature required respectivelyin the left-hand area (knob 2) and inthe right-hand area (knob 4) of thepassenger compartment. The set tem-peratures are shown on the displays 1and 3 over the respective knobs.

Press button 14 (MONO) to auto-matically align the passenger’s sidetemperature to the temperature ondriver’s side. Consequently, the tem-perature in the two areas can be setsimply by turning the knob on dri-ver’s side 2. This function is providedto facilitate adjusting the temperaturein the passenger compartment whenonly the driver is present.

The separate operation of the settemperatures is automatically resetwhen knob 4 is turned.

Turn the knobs fully to the right orto the left to the end positions HI andLO to obtain maximum heating orcooling, respectively:

– HI function (maximum heating):this is switched on by setting a tem-perature higher than 32°C on the dis-play. It can be independently switchedon from driver’s side or from passen-ger’s side or from both sides (also byselecting the MONO function). Thisfunction can be switched on to speedup heating in the passenger compart-ment by exploiting the system poten-tial to the maximum. The functionemploys the maximum coolant tem-perature while the air distribution andfan speed are set by the system ac-cording to environmental conditions.In particular, if the coolant tempera-ture is not sufficient, the functiondoes not switch the fan on at topspeed to limit letting into air which isnot adequately warm. All the manu-ally settings can be adjusted when thefunction is on. To switch the functionoff, simply set the temperature on thedisplay to a value lower than 32°C.

– LO function (maximum cooling):this is automatically switched on bysetting a temperature lower than18°C on the display. It can be inde-pendently switched on from driver’sside or from passenger’s side or fromboth sides (also by selecting theMONO function). This function canbe switched on to speed up coolingthe passenger compartment by ex-ploiting the system potential to themaximum. The function cuts out theheater and switches the air recircula-tion and the climate control compres-sor (where fitted) on. The air distrib-ution and the fan speed are selectedaccording to the environmental con-ditions. All the manually settings canbe adjusted when the function is on.To switch the function off, simply setthe temperature on the display to avalue higher than 18°C.

110

Buttons for adjusting fan speed (6 - fig. 102)

Press the upper or lower button toincrease or decrease the fan speed, re-spectively, so to adjust the amount ofair let into the passenger compart-ment while keeping the required tem-perature constant.

The fan speed is indicated by thebars which light up on the display 8.Repeatedly press the upper button toswitch the fan on at top speed (allbars on). Repeatedly press the lowerbutton to switch off the fan (no barson).

IMPORTANT In versions with cool-ing system (where fitted), the fan canonly be switched off when the climatecontrol system compressor is switchedoff with the ECON button.

Press the AUTO button to restoreautomatic fan speed control after amanual setting.

pButtons for adjusting air distribution (5 - fig. 102)

Press buttons 5 to manually selectone of the five possible air distribu-tion patterns in the passenger com-partment:

OAir flow to central and side da-shboard vents and the rear vent.

MAir flow shared between foot-wellvents (warmer air) and central andside dashboard vents and the rearvent (cooler air).

This air distribution pattern is par-ticularly useful in the middle seasons(spring and autumn) when it issunny.

NAir flow to the front and rearfootwells.

The air distribution pattern, due tothe natural tendency of heat to moveupwards, allows to heat the passengercompartment up as fast as possible.Furthermore, it offers a prompt feel-ing of warmth to the coolest parts ofthe body.

QAir flow shared between thefootwell vents and the windscreen andfront side window defrosting/demi-stingvents.

This air distribution pattern ensuresa good heating of the passenger com-partment and prevents possible mist-ing up.

üAir flow to windscreen and frontside window vents for demisting or de-frosting the windows.

IMPORTANT The system will notaccept different combinations. If anair distribution pattern will cannot beused is selected only the main func-tion of the pressed button will bestarted.

The set air distribution pattern isshown on display 7.

When a combined function is set,only the main function of the buttonpressed will be switched on. If thebutton corresponding to a functionwhich is already on is pressed, thefunction will continue to work.

111

Press the AUTO button to restore airdistribution control after a manualsetting.

AUTO button (automaticoperation) (15 - fig. 102)

Press the AUTO button: the systemwill automatically control the airamount and distribution pattern inthe passenger compartment and can-cel all the previously made settings.The LED on the button will come on.

When the LED on the AUTO buttonis off, one or more manual settingshave been made. Consequently, eitherthe automatic control is not complete(with the exception of the tempera-ture control function which is alwaysautomatic) or the system is off (LEDon the OFF button will be on in thiscase).

ECON button (climate controlsystem compressor off)(where fitted) (13 - fig. 102)

Press the ECON button to switch theclimate control system compressoroff. The LED on the button will comeon.

The LED on the AUTO button willgo out and the automatic recircula-tion function will be switched off (toprevent possible misting up) when theclimate control system compressor isswitched off.

IMPORTANT Air at a temperaturelower than that of the outside air can-not be let in to the passenger com-partment when the compressor is off.Furthermore, in particular environ-mental conditions, the windows couldmist up fast because the air is nolonger dehumidified.

The setting will be stored when theengine is stopped. Either press theECON button again or press theAUTO button to reset automatic con-trol of the compressor (in the lattercase, the manual settings will be can-celled). The LED on the ECON but-ton will go out.

The automatic compressor is auto-matically switched on when the airrecirculation function is switched onautomatically (to prevent the win-dows from misting up).

The air let into the passenger com-partment cannot be cooled when thecompressor is off. Consequently:

– if the outside temperature is lowerthan the set temperature, the systemworks normally and can reach andmaintain the set temperature alsowhen the compressor is off.

– if the outside temperature is higherthan the set temperature, the systemcannot reach the required tempera-ture. This will be signalled by flash-ing the external temperature value ondisplay 1 and 3.

MONO button (set temperaturealignment) (14 - fig. 102)

Press the MONO button to auto-matically align the passenger’s sidetemperature to the temperature ondriver’s side. Consequently, the tem-perature in the two areas can be setsimply by turning the knob on dri-ver’s side 2. This function is providedto facilitate adjusting the temperaturein the passenger compartment whenonly the driver is present.

112

The separate set temperature func-tion will be automatically reset whenthe passenger turns knob 4.

Air recirculation on/offbutton (12 - fig. 102)

The air recirculation function is con-trolled according to three strategies:

– automatic operation (LED on but-ton off)

– forced ventilation on (recirculationalways on) - the green LED on thebutton will come on

– forced ventilation off (recirculationalways off, air taken in from the out-side) - the amber LED on the buttonwill come on

The three conditions are obtained bypressing the air recirculation button(12) in sequence.

The air recirculation button LEDwill stay off when the recirculationfunction is automatically controlledby the system (consequently, the ac-tual on/off status of the recirculationfunction will not be displayed).

During automatic operation, the re-circulation function is automaticallyswitched on when the pollution sen-sor detects the presence of pollutedair, e.g. in cities, queues, tunnels andduring windscreen operation (due tothe characteristic smell of alcohol).

When the recirculation function iscontrolled manually (green LED = re-circulation on; amber LED = externalair taken in), the LED on the autobutton will come on if all the otherfunctions (air distribution, air flow,etc.) are controlled automatically bythe system. In the same way, recircu-lation will be controlled by the userwhen the AUTO button is pressed.

IMPORTANT The air recirculationfunction will allow, according to thesystem operation (i.e. heating or cool-ing) to reach the required conditionsfaster. We recommend not turningthis function on manually on rainyand/or cold days as this will consid-erably increase window misting, es-pecially if there are many people onboard.

The climate control sys-tem compressor cannotwork when the outside

temperature is lower than approx-imately 5°C. In these conditions,the system automatically opens theair recirculation (amber LED on).You can switch recirculation backto automatic (LED off) or overrideit closed (green LED on). You areadvised not to use this functionsince the windows could mist uprapidly when the outside temper-ature is low.

113

Button for fast windscreendemisting/defrosting(10 - fig. 102)

Press this button: the climate controlsystem will automatically (for ap-proximately 180 seconds) switch onall the functions required for fastwindscreen and side window demist-ing/defrosting regardless of the sys-tem operation conditions, that is:

– climate control system compressoron (where fitted)

– air recirculation off (if on)

– maximum air temperature (HI) onboth displays

– maximum fan speed

– air flow directed to the windscreenand front side window vents

– heated rear window and externalrearview mirrors on.

The LED on the heated rear windowbutton and the amber LED on the airrecirculation button will come onwhen the fast demisting/defrostingfunction is on. The ECON, AUTOand OFF LEDS, on the other hand,will go out.

MAX

IMPORTANT If the engine is notadequately warm, the fan will not im-mediately be started at top speed tolimit letting cold air into the passen-ger compartment for demisting thewindows.

Only the fan speed can be adjustedand the heated rear window can beswitched off when the fast demist-ing/defrosting function is on.

Press the fast demisting/defrostingbutton again or the air circulationbutton, ECON, AUTO or OFF toswitch the fast demisting/defrostingfunction off and reset the previoussystem operation conditions as well asthe last set function.

On certain versions the system iscompleted by a sensor fog fitted be-hind the driving mirror and able tomonitor a section of the windscreeninternal surface and to operate thesystem automatically to prevent or toremove inside fogging from wind-screen and front side windowsthrough the following operations: airrecirculation opening, compressor ac-tivation, air distribution to wind-

screen, fan speed sufficient for defog-ging and MAX-DEF function activationin case of hard fogging.

To guarantee sensor fogproper operation, licensetag, parking disc or labels

shall not be stuck on the “moni-toring” area between sensor andwindscreen. Keep sensor andwindscreen clean, preventing anyaccumulation of dust or other sub-stances.

IMPORTANT Defogging procedureis activated by turning the ignitionkey to MAR or depressing the AUTObutton. This procedure can be deac-tivated by depressing the followingbuttons: compressor, air recirculation,distribution, air flow. This operationinhibits the sensor signal as long asthe AUTO button is pressed again or,under some conditions, the ignitionkey is turned to MAR again.

114

Button fordemisting/defrosting the heatedrear window and externalrearview mirrors (11 - fig. 102)

Press this button to switch on theheated rear window and externalrearview mirror demisting/defrostingfunction. The LED on the button willcome on.

The device will be automaticallyswitched off after ten minutes.

Press the button again or stop theengine to switch the function off. Itwill not start up automatically whenthe engine is started again.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickerson the electrical filaments inside theheated rear window to prevent dam-age.

OFF button (system off) (16 - fig. 102)

Press the OFF button to switch theclimate control system off. The LEDon the button will come on.

The climate control system condi-tions when the system is off are:

– air recirculation, ECON and AUTObutton LEDs off

– central display off, except for theoutside air temperature value

– air recirculation on, thus isolatingthe passenger compartment

– climate control system compressor(where fitted) off

– fan off.

The heated rear window can beswitched on and off normally whenthe system is off.

IMPORTANT The windows maymist up fast when the climate controlsystem is off and in certain environ-mental conditions.

The climate control system elec-tronic control unit stores the systemsettings made before the system wasswitched off and restores them assoon as a button is pressed (with theexception of the heated rear windowbutton). The function which the but-ton corresponds to will be switchedon, if it was off when the system wasswitched off. It will be kept if, on theother hand, it was on when the sys-tem was switched off.

Press the OFF button again toswitch the climate control systemback on without changing the previ-ous settings.

Press the AUTO button to switch theclimate control system back on andensure a totally automatic control.

ICE BUZZER

The climate control system isequipped with a buzzer which sounds(three consecutive buzzes) when theoutside temperature reach or dropsbelow 3°C to warn the driver of pos-sible ice.

The buzzer will sound only once un-less the outside temperature exceeds7°C. This will reactivate the systemwarning (after approximately 15 mi-nutes). In this case, if the outside tem-perature reaches or drops below 3°Cagain, the buzzer will be sounded.

The supplementary heater comple-ments engine coolant heating imme-diately after start up and when trav-elling to reach the optional engine op-eration temperature and to heat thepassenger compartment faster.

The electrical device is fully auto-matic and will only work when theengine is running.

IMPORTANT The supplementaryheater will be switched on when theoutside temperature is lower than15°C and the engine coolant temper-ature is lower than 65°C.

To prevent excessive intake of bat-tery current, the heater operation atthe various power percentages is sub-jected to the power voltage measuredby the control unit.

IMPORTANT The operation of theheater according to engine coolanttemperature consequently can be cutout or reduced according to the bat-tery voltage.

At the end of the operation cycle de-veloped according to the temperatureof the engine coolant and the batteryvoltage, the supplementary heater isautomatically switched off. It will notcome on again until the following en-gine start-up, even if the coolant tem-perature drops to under 65°C.

115

STEERINGCOLUMN STALKSLEFT-HAND STALK

This stalk groups the outside lightand the direction indicator controls.The outside lights will only light upwhen the ignition key is at MAR.

When the outside lights are turnedon, the instrument panel and the var-ious controls located on the dash-board light up.

Side and taillights (fig. 103)

These come on when you turn ringA from å to6. Instrument panel in-dicator light3 will light up.

fig. 103

P4T

0023

SUPPLEMENTARY HEATER(jtd versions only - where fitted)

116

To flash the lights (fig. 106)

Pull the stalk towards the steeringwheel (temporary position). Instru-ment panel warning light 1 willcome on.

IMPORTANT This operation willflash the main beam headlights. Fol-low the Highway Code to prevent be-ing fined.

fig. 106

P4T

0026

fig. 105P

4T00

25

Dipped beam headlights (fig. 103)

These come on when you turn ringA from6 to2.

Main beam headlights (fig. 104)

These come on when you turn thering to 2 pushing the stalk forwardstowards the dashboard. Instrumentpanel warning light 1 will come on.

To return to dipped beams, pull thestalk back towards the steering wheel.

Direction indicators (fig. 105)

Move the stalk as follows:

up - to switch on the right-hand in-dicators

down - to switch on the left-hand in-dicators.

Instrument panel warning light Ÿor Δ will flash.

The direction indicators automati-cally return to the neutral positionwhen the car straightens up. If youwant the indicator to flash briefly toshow that you are about to changelane, move the stalk up or down with-out clicking into position. When youlet it go it will return to its originalposition.

fig. 104

P4T

0024

117

RIGHT-HAND STALK

This stalk groups together all thewasher/wiper controls.

Windscreen wiper/washer (fig. 107)

This device can only work when theignition key is at MAR.

0 - Windscreen wiper off.

1 - Flick wipe. In this position, turnknob A to set the following (with theexception of versions with rain sen-sor):

■ = Slow flick

■■ = Medium flick

■■■ = Medium-fast flick

■■■■ = Fast flick.

fig. 107

P4T

0642

fig. 108P

4T06

43

In versions with rain sensor, turnring A to set the sensitivity level:

AUTO = automatic sensitivity set-ting

■ = low sensitivity ■■ = medium sensitivity■■■ = high sensitivity2 - Slow continuous wipe3 - Fast continuous wipe

4 - Temporary fast function: whenyou release the stalk it returns to po-sition 0 and automatically turns thewindscreen wiper off.

Windscreen washer

When you pull the lever towards thesteering wheel (fig. 108) a jet of liq-uid shoots out from the windscreenwasher and the windscreen wiper willbe operated for a few seconds and, af-ter a pause of approximately five sec-onds, will flick once again. If on theother hand the windscreen wiper isworking it will fast flick several times.

Headlight washer (where fitted)

Pulling the stalk towards the steer-ing wheel (fig. 108) will also operatethe headlight washers providing thatthe dipped or main beam headlightsare on (fig. 109).

fig. 109

P4T

0273

118

fig. 110

P4T

0712

CONTROLS

HAZARD LIGHTS (fig. 110)

These come on when switch A ispressed regardless of the position ofthe ignition key.

When these lights are on, the switchand the ŸΔ warning lights on the in-strument panel flash.

Press the switch again to turn thelights off.

IMPORTANT The use of the haz-ard warning lights is governed by thetraffic regulations of the countrywhere the car is being driven. Theselaws should be complied with.

Rain sensor (where fitted)

The rain sensor is an electronic de-vice combined with the windscreenwiper which automatically suits theflick frequency during operation tothe intensity of rain.

All the functions controlled with theright-hand stalk (i.e. on/off, continu-ous slow and fast wipe, temporaryfast wipe, windscreen washer andheadlight washer) are unvaried.

The rain sensor is automaticallyswitched on when the stalk is taken toposition 1 (fig. 107) and has the pur-pose of adjusting the range of opera-tion from stationary (no flick) whenthe windscreen is dry to second con-tinuous speed (continuous fast wipe)when the rain is heavy.

When the windscreen washer is op-erated and the rain sensor is on (bytaking the stalk to position 1), thenormal washing cycle is carried outafter which the rain sensor returns tonormal automatic operation.

The rain sensor is switched off whenthe key is turned to STOP. It will notcome on again at the following enginestart-up (key at MAR) if the stalk isat position 1.

Turn ring A (fig. 107) to set the rainsensor sensitivity level:

AUTO = automatic sensitivity set-ting

■ = low sensitivity

■■ = medium sensitivity

■■■ = high sensitivity.

119

fig. 112P

4T00

40fig. 111

P4T

0039

FRONT FOG LIGHTS (fig. 111)

Press button A to switch the foglights on (only when the outside lightsare on).

The LED on the button will comeon.

The fog lights will be automaticallyswitched off when the ignition key isturned to STOP and will not come onagain when the engine is started un-less button A is pressed.

Press the button to switch the lightsoff.

IMPORTANT The use of fog lightsis governed by the Highway Code.The fog light system complies withEEC/ECE standards.

REAR FOG LIGHT (fig. 112)

This light is switched on by pressingbutton A when the dipped beamheadlights and/or front fog lights areon.

The LED on the button will come on.The rear fog light will automatically

be switched off when the engine isstopped or when switching fromdipped beam headlights and/or frontfog lights to side/taillights.

Press the button again to switch thelight on after starting the engine againor switching to dipped beam head-lights in the fog.

You will need to press the button toswitch the rear fog light on again af-ter stopping the engine or switchingthe dipped beam headlights on.

IMPORTANT The rear fog lightmay annoy the drivers following youwhen visibility is good. Consequently,use the light only when required.

IMPORTANT Follow the local pre-scriptions governing the use of rearfog lights. The rear fog light systemcomplies with EEC/ECE standards.

INSTRUMENT DIMMER (fig. 113)

Turn ring A upwards or downwardwhen the outside lights are on to re-spectively increase or decrease instru-ment brightness.

fig. 113

P4T

0713

120

fig. 115P

4T00

08

FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH (fig. 115)

This is a safety cut-off switch whichcomes into operation in the case of anaccident to block the supply of fuelthereby stopping the engine. It alsoprevents spilling fuel if the lines arebroken in the accident.

The safety switch will operate - inthe event of an impact - the centraldoor locking system (if locked) to al-low opening the doors from the out-side.

After the crash, remember to turnthe ignition key to STOP to preventthe battery running down.

If, after an accident, youcan smell petrol or see thatthe fuel feed system is

leaking, to avoid the risk of fire, donot reset the switch.

If you cannot see any fuel leaks andthe car is in a fit state to continue itsjourney, press button A to reactivatethe fuel supply system.

HANDBRAKE (fig. 116)

The handbrake lever is located be-tween the two front seats.

Pull the handbrake lever upwardsuntil the car cannot be moved. Fouror five clicks are generally enoughwhen the car is on level ground whilenine or ten may be required if the caris on a steep slope or laden.

IMPORTANT If this is not the case,take the car to a Lancia Dealershipto have the handbrake adjusted.

HEATED REAR WINDOW (fig. 114)

Press button A to switch the heatedrear window on. The LED on the but-ton will come on.

The device will be automaticallyswitched off after ten minutes.

The electrical rearview mirror de-mister will also be switched on auto-matically.

fig. 114

P4T

0041

121

When the handbrake lever is pulledup and the ignition key is at MAR thepanel warning light x will come on.

To release the handbrake:

1) Slightly lift the handbrake andpress release button A.

2) Keep the button pressed in andlower the lever. Warning light x willgo out.

3) To prevent accidental movementof the car, this procedure should becarried out with the brake pedalpressed down.

fig. 116

P4T

0055

To change gear properlyyou must push the clutchpedal fully down. It is

therefore essential that there isnothing under the pedals: makesure mats are lying flat and do notget in the way of the pedals. Makesure mats are lying flat and do notget in the way of the pedals.

MANUAL GEARBOX To engage the gears, press down the

clutch and put the gear lever into oneof the positions shown in the diagramin fig. 117 (the diagram is also on thegear lever knob).

To engage reverse (R): wait for thecar to come to a standstill and fromneutral position shift the lever to theright and then back.

In some versions, lift ring A (fig.117) under the knob with the fingersof the hand operating the lever. Re-lease the ring after engaging reverse.You do not need to lift the ring toshift to another gear from reverse.

P4T

0031

Do not drive with yourhand resting on the gearstick as the force exerted,

even if only slight, could lead topremature wearing of the gearboxinternal components.

Reverse can only be en-gaged when the car is at astandstill. Wait for two

seconds or longer with the clutchpedal fully pressed before engag-ing reverse when the engine isrunning to prevent scraping anddamaging the gears.

fig. 117

122

GENERAL

The electronic cruise control allowsto drive your car at the required speedwithout pressing the acceleratorpedal. This reduces fatigue when dri-ving on motorways because the setspeed is automatically maintained.

IMPORTANT The device can onlybe set to speeds exceeding 30 km/h.

fig. 118

P4T

0307

The cruise control mustonly be used when thetraffic and road conditions

allow to keep a constant speed intotal safety for an adequately longtime.

The device is automatically switchedoff when:

– the brake pedal is pressed

– the clutch pedal is pressed.

CONTROLS (fig. 118)

The cruise control is operated by means of switch A, ring B and but-ton C.

Switch A has two position:

– OFF: in this position, the device isoff;

– ON: this is the normal device op-erating position. The CRUISE warn-

ing light D will come on when the de-vice starts governing the engine.

Ring B is used to set and maintainthe car speed or decrease the setspeed.

Turn ring B to position (+) to set thespeed reached or to increase thestored speed.

Turn ring B to position (–) to de-crease the stored speed.

The speed will be increased or de-creased by approximately 1 km/heach time ring B is operated. Hold thering turned to set the speed continu-ously. The new set speed will be au-tomatically kept.

Button C allows to reset the storedvalue.

IMPORTANT Turn the ignition keyto STOP or switch A to OFF to deletethe stored speed and switch the sys-tem off.

CRUISE CONTROL (where fitted))

123

Increasing the stored speed

The stored speed can be increased intwo ways:

– by pressing the accelerator pedaland storing the new speed (turningring B for longer than three seconds);

or

– by temporarily turning ring B to(+): each turn of the ring will corre-spond to a small speed increase (ap-proximately 1 kph) while a continu-ous pressure will correspond to a con-tinuous increase of speed. Release ringB: the new speed will automaticallybe stored.

Storing the speed

Move switch A to ON and take thecar to the required speed normally.Turn ring B to (+) for all least threeseconds and release it. The car speedwill be stored and you can now re-lease your foot from the accelerator.

The car will continue at constantspeed until one of the following eventsoccur:

– the brake pedal is pressed

– the clutch pedal is pressed.

IMPORTANT If required (e.g. forovertaking) you can accelerate simplyby pressing the accelerator. The carwill return to the previously set speedwhen the accelerator pedal is released.

Resetting the stored speed

To reset the stored speed afterswitching the device off, e.g. by press-ing the brake or the clutch pedal:

– accelerate progressively to reach aspeed which is close to the previouslyset speed

– engage the gear which was en-gaged when the speed was set (4th or5th gear)

– press button C.

124

The cruise control can beswitched on at speedshigher than 30 km/h. The

device can only be switched on in4th or 5th gear, according to carspeed. When travelling down- hillthe speed may increase slightlywith respect to the stored value ac-cording to the change in engineload.

When driving with thecruise control, do not shiftthe gear lever to neutral.

You should only switch the cruisecontrol on when the traffic androad conditions allow this in com-plete safety, i.e. straight and dryroads, motorways, fast movingtraffic and smooth road surface.Do not use the device is cities or inheavy traffic.

Reducing the stored speed

The stored speed can be decreasedin two ways:

– by switching the device off (e.g. bypressing the brake pedal) and thenstoring the new speed (turning ring Bto (+) for longer than three seconds);

or

– by turning ring B to (–) until thenew speed is reached. The new speedwill automatically be stored.

Deleting the stored speed

The stored speed is automaticallydeleted when:

– the engine is stopped

or

– switch A is turned to OFF.

If the device is faulty ordoes not work, turn switchA off and contact a Lancia

Dealership after checking the pro-tection fuse.

Switch A can be left on withoutdamaging the device. The deviceshould however be switched offwhen not in use by turning switchA off to prevent accidentally stor-ing speeds.

125

INTERIOREQUIPMENT

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Front ceiling light (fig. 119)

The ceiling light includes two cour-tesy lights and the respective switch.

Both lights will come on when adoor is opened along with the rearceiling lights when the switch A ispressed to the left (position 0 -AUTO).

The lights will stay on for approxi-mately seven seconds or until the ig-nition key is turned to MAR (with thedoors closed) to facilitate starting thecar.

The lights will go out when the igni-tion switch is turned to MAR (doorsclosed).

Switch A in central position 1: thelights will not come on (OFF posi-tion).

Press switch A to the right (position2): both light will come on regardlessof the doors.

Switch B is will switch the lights onseparately.

Press switch B to the left (position1) to switch on the left-hand light.Press the switch to the right (position2) to switch on the right-hand light.

The lights will not come on whenswitch B is in central position 0.

IMPORTANT Before getting out ofthe car, make sure that the switch Ais pressed to the left and switch B isin central position. In this way, theceiling lights will then go out whenthe doors are closed and you will notdrain the battery.

The lights will go out automaticallyafter a few seconds if a door is leftopen. Simply open a door to switchthe lights on again.

Courtesy lights (fig. 120)

Lower the sun visors to access thecourtesy lights on the roof.

The courtesy lights allow to use thecourtesy mirrors in the dark.

Press lens A at the indent to switchthe lights on and off with the key atMAR .

fig. 119

P4T

0057

fig. 120

P4T

0058

125

126

Rear ceiling lamps (fig. 121)

The ceiling lamps light on/off grad-ually when opening/closing a door.

Manual on/off switching is obtainedby pressing lens A in the point indi-cated by the arrows.

GLOVE COMPARTMENT(fig. 122-123)

According to versions, the glovecompartment located in the dash-board can be fitted with a lock.

Versions with lock:

– to lock/unlock, use the ignitionkey;

– to open, turn the ignition key toposition 1, then pull handle A.

– to lock, close the lid and turn thekey to position 2.

Never drive with the glovecompartment flap open: itcould injure the person

sitting in the passenger seat in theevent of an accident.

fig. 121

P4T

0714

fig. 122P

4T07

15fig. 123

P4T

0716

Versions without lock:

– to open, simply pull handle A.

For both versions, a courtesy light Bwill come on when the compartment,if any, is opened.

127

REAR ASHTRAY (fig. 126)

An ashtray for rear seats is locatedin the rear part of the central unit.

Pull the ashtray out to use it.

To remove the ashtray, press themiddle clip A and pull the ashtrayout.

To put it back, insert the base of theashtray, press the middle clip andpush it into its housing.

FRONT ASHTRAY AND CIGARLIGHTER (fig. 124-125)

The ashtray and cigar lighter areprotected by a single flap. Press theflap at point A to open.

Press button B to work the cigarlighter. After approximately 15 sec-onds it will return to its initial posi-tion and be ready for use.

IMPORTANT The cigar lighter willonly work when the ignition key is atMAR.

The cigar lighter gets veryhot. Be careful how youhandle it and make sure it

is not used by children: danger offire or burns.

fig. 124

P4T

0062

fig. 125P

4T00

64fig. 126

P4T

0065

Make sure that the cigarlighter does in fact pop outafter it has been pushed in.

Remove tray C to empty the ashtray.

CARD HOLDER (fig. 127)

The card holder is located in thecentre of the dashboard.

To open: press the front and release.The card holder will open automati-cally.

Push if fully to close the holder.

CUP/CAN HOLDER (fig. 128)

The holder is located in the centre ofthe dashboard. To open: press thefront and release. The cup/can holderwill open automatically.

Push it fully to close the holder.

COIN TRAY (fig. 129)

The tray A is located in the centraldashboard unit.

128

fig. 127

P4T

0066

fig. 128

P4T

0067

fig. 129P

4T00

68

SUN VISORS (fig. 130)

The sun visors can swing up ordown or be pivoted sideways.

Release the visors from hooks A tomove them sideways.

A courtesy mirror with sliding coverB and light C is fitted on the back ofthe sun visors (for details on thelights, see “Courtesy lights” in thischapter).

fig. 130

P4T

0069

129

ODDMENT COMPARTMENTS

Oddment compartments on thedashboard (fig. 131-132)

There is a central compartment A(with light) and a side compartmentB on the dashboard.

Rear oddment compartment (fig. 133)

An oddment compartment A can befound in the rear part of the centraldashboard unit.

fig. 132

P4T

0070

fig. 131

P4T

0063

fig. 133P

4T00

71

Door pockets (fig. 134)

Pockets A are located on the frontdoor panels.

fig. 134

P4T

0072

PAPER POCKETS (fig. 135)

Paper pockets are located on theback of the front seats.

HANDLES (fig. 136)

A handle is located over the frontpassenger side door.

Two handles A with clothes hook Bare over the rear doors.

The handles are equipped with a de-vice which gradually and progres-sively takes them back to home posi-tion.

130

fig. 135

P4T

0074

fig. 136P

4T07

17

FRONT ARMREST (fig. 137)

The armrest can be adjusted up ordown.

To use the armrest, lower it asshown in the figure.

An oddment compartment is con-cealed inside the armrest. Press but-ton A to lift the cover.

IMPORTANT When the armresthas been lifted completely, take carenot to accidentally press button A,otherwise you will open the objecttray cover and the contents will fallout.

fig. 137

P4T

0808

131

POWER SOCKET (fig. 138)(where fitted)

It is located on the rear part of thecentral dashboard panel. Open coverA to use the socket.

The socket is powered when the keyis turned to MAR. It can be used onlyfor accessories with a maximum in-take of 15A (power 180W).

Do not use the socket forpower devices with ahigher intake. Prolonged

current intake can drain the bat-tery and lead to problems whenstarting the engine.

P4T

0316

SUNROOF (where fitted)

The sunroof is electrically operated.It will only work when the ignitionkey is at MAR.

Improper use of the sun-roof can be dangerous. Be-fore and during its opera-

tion ensure that any passengers inthe car are not at risk from themoving roof either by personal ob-jects getting caught in the mecha-nism or by being injured by it di-rectly. Always remove the ignitionkey when you get out of the car toprevent the sunroof being operatedaccidentally and constituting adanger to the people left in the car.

fig. 138

Do not open the sunroofif there is snow or ice onit: you may damage the

mechanism.fig. 139

P4T

0076

OPENING AND CLOSING(fig. 139-140)

Button A on the ceiling light unitcontrols the opening, closing, raisingand lowering of the roof.

When you release the button, theroof locks in the position it is in atthat moment.

Press the back of the button to openthe roof and the front to close.

A small spoiler B will be lifted whenthe roof is opened to direct the flow ofair.

fig. 140

P4T

0077

132

Regularly check that theside holes C for drainingwater are free.

SLIDING SUNSHADE (fig. 141)

A sliding sunshade is fitted to lessenthe effect of sun rays in the passengercompartment when the sunroof isclosed or partially open.

Use handle A to open and close thesunshade by hand.

The sunshade slides back into theroof when the sunroof when it is com-pletely opened.

When the roof is closed, the sun-shade slides out partially to make thehandle accessible.

fig. 141

P4T

0078

IMPORTANT With ignition key atSTOP, sunroof open is indicated by atimed buzzer sounding when openinga front door.

133

SPOILER POSITION (fig. 142)

The rear part of the sunroof can onlybe raised when the roof is completelyclosed. Press the front part of buttonA (fig. 139).

Press the back part of the button toclose the back of the roof.

IMPORTANT With ignition key atSTOP, sunroof open is indicated by atimed buzzer sounding when openinga front door.

Insert the screwdriver in C and turnit. In this way, you can manually openand close the sunroof.

When the roof is in the required po-sition, turn the screwdriver half a turnbackwards until you hear a click.Then remove the screwdriver.

fig. 142

P4T

0079

fig. 144

P4T

0081

fig. 143P

4T00

80

EMERGENCY PROCEDURE(fig. 143-144)

If there is an electrical fault in thesunroof, remove cover A from thefront ceiling light using the screw-driver provided as a lever in point B.

IMPORTANT The electronic alarm(where fitted) will not be switched onby locking the door with the key inthe lock.

From the inside (fig. 147-148)

When the doors are closed press (tolock) or lift (to unlock) one of thefront door sill buttons A.

The rear door sill buttons will lockand unlock only that particular door.

The rear doors can only be openedfrom the inside when the child locksare not engaged.

Pull the handle B to open the door.All doors are unlocked when a frontdoor handle is operated.

A light C (where fitted) is locatednear each door handle to make it easyto find the handle in the dark.

fig. 146P

4T08

02

fig. 147

P4T

0083

fig. 148

P4T

0084

134

DOORSCENTRAL DOOR LOCKINGSYSTEM

From the outside

Close the doors and either press but-ton A (fig. 145) on the key grip or in-sert and turn the key in the driver'sdoor lock.

To unlock, turn the key to position1 (fig. 146).

To lock, turn the key to position 2.

To open the door, lift the handle.

fig. 145

P4T

0801

IMPORTANT If one of the doors isnot shut properly or there is a failurein the system, the central door lock-ing system will not work and aftersome attempts the device stops work-ing for about two minutes. In thesetwo minutes, the doors can be lockedor unlocked manually without theelectrical system coming into play. Af-ter the two minutes, the control unitis ready to receive commands onceagain. If the cause of the failure is re-moved, the device will start workingproperly, otherwise it will cut out oncemore.

CHILD LOCK (fig. 149)

To prevent opening the rear doorsfrom the inside.

Engage by inserting the tip of the ig-nition key in A to turn the lock.

Position 1 - engaged.

Position 2 - disengaged.

The device will be engaged even ifthe doors are unlocked by means ofthe centralised system.

135

Always use the lock whentransporting children. Thiswill prevent them opening

a door by themselves when travel-ling.

fig. 149P

4T08

03

PUDDLE LIGHTS (fig. 150)

The puddle lights are fitted in thelower part of the front door panels toilluminate the ground.

These lights will come on with thefront ceiling lights.

fig. 150

P4T

0073

IMPORTANT After engaging thelock, check by trying to open a reardoor with the internal handle.

136

ELECTRIC WINDOWS

Front and rear electric windows areprovided with anti-crushing safety de-vice. When the system control unit de-tects an obstacle in the last 20 cm ofthe window closing travel, it makesthe window travel stop and reverseimmediately.

IMPORTANT Should all the powerwindows be operated at the same timewhen closing there could be a strokeinversion of one of them. It is there-fore suggested to check that closure isperformed.

fig. 151

P4T

0263

Should the battery bedisconnected or a dedi-cated fuse be replaced,

reinitialise the anti-crushing safetydevice proceeding as follows:

1) lower completely the driver’swindow keeping the control buttondepressed for at least 3 seconds af-ter it has reached the end of itstravel;

2) release the control button thenclose the window completely keep-ing the button pulled up for atleast 3 seconds after the windowhas reached the end of its travel;

3) proceed in the same way for allthe other windows avoiding to per-form these operations on morethan one window at the same time.

At the end of this procedure thesystem is reset to its original oper-ating conditions, otherwise contacta Lancia Dealership as soon aspossible.

Front electrical window winders(fig. 151)

The electrical window winders arecontrolled by buttons located on thedoor panel on driver’s side. They workwhen the ignition key is at MAR:

A - front left-hand window

B - front right-hand window

C - rear left-hand window

D - rear right-hand window

E - switch to disable rear electricalwindow winders.

To prevent system mal-functioning, do not keepthe control buttons pressed

when the window has reached theend of its travel.

137

IMPORTANT The front windowwinders can be operated for five min-utes after the key is turned to STOP(and not extracted) with the doorsclosed.

The rear window winder controlswill be disabled when switch E is up.

Pull up or press the control buttonto activate automatic closing or open-ing: the window will stop when itreaches the end of its travel (or whenthe button is pressed again).

A short pulse results in a short win-dow movement.

Rear electrical window winders(fig. 152)

A button to operate the respectivewindow in located in each rear doorhandle.

Pull the button to wind the windowup or press it to wind the windowdown.

Switches C and D (fig. 151) operatethe rear window windows from thedriver’s seat.

Switch E (fig. 151) disables the con-trols on door handles when the switchis up.

fig. 152P

4T02

62

Improper use of the elec-trical window winders canbe dangerous. Before and

during their operation ensure thatany passengers in the car are notat risk from the moving glass ei-ther by personal objects gettingcaught in the mechanism or by be-ing injured by it directly. Alwaysremove the ignition key when youget out of the car to prevent theelectrical window winders beingoperated accidentally and consti-tuting a danger to the people left inthe car.

Should there be a failurein the anti-crushing safetysystem, automatic window

operation (both closing and open-ing) is excluded. Contact a LanciaDealership as soon as possible.

The door handle on the passengerside has a switch to control that par-ticular window.

138

BOOTLift switch A (fig. 153) on the base

of the driver seat or turn the key inlock B (fig. 154) to position 1 to openthe boot.

The boot is locked when the boot isclosed.

Use handle C to open the boot.

The floor mat can be reversed. Re-move it and turn it over with thewashable side facing up when carry-ing dirty loads.

fig. 153

P4T

0249

fig. 154P

4T00

87

When using the boot,make sure the load you arecarrying does not ex-ceed

the maximum allowed weight (seethe “Technical specifications”chapter). Also ensure the items inthe boot are arranged properlyand fastened with straps to thespecific hooks to prevent them be-ing thrown forwards and injuringpassengers should you brakesharply.

OPENING THE BOOT WITH THEREMOTE CONTROL

The boot can be opened from the out-side by pressing the button D (fig. 155)on the ignition key grip.

The boot can be opened also whenthe central door locking system andthe electronic alarm (where fitted) areon.

In this case, the alarm system im-plements the following strategy:

– volumetric protection off

– anti-lift sensor off

– boot sensor off.

The surveillance functions will be re-stored when the boot is closed.

fig. 155

P4T

0804

139

EXTENDING THE BOOT

This is only possible in versions withsplit rear seats.

See the specific chapter for instruc-tions for the Station Wagon version.

The split rear seat allows to partiallyor totally extend the boot (one third,two thirds, or totally).

To partially extend the boot (one third) (fig. 156)

Fold the left-hand seat only. Youcan sit two passengers in the rear seaton the right-hand side.

To partially extend the boot (two thirds) (fig. 157)

Fold the right-hand seat only. Youcan sit one passenger in the rear seaton the left-hand side.

To totally extend the boot (fig. 158)

Fold both side of the seat to obtainmaximum boot capacity.

fig. 156

P4T

0088

fig. 157

P4T

0089

fig. 158P

4T00

90fig. 159

P4T

0091

To extend the boot

1) Pull handle A (fig. 159) locatedin the middle of each cushion in thedirection of travel and fold it forwardsin the direction of the arrow.

2) Remove the head restraints fromthe rear seat (see “Head restraints” inthis chapter) and insert them in thehousings on the cushion (fig. 160).

3) Turn the lever (fig. 161) on therear window shelf to release the seatback lock.

position 1 = right-hand seat back

position 2 = left-hand seat back.

140

4) Lift the seat belts sideways andtilt the seat back forwards as to ob-tain a single load platform with thefloor of the boot.

To return the seats to theirnormal position

1) Move the seat belt sideways andbring the seat back to an upright po-sition. Check that it has caught prop-erly.

2) Tip the cushion back and makesure that the seat belt webbing is nottwisted in the hidden stretches be-tween the cushions and the seat back.

3) Refit the head restraints.

IMPORTANT If there is a fairlyheavy load in the boot and you aretravelling at night, it is a good idea tocheck and adjust the height of thedipped beam headlights (see “Head-lights” in this chapter).

fig. 161P

4T00

92fig. 160

P4T

0737

ANCHORING THE LOAD (fig. 162-163-164)

The load can be secured with beltsattached to the specific rings in theboot corners.

The rings can also be used to fastenthe luggage net (optional, can be pur-chased at a Lancia Dealership).

fig. 162

P4T

0093

141

SKI TUNNEL (fig. 165)

The ski tunnel can be used to trans-port long objects (e.g. skis). Introduceobjects into the tunnel from the boot.

1) Lower the armrest A.

2) Press handle B and lower flap C.

3) Remove the cover (where fitted).

Push flap C towards the boot toclose it. It will lock automatically.

Heavy loads which arenot securely anchoredcould seriously injure pas-

sengers in the event of an accident.

fig. 164

P4T

0095

fig. 163

P4T

0094

fig. 165P

4T02

00

BONNETTo open the bonnet:

1) Pull the red lever A (fig. 166) inthe direction of the arrow.

fig. 166

P4T

0096

This should only be donewhen the car is stationary.

2) Lift lever B (fig. 167) and releasethe bonnet from the safety retainer.

3) Lift the bonnet.

For safety reasons thebonnet shall always beperfectly closed when trav-

elling. Always check for properbonnet locking. If the bonnet is leftinadvertently open, stop the carimmediately and close the bonnet.

142

IMPORTANT The bonnet is liftedby two gas struts (fig. 168). Do nottamper with the struts and follow thebonnet in its movement.

fig. 167

P4T

0097

fig. 168

P4T

0645

Scarves, ties and otherloose articles of clothingcould easily get caught up

in moving parts.

If repairs need to be car-ried out inside the enginecompartment when this is

still hot, be careful not to burnyourself and keep away from theelectric fan as this may cut in atany time, even if the key is re-moved from the ignition switch.Wait until the engine has cooled.

To close the bonnet:

1) Lower the bonnet until it is about20 cm above the engine compart-ment. Let it fall: the bonnet will lockautomatically.

2) Make sure that the bonnet is com-pletely closed and that it is not onlycaught in the safety retainer. If this isso, do not press the bonnet to attemptto close it. Lift the bonnet and repeatthe procedure described above.

Always make sure thebonnet is closed properlyby trying to lift it so it will

not open whilst the car is moving.

143

FUEL FILLER CAPThe fuel filler cap flap is controlled

automatically by the central doorlocking system.

In an emergency, the flap can be re-leased by pulling wire A (fig. 169) onthe right-hand side of the boot (saloonversions).

In Station Wagon versions, wire A(fig. 170) can be found inside theright-hand utility compartment on theright-hand side of the boot. Pull thehandle and remove the flap to reachthe wire.

The airtight seal of the cap may leadto a slight increase of pressure in thetank. A hissing sound when the cap isremoved is therefore quite normal.

When centrally unlocked, the flapwill be in line with the body. To openthe flap, press the front part in pointB (fig. 171) where there is a slightridge on the surface.

Then pull the back of the flap back-wards and turn it outwards at thesame time as shown by the arrow un-til the flap is fully open.

fig. 171P

4T01

00

fig. 170

P4T

0317

fig. 169

P4T

0279

fig. 172

P4T

0646

Do not put naked flamesor lighted cigarettes nearthe fuel filer hole as there

is a danger of fire. Do not bend tooclose to the hole either so as not tobreathe in harmful vapours.

The cap is equipped with a deviceA (fig. 172) which fastens it to theflap so that it cannot be misplaced.

While you are filling up, fasten thecap to the device inside the flap asshown in the figure.

144

The hands-free telephoneyou purchase will need tobe compatible with your

cellular telephone.

The system set-up consists of:

– aerial, located on car roof;

Have the cellular tele-phone and the connectionsto the system installed by a

Lancia Dealership only. This willensure the best results and preventproblems will could effect carsafety.

The maximum power ap-plicable to the aerial is20W.

– shielded wire connecting aerial andpower. The connectors are located inthe central unit near the handbrakelever. The wire contains the soundsystem connections for the TEL-IN(for listening to a telephone call withthe sound system speakers) and TEL-MUTE (sound system muting when acall is received) functions.

CELLULAR PHONE SET-UP (where fitted)

IMPORTANT When installing thecellular telephone, set the input vol-ume as shown in the Sound systemchapter, Possible expert settings list(PHONE SETTING and PHONEAMPLIFICATION).

RADIO TRANSMITTERS ANDCELLULAR TELEPHONES

Cellular telephones and other radiotransceiver equipment (e.g.: HAM ra-dio systems) shall not be used insidethe car unless a separate aerial ismounted on the roof.

IMPORTANT The use of cellulartelephones, HAM radio systems orother similar devices inside the pas-senger compartment (without sepa-rated aerial) produces radio-fre-quency electromagnetic fields which,amplified by the resonance effects in-side the passenger compartment, maycause electrical systems equipping thecar to malfunction. This could com-promise safety in addition to consti-tuting a potential hazard for the pas-sengers.

In addition, transmission and recep-tion of these devices may be affectedby the shielding effect of the car’sbody.

145

ROOF RACK ANDSKI RACK

ANCHORAGE POINTS (fig. 173-174)

See the specific chapter for instruc-tions for the Station Wagon version.

fig. 173

P4T

0102

After travelling a fewkilometres, check that thescrews securing the rack

are tight.

The four anchorage roof rack brack-ets are located on the roof duct (twoper side).

The brackets are under the ductweather-stripping. Lift the lip of therubber weather-stripping to reach thebrackets.

Fasten the roof/ski rack to thebrackets.

IMPORTANT The weather-strip-ping should not be crumpled up at thebottom of the channel but should restalong the sides of the roof/ski rackuprights.

fig. 174P

4T01

03

Never exceed the permit-ted weight (refer to the“Technical specifications”

chapter).

HEADLIGHTS

GAS-DISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS(where fitted)

Gas-discharge headlights (Xeno)work with electric arc in an environ-ment saturated with pressurisedxenon gas, instead of incandescent fil-ament.

Obtained lighting is significantlyhigher than that of traditional lampsfor both light quality (brighter light)and illuminated area extent and posi-tion.

Benefits offered by improved light-ing are noticed (less tired eyes, im-proved driver’s sense of direction andtherefore improved safety) speciallywith bad weather conditions, fogand/or insufficient signage since sidezones that generally remain in thedark are better illuminated.

146

fig. 175

P4T

0647

Adjust the headlightbeam position of the everytime you change the load

to be carried.

Use the electrical adjusting device A(fig. 175):

Position 0 - one or two people onfront seats.

Risk of malfunctioning is improbablesince Xeno lamps have a very long life.

IMPORTANT The bulbs of (Xeno)gas-discharge headlights must be re-placed by a Lancia Dealership.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTBEAM (excluding versions withgas-discharge headlights)

The correct positioning of the head-light beams is very important for thecomfort and safety, not only of theperson driving the car but also allother road users.

This is also covered by a specificlaw.

To ensure you and other drivershave the best visibility conditionswhen travelling with the headlightson, the headlights must be set prop-erly.

Have the headlight position checked- and adjusted, if required - at a Lan-cia Dealership.

SLANT COMPENSATION(excluding versions with gas-discharge headlights)

A loaded car slopes backwards. Thismeans that the headlight beam rises.In this case, a compensation is re-quired.

Improved side zone lighting im-proves significantly driving safetysince.

It enables the driver to better iden-tify the presence of other users on theroadside (pedestrians, cyclists, mo-torcyclists).

Electric arc striking requires highvoltage, but powering needs then alower voltage.

These headlights reach their max.brilliancy after approx. 0.5 secondsfrom activation.

High brilliancy produced by thistype of headlights requires the adop-tion of an automatic system to keepconstant the beam adjustment in or-der to prevent glaring the other dri-vers in case of braking, accelerationor load transport.

The electromechanical systemadopted to keep constant the beamadjustment makes the slant compen-sation device unnecessary.

147

Position 1 - five people.

Position 2 - five people + maximumallowed load in boot.

Position 3 - driver + maximum al-lowed load in boot.

If your car fits an automatic reartrim control system, operate the elec-trical control A (fig. 175) as follows:

Position 1 - one occupant + load inthe boot (to maximum allowed load).

Positions 2 and 3 - do not use.

Position 0 - other conditions.

The electronic headlight adjuster isnot present on versions with gas dis-charge headlights as in this case head-light adjustment employs a devicewhich is operated automatically.

ADJUSTING THE FRONT FOGLIGHT BEAM

Turn screw A (fig. 176) from underthe car to adjust the fog light beam.

Have the light position checked -and adjusted, if required - at a Lan-cia Dealership.

fig. 176P

4T01

05

EOBD SYSTEMThe EOBD (European On Board

Diagnosis) system fitted in this carcomplies with Directive 98/69/CE(EURO 3).

This system continuously monitorsthe engine emission system compo-nents. Furthermore, the system warnsthe driver of deterioration concerningthe emission system components bymeans of the U warning light on theinstrument panel.

The objective is to:

– monitor system efficiency;

– warn when failures can increaseemissions over the threshold estab-lished by the European regulations;

– warn of the need to replace deteri-orated components.

Furthermore, the system is equippedwith a connector for interfacing withspecific tools used to read the errorcodes stored in the control unit mem-ory along with a set of diagnostic andengine specific parameters.

148

The car is fitted with anelectronic braking device(EBD). The > and x

warning lights come on at thesame time when the engine is run-ning to indicate that there is anEBD system failure. In this case vi-olent braking may be accompa-nied by early rear wheel lockingwith the possibility of skidding.Drive the car extremely carefullyto the nearest Lancia Dealership tohave the system checked.

OPERATION

The electronic control unit receivesand processes the signals from thebrake pedal and the four sensors onthe wheels. It consequently controlsthe hydraulic system so to decrease,hold or increase the pressure in thecircuit and prevent locking.

IMPORTANT A slight pulsation ofthe brake pedal may be felt when theABS system comes into play.

ABS

GENERAL

The ABS (wheel anti-locking) sys-tem prevents wheel locking and con-sequent slipping in all road surfaceconditions. This ensures greater con-trol, as it is possible to steering andbrake at the same time, and reducesbraking space.

If the road surface conditions de-crease the friction coefficient (i.e. dueto the presence of water, ice, snow,etc.), a wheel may slip. Furthermore,a wheel which is not locked can ab-sorb the lateral forces exerted by thetyre which preventing steering.

The car is equipped with an elec-tronic brake force distributor - calledEBD - which, by means of the ABSelectronic control unit and sensors, in-creases the brake system perfor-mance.

Contact a Lancia Dealer-ship as soon as possible iftheU warning light either

does not come on when the key isturned to MAR or comes on, withfixed or flashing light, when trav-elling.

IMPORTANT After eliminating theproblem, your Lancia Dealershipwill run a bench test to fully check thesystem. In some cases, a long road testmay be required.

149

The maximum possibledeceleration always de-pends on the available

road grip. Obviously, grip will beconsiderably decreased in thepresence of snow and ice. In theseconditions, the braking space willstill is high, even with the ABS.

Excessive use of enginebraking (gears too shortand limited grip) may

make the wheels slip. The ABS willhave no effect on this type of skid-ding.

The system performancein terms of active safetymust not lead the driver to

take unnecessary or unjustifiedrisks. Always suit your drivingstyle to the weather, visibility andtraffic conditions.

The > warning lightwhen the engine is runningnormally indicates a fault

in the ABS system only. In thiscase, the braking system will stillbe effective although without theanti-lock device assistance. Inthese conditions, EBD system op-eration may also be reduced. Alsoin this case, you should take yourcar to the nearest Lancia Dealer-ship avoiding sudden braking tohave the system checked.

Stop the car immediatelyand contact a Lancia Deal-ership if the low brake

fluid warning light x comes on.Fluid leakage will compromise ef-ficiency of both the traditionalbrake system and the ABS wheelanti-locking system.

ESP SYSTEM (where required)ASR -HILL HOLDER -HYDRAULIC BRAKE ASSIST

Electronic Stability Program

ESP is an electronic system used tocontrol vehicle stability. It contributesto bringing the vehicle back to its cor-rect path by acting on the deflectingtorque and braking the wheels sepa-rately in case of loss of grip.

A running vehicle is subjected to lat-eral and longitudinal forces that canbe controlled by the driver as long astyres ensure optimum road-holding;when the latter falls below the mini-mum level, the vehicle starts to swervefrom the path the driver wants to fol-low.

Especially when driving on a roughroadbed, or in presence of water, iceor loose soil, any variation in speed(when accelerating or braking) and/orpath (when taking a bend or avoidingsudden obstacles) can cause loss oftyre grip.

150

The control unit processes the infor-mation received from the sensors and,therefore, is able to continuouslymonitor the vehicle’s position andcompare the latter with the path thatthe driver intends to follow. In case ofdisagreement, the control unit selectsand performs, in a fraction of a sec-ond, the most adequate actions tobring the vehicle back to its path: itapply the brakes to one or severalwheels with different force and, ifnecessary, reduces the power gener-ated by the engine.

Corrective actions are continuouslymodified and controlled to pursue thepath wanted by the driver.

The action of the ESP system greatlyincreases the vehicle’s active safety inmany critical situations and is usefulespecially when the roadbed adhesionconditions are uneven.

When the sensors detect any condi-tion that may cause the vehicle toskid, the ESP system acts both on theengine and the brakes, by generatinga stabilizing torque.

ESP SYSTEM OPERATION

The ESP system is automatically ac-tuated upon starting the vehicle andcannot be switched off.

The main components of the ESPsystem are:

– an electronic control unit thatprocesses the signals received from thevarious sensors and performs the mostadequate actions;

– a sensor that detects the steeringwheel position;

– four sensors that detect the re-volving speed of each wheel;

– a sensor that detects the vehicle ro-tation around the vertical axis, and anintegrated sensor that detects lateralacceleration (centrifugal force).

The stabilizing action of the ESPsystem is based on the calculationsmade by the system’s electronic con-trol unit, which processes the signalsreceived from the sensors used to de-tect steering wheel rotation, lateral ac-celeration and the revolving speed ofeach wheel. These signals allow thecontrol unit to recognize the manoeu-vre the driver is going to performwhen turning the steering wheel.

The system’s active safetyfeatures must not inducethe driver to take any un-

necessary risk. Driving behaviourmust always be proportionate tothe roadbed conditions, as well asto visibility and traffic. In any case,the responsibility for road safetyalways rests with the driver.

An ESP system that also incorpo-rates the ASR function helps the dri-ver keep control of the vehicle in caseof loss of grip between the tyre andthe roadbed.

The forces generated by the ESPcontrol system to control the vehicle’sloss of stability always depend on thegrip between the tyres and theroadbed.

151

ASR FUNCTION Antislip Regulation

Through the ASR function, the ESPsystem controls the vehicle’s traction:it is automatically actuated every timeone or both driving wheels skid.

The ESP systems detects the skid ofone or both driving wheels and re-duces the power generated from theengine, making it proportionate to theroadbed adhesion.

Two different control systems areactuated, according to the skiddingconditions:

– if the skid of both driving wheelsis caused by the excess power gener-ated, the ESP system comes into ac-tion by reducing the engine power;

– if skidding affects only one drivingwheel, the ESP system comes into ac-tion by automatically braking theskidding wheel, thus producing an ef-fect very similar to the one producedby a self-locking differential.

ESP SYSTEM ACTUATIONSIGNAL

Actuation of the ESP system is sig-nalled by the flashing of warninglamp á on the dashboard: this in-forms the driver of the vehicle’s criti-cal stability and grip conditions.

ESP system fault warning

In case of faults, the ESP system isautomatically switched off: this causeswarning lamp á on the dashboard tolight up and stay on.

In case of ESP system faults, the ve-hicle’s behaviour will be the same asthe models not equipped with this sys-tem: in any case, it is recommendedthat you contact your Lancia Deal-ership.

ASR FUNCTION SWITCHING ON (fig. 177)

The ESP system actuates the ASRfunction every time the engine isstarted. When the vehicle is running,the ASR function can be switched offand then on again by pressing switchA on the central console.

ASR function switching off is sig-nalled by the lighting up of LED B onthe switch.

If this function is switched off whenthe vehicle is running, it will be auto-matically switched on again the nexttime the engine is started.

fig. 177P

4T07

41 It is recommended thatthe ASR function beswitched off when snow

chains are fitted to the wheels.

152

ASR FUNCTION ACTUATION SIGNAL

ASR function actuation is signalledby the flashing of warning lamp á onthe dashboard: this informs the driverthat the system is adapting itself tothe roadbed adhesion conditions.

ASR function fault warning

In case of faults, this function is au-tomatically switched off. This condi-tion is signalled by the simultaneouslighting up of warning lamp á on thedashboard and of LED B on theswitch.

In case of faults, the vehicle’s be-haviour will be the same as the mod-els not equipped with this function: inany case, it is recommended that youcontact your Lancia Dealership assoon as possible, to have the ESP sys-tem checked.

HH FUNCTION Hill Holder (where provided)

It is an integral part of the ESP sys-tem and facilitates starting on an up-hill slope.

It is automatically activated in thefollowing conditions:

Uphill: vehicle stationary on a roadwith gradient above 2%, engine run-ning, clutch and brake pedals pressedand gearbox in neutral position orgear engaged (reverse excluded).

Downhill: stationary on a road withgradient above 2%, engine running,clutch and brake pedals pressed andreverse engaged.

During pickup the ESP system con-trol unit maintains the wheel brakingpressure until the engine torque re-quired for start up is reached, or any-way for a maximum of 2 seconds, sothat the right foot can be moved eas-ily from the brake pedal to the accel-erator pedal.

After 2 seconds and without startingthe car, the system automatically de-activates gradually releasing the brak-ing pressure. During this phase it ispossible to hear the typical brake me-chanical disengaging noise which in-dicates the car is about to move off.

153

Failure warnings

In the event of failure, the instru-ment cluster warning light willcome on together with the message onthe reconfigurable multifunction dis-play (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

*

During the use of thespare wheel, the ESP func-tion carries on working.

However, you must remind thatthe spare wheel presents dimen-sions smaller than the standardtyre and therefore the grip is re-duced as to the other car tyres.

For correct operation ofthe ESP system, the tyresmust absolutely be of the

same brand and type on allwheels, in perfect conditions and,above all, of the type, brand andsize specified.

HBA FUNCTION Hydraulic Brake Assist(where provided) HBA

The function, which cannot be cutout, recognizes emergency braking(on the ground of the brake pedal op-eration speed) and considerably in-creases the pressure in the brakingcircuit.

Hydraulic Brake Assist is deacti-vated on the versions equipped withESP, in the event of ESP system fail-ure (indicated by warning ).á

The Hill Holder system isnot a parking brake there-fore, never leave the car

without engaging the parkingbrake, the first gear and turningthe engine off.

154

SOUND SYSTEMDEVICES

The car is equipped with a completesound system.

The sound system is built into themultiple function display and can beequipped with an optional CD playerand HI-FI sound system.

Lancia ICS (Integrated ControlSystem) with navigation system(where fitted)

The Lancia ICS system with naviga-tion system and instructions for oper-ating the specific sound system areprovided in the supplement attachedto this Owner Handbook for carswhere this system is fitted.

SPEAKERS

Front speakers (fig. 178)

The front speakers are housed in thefront door panels.

A - Tweeter (excluding versions withBOSE HI-FI system)

B - Woofer.

Rear speakers (fig. 179)

The rear speakers C are housed inthe rear door panels (versions withBOSE HI-FI system only).

Speakers on the rear windowshelf (fig. 180)

Speakers D are located at the endsof the rear window shelf.

fig. 178

P4T

0106

fig. 179P

4T01

07fig. 180

P4T

0738

155

CD PLAYER (where fitted)(fig. 181)

The CD player is housed in the spe-cific compartment on the left-handside of the boot over the Lancia I.C.S.navigation system CD drive (wherefitted).

Turn knob A to open the flap.

BOSE HI-FI SOUND SYSTEM(where fitted)

The HI-FI sound system consists of:

– two high-performance woofers(168 mm diameter) fitted in frontdoor panels

– two coaxial tweeters (50 mm di-ameter) built-into the front doorwoofers

– two high-performance, wide-bandmid-range speakers (160 mm diame-ter) fitted in the rear door panels

– one high-performance subwoofer(230 mm diameter) fitted on the rearwindow shelf (saloon versions)

– one bass box volume (14 dm3) fit-ted on the right-hand side of the boot(Station Wagon versions)

– a high power HI-FI amplifier with6 channels each with 37W, two ofwhich for class D subwoofer or bassbox, with digital signal equalization.

Overall musical power 220W.

fig. 181

P4T

0282

The HI-FI sound system was specif-ically designed for the Lybra to offerthe best acoustic performance and themusical realism of a live concert ineach seat in the passenger compart-ment.

System characteristics include crys-talline treble and full, rich basses.Furthermore, the complete range oftones is played in the entire passengercompartment embracing the passen-gers with the feeling of space typicalof live music.

The system components arepatented and result from state-of-the-art technology. At the same time, thesystem is easy and intuitive to use andallows even the least experts to use thesystem to the best.

156

DRIVING YOUR CAR

To help you handle your car in the best andsafest possible way, and above all use it to itsfullest potential, we have given you some hintsin this chapter on “what to do, what not to doand what to avoid” when at the wheel of yourLybra.

Most of the time, these suggestions apply toother cars as well. Sometimes, however, the tipmay apply to an exclusive Lybra feature. Youare therefore strongly recommended to pay theclosest attention to this section for helpful hintson optimum driving practices and usage of thecar that will help you get the most out of yourcar.

STARTING THE ENGINE .............................. 157PARKING ........................................................ 160AT THE FILLING STATION ........................... 160SAFE DRIVING .............................................. 164CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS ANDPOLLUTION................................................... 168CHEAP RUNNING THAT RESPECT THEENVIRONMENT ............................................. 170TOWING A TRAILER .................................... 171SNOW CHAINS .............................................. 172STORING THE CAR ....................................... 173REPEATED CHECKS AND CHECKS BEFORE LONG TRIPS .................................. 173ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER ......................................................... 174USEFUL ACCESSORIES ............................... 174

157

STARTING THE ENGINE

HOW TO START PETROLVERSIONS

1) Ensure that the handbrake is up.

2) Put the gear lever into neutral.

3) Press the clutch pedal down tothe floor without touching the accel-erator.

4) Turn the ignition key to AVV andrelease it as soon as the engine starts.

If the engine does not start at thefirst attempt, return the ignition keyto STOP before trying to start the en-gine again.

If the warning light ¢ stays on withwarning light U when the ignitionkey is at MAR, turn the key to STOPand then to MAR; if the warning lightstays on, try with the other keys pro-vided.

If you are still unable to start the en-gine, perform the emergency start-upprocedure (see “In an emergency”)and call your Lancia Dealership.

IMPORTANT Never leave the igni-tion key at MAR when the engine isoff.

It is dangerous to let theengine run in a garage ofother closed area. The en-

gine consumes oxygen and givesoff carbon dioxide, carbon monox-ide and other poisonous gases.

The engine may be more noisierthan usual during the first seconds ofoperation, especially after it has notbeen used for a while. This charac-teristic feature of the hydraulic tappetsystem does not compromise func-tionality or reliability. The system de-vised for the Lybra was designed tolimit maintenance interventions.

Never touch the high volt-age cables (spark plug ca-bles) when the engine is

running.

158

HOW TO START JTD VERSIONS

1) Ensure that the handbrake is up.

2) Put the gear lever into neutral.

3) Turn the ignition key to MAR. In-strument panel warning lights mand¢ will come on.

4) Wait for the instrument panelwarning light ¢ to go out.

5) Wait for the instrument panelwarning light m to go out. The hot-ter the engine is, the quicker this willhappen.

6) Press the clutch pedal down tothe floor.

7) Turn the key to AVV immedi-ately after the m warning light goesout. If you wait to long, you will losethe benefit of the work done by theglow plugs.

Idling ratio is kept automaticallyhigher than usual when the engine iscold.

The warning light mwill flash (for approxi-mately 60 seconds) at start-

up or during prolonged crankingto signal a fault in the glow plugheating system. You can use thecar as usual if the engine starts butyou should contact a Lancia Deal-ership as soon as possible to haveproblem seen to.

If the engine does not start at thefirst attempt, return the ignition keyto STOP before trying to start the en-gine again.

If the warning light ¢ stays on withwarning light U when the ignitionkey is at MAR, turn the key to STOPand then to MAR; if the warning lightstays on, try with the other keys pro-vided.

If you still cannot start the engine,get in touch with a Lancia Dealer-ship.

IMPORTANT Never leave the igni-tion key at MAR when the engine isoff.

HOW TO WARM UP THEENGINE AFTER IS HAS JUSTSTARTED(petrol and jtd versions)

– Begin to move forward slowly let-ting the engine turn at medium revs.Do not accelerate abruptly.

– Do not push the engine to its limitfor the first few kilometres. You arerecommended to wait until the coolanttemperature has reached 50° to 60°C.

EMERGENCY START-UP

If the Lancia CODE system fails torecognise that code transmitted by theignition key (instrument panel warn-ing light ¢ orU on) the emergencystart– up can be performed by usingthe CODE card code.

See “In an emergency”.

STOPPING THE ENGINE

Turn the ignition key to STOP whilethe engine is idling.

IMPORTANT After a taxing driveyou should allow the engine to “catchits breath” before turning it off by let-ting it idle to allow the temperature inthe engine compartment to fall.

159

Never bump start the en-gine (by pushing, towing orcoasting downhill) as this

could cause fuel to flow into thecatalytic exhaust system and dam-age it beyond repair.

Remember that until theengine has started thebrake booster and power

steering systems will not work anda greater effort will therefore berequired to press the brake pedalor turn the steering wheel.

A quick burst on the ac-celerator before turning off the engine serves ab-

solutely no practical purpose andwastes fuel.

BUMP STARTING

An inefficient catalyticconverter will allow harm-ful exhaust fumes to be

emitted and thus contribute to airpollution.

Never put even the tiniestamount of leaded petrol inthe fuel tank of your car

even in an emergency. You woulddamage the catalytic converter be-yond repair.

160

PARKINGStop the engine, engage the hand-

brake and engage a gear (first gear ifthe car is faced uphill or reverse if itis faced downhill). Leave the wheelssteered so to stop the car immediatelyif the handbrake is accidentally re-leased.

Block the wheels with a wedge or astone if the car is parked on a steepslope.

Do not leave the ignition key atMAR to prevent draining the battery.

Always remove the key when youleave the car.

PETROL VERSIONS

The car’s pollution control devicesmake it essential to use unleadedpetrol only.

However, to avoid errors, the diam-eter of the fuel filler is too small to in-troduce a lead petrol pump filler.

Use petrol with a rated octane num-ber (R.O.N.) not lower than 95.

Tank capacity: 60 litres including areserve of approximately 8 litres.

Never leave unsupervisedchildren in the car.

fig. 1

P4T

0246

AT THE FILLING STATION

ENGINE OIL

Checking the level: see the “Carmaintenance” chapter.

The gap between the MIN and MAXreference lines on the dipstick corre-sponds to approximately one litre ofoil.

Use SAE 10W-40 or SAE 5W-30 oilfor petrol engines.

Use SAE 10W-40 or SAE 5W-40 oilfor diesel engines.

For other information, see the“Technical specifications” chapter.

ENGINE COOLANT

Top up with a 50– 50 mixture ofdistilled water and PARAFLU UP.For other information, see the “Tech-nical specifications” chapter.

JTD VERSIONS

Refuel with diesel fuel formotor vehicles complyingwith European Specifica-

tions EN590 only. The use of otherproducts or mixtures can damagethe engine beyond repair and con-sequent forfeit the warranty for thedamage caused. If you accidentallyuse other types of fuel, do not startthe engine and empty the tank. If,on the other hand, the engine hasrun, even for a very short time, youwill need to drain the fuel lines aswell as emptying the tank.

Diesel fuel fluidity decreases at lowtemperatures due to the paraffin itcontains and can clog up the fuel fil-ter.

To avoid possible problems, fuellingstations usually sell summer or win-ter fuel according to the period of theyear.

In spring or autumn, however, whenthe maximum and minimum tem-perature range is wide (from 0 to + 15°C), the quality of diesel fuel soldat fuelling stations may not be ade-quate.

In this case, especially for frequentengine stopping and starting at lowtemperatures (e.g. in the mountains),refuel with winter type diesel fuel. Al-ternatively add a specific diesel fueladditive to the fuel, in the proportionswritten on the container. Pour the ad-ditive into the fuel tank before thefuel.

The additive is effective only if it isadded before the cold begins to takeeffect on the fuel. Adding the productafter will not have any effect.

161

162

SPARK PLUGS

LANCIA RC10YCC

1.6LANCIA BKR5EZ

Champion RC10YCC

NGK BKR5EZ

LANCIA RC10YCC

1.8LANCIA BKR6EZ

Champion RC10YCC

NGK BKR6EZ

2.0 LANCIA RC8BYC

Champion RC8BYC

H7

H7

D2R

H6W

PY21W

PY5W

PY21W

H1

R10W

P21W

2.3W

H21W

P21W

P21W

C5W

W5W

C10W

C10W

C5W

C5W

C10W

W5W

55W

55W

35W

6W

21W

5W

21W

55W

10W

21W

2.3W

21W

21W

21W

5W

5W

10W

10W

5W

5W

10W

5W

BULBS TYPE POWER

Main beam headlights

Dipped beam headlights

Gas-discharge main beam and dipped beam headlights

Front sidelights

Front direction indicators

Side direction indicators

Rear direction indicators

Front fog lights

Taillights

Brake lights

Third brake light (saloon)

Third brake light (SW)

Reversing light

Rear fog light

Number plate light

Front ceiling light

Courtesy lights

Rear side

Glove compartment (where fitted)

Boot (saloon)

Boot (SW)

Doors

TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

Saloon Tyre Average load Full load Space-saverFront Rear Front Rear spare wheel

1.6 195/65 R15 91H 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2

1.8 195/65 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2

2.0 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2205/55 R16 91V (■) 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 4.2

1.9 jtd 195/65 R15 91H 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2

2.4 jtd 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2205/55 R16 91V (■) 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 4.2

Station Wagon1.6 195/65 R15 91H 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.21.8 195/65 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

2.0 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2205/55 R16 91V (■) 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 (2.8*) 4.2

1.9 jtd 195/65 R15 91H 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

2.4 jtd 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2205/55 R16 91V (■) 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 (2.8*) 4.2

(■) Optional (*) Maximum load in boot with seats folded + 1 person + 350 kg.0.3 bar should be added to the values given if the pressure is measured while the tyre is hot.

163

164

SAFE DRIVINGIn designing the Lybra, LANCIA has

made every effort to come up with acar able to provide driver and pas-sengers with top-class levels of safety.Nevertheless it is always the behav-iour of the person at the wheel thatdetermines road safety.

Below you will find some simple tipsto help you travel in safety under dif-ferent conditions. You will no doubtbe familiar with many of them al-ready but it will be useful to readthem all carefully.

BEFORE GETTING BEHIND THEWHEEL

– Make sure all lights, including theheadlights, are working properly.

– Adjust the position of the seats,steering wheel, driving and door mir-rors properly for the best driving po-sition.

– Carefully adjust head restraints sothe back of the head and not the napeof the neck is supported.

– Make sure that nothing (mats,etc.) gets in the way of the pedalswhen they are pushed down.

– Adjust the seat belts to match yourheight (see “Getting to know your car– Seat belts”).

– Make sure that any child restraintsystems (child seats, carriers etc.) areproperly fixed on the rear seat.

– Place any objects in the boot insuch a way that they cannot bethrown forwards in the event of an ac-cident.

– Avoid placing light coloured ob-jects or sheets of paper on the dash-board to prevent reflections on thewindscreen.

– Light eating will help keep yourreflexes prompt. Above all, do nothave anything alcoholic to drink. Cer-tain prescription drugs can impairyour driving skills: read the attachedliterature carefully.

– Periodically, remember to checkthe fluid levels as shown in the para-graph “Repeated checks and checksbefore long trips” in this chapter.

WHEN TRAVELLING

– The first rule of safe driving is pru-dence.

– Prudence also means putting your-self into a position where you can pre-dict wrong or imprudent behaviourfrom other drivers.

– Stick closely to the rules of theroad in the particular country wherethe vehicle is being driven and, aboveall, do not exceed speed limits.

– Ensure that, besides yourself, allthe other passengers in the car havetheir seat belts fastened, that childrenare sitting in the appropriate childseats and any animals in the car areplaced in suitable compartments.

165

– Make sure the headlight beams areproperly positioned: if they are toolow, they reduce visibility and strainyour eyes. If they are too high theycan dazzle other drivers.

– Only use main beam headlightswhen you are driving outside townand when you are sure they do notannoy other drivers.

– Dip your headlights as soon as yousee cars coming in the other directionand pass them with the headlightsdipped.

– Keep all lights clean.

– Beware of animals crossing theroad when driving in the country.

– You should be physically fit andmentally alert before setting out onlong journeys.

– Do not drive too many hours at atime but stop at intervals to stretchyour legs and recoup your energy.

– Make sure the air in the car is be-ing changed continuously.

– Never coast downhill (i.e. with theengine off): if you do, you lose the aidof engine braking and power brakesso that braking requires greater effort.

– Never coast downhill (i.e. with theengine off): if you do, you lose the aidof engine braking.

DRIVING AT NIGHT

There are the main rules to followwhen you are driving at night.

– Drive especially carefully: it isharder to drive at night.

– Slow down especially if the road isnot lit.

– At the first signs of sleepiness, stop:continuing would be a risk for your-self and everybody else. Only startdriving again when you have hadenough rest.

– Keep a greater safety distancefrom the cars in front of you thanduring daylight hours: it is hard tojudge how fast other cars are goingwhen all you can see are their lights.

Always fasten both frontand back seat belts, in-cluding child restraint sys-

tems. Travelling with the seat beltsunfastened increases the risk of in-jury or death if you are in a colli-sion.

Driving while drunk orunder the influence ofdrugs or certain medicines

is dangerous for both you andother road users.

166

DRIVING IN THE RAIN

Rain and wet road surfaces spelldanger.

All manoeuvres are more difficult ona wet road because the grip of thewheels on the tarmac is greatly re-duced. This is why braking distancesare much longer and road-holding islower.

Here is some advice for driving inthe rain:

– Reduce speed and maintain agreater safety distance from the carsin front.

– If it is raining particularly heavily,visibility is also reduced. In thesecases, switch on the dipped headlightseven if it is still daylight so you can beseen more easily.

– Do not drive through puddles atspeed and hold on tightly to the wheelif you do: a puddle taken at highspeed might cause you to lose controlof the car (“aquaplaning”).

– Move the ventilation controls tothe position for demisting the win-dows (see “Getting to know yourcar”) so to avoid visibility problems.

– Periodically check the condition ofthe windscreen wiper blades.

DRIVING IN FOG

– If the fog is thick, do not start outon a journey unless you absolutelyhave to.

– If driving in mist, blanket fog orwhen there is the danger of fogpatches:

– Keep your speed down.

– Turn on the dipped headlights,rear fog lights and front fog lights, iffitted, even during the day. Do notdrive with your headlights at mainbeam.

IMPORTANT On stretches of roadwith good visibility, switch off yourrear fog lights; the brightness of theselights could annoy the people travel-ling in the cars behind.

– Remember that fog also means thetarmac is wet and therefore manoeu-vres of all kinds are more difficult andstopping distances are longer.

– Keep a good distance from the carsin front of you.

– As far as possible, avoid spurts ofspeed or sudden deceleration.

– Do not overtake other vehicles ifyou can help it.

– If you are forced to stop your car(breakdown, limited visibility etc.) tryto stop off the road. Turn on the haz-ard lights and, if possible, the dippedbeam headlights. Rhythmically soundthe horn if you realise another car iscoming.

167

DRIVING IN THE MOUNTAINS

– When driving downhill use the en-gine braking effect by engaging a lowgear so as not to overheat the brakes.

– Under no circumstances shouldyou drive downhill with the engine offor with the gear in neutral, let alonewith the ignition key out.

– Drive at a moderate speed withoutcutting corners.

– Remember that overtaking whilegoing uphill is slower and thereforerequires more free road. If you are be-ing overtaken while driving uphill,make it easier for the other vehicle topass.

DRIVING ON SNOW AND ICE

Here are some tips for driving inthese conditions:

– Keep your speed down.

– Use chains if the roads are coveredin snow, see “Snow chains” in thischapter.

– Prevalently use the engine brakeand avoid sudden braking.

– When braking in a car not fittedwith ABS, reduce the possibility of thewheels locking by varying the pres-sure you exert on the brake pedal.

– Do not accelerate suddenly andavoid swerving.

– In the winter, even apparently dryroads may have icy patches. Be care-ful therefore when driving overstretches that do not get much expo-sure to the sun or are lined with treesor rocks where ice might not havemelted.

– Keep a good distance from the ve-hicles in front.

DRIVING WITH ABS

The ABS is a braking system that es-sentially offers two advantages:

1) It prevents wheel lock and conse-quent skidding in emergency stops,particularly when the road does notoffer much grip.

2) It makes it possible to brake andsteer at the same time so you canavoid unexpected obstacles and directthe car where you want while brak-ing.

To get the most out of ABS:

– During emergency stops or whengrip conditions are poor, you will feela slight pulsation on the brake pedal.This is the sign that the ABS is work-ing. Do not release the brake pedalbut continue to press so as not to in-terrupt the braking action.

– The ABS prevents the wheels fromlocking, but it does not increase ac-tual grip conditions between tyre androad. Therefore, even if your car is fit-ted with ABS, keep a safe distancefrom the car in front of you and keepyour speed down when driving intobends.

– ABS serves to increase your con-trol over the car, not to enable you togo faster.

168

Some suggestions which may helpyou to keep the running costs of thecar down and lower the amount oftoxic emissions released into the at-mosphere are given below.

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Car maintenance

The overall state of the car is an im-portant factor which has a marked in-fluence over fuel consumption anddriving comfort and on the life spanof your car. For this reason careshould be taken to maintain your carby carrying out the necessary checksand regulations in accordance withthe specifications given in the serviceschedule (see sections: spark plugs,idling, air cleaners, timing).

Tyres

Tyre pressure should be checked atleast once every four weeks: if thepressure is too low fuel consumptionincreases as the resistance to therolling movement of the tyre isgreater. In this state, tyre wear is in-creased and handling suffers whichwill effect safety.

Unnecessary loads

Do not travel with too much load inthe boot. The weight of the car and itstrim greatly effects consumption andstability.

Roof rack/ski rack

Remove the roof or ski racks fromthe car as soon as they are no longerneeded.

These accessories reduce the aero-dynamic penetration of the car andwill increase consumption. Whentransporting particularly large objects,use a trailer, where possible.

Electrical devices

Use electrical devices for the neces-sary time only. The heated rear win-dow, fog lights, windscreen wipers,heater fan require large amounts ofelectricity and increasing the requestfor power will also increase fuel con-sumption (up to +25% when drivingin towns).

Climate control system

The climate control system is an ad-ditional load which greatly effects theengine leading to higher consumption(up to +20% in average). When thetemperature outside allows, use theair vents where possible.

CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS AND POLLUTION

169

Spoilers

The use of optional extras which arenot certified for specific use on the carmay reduce the aerodynamic pene-tration of the car and increase con-sumption.

DRIVING STYLE

Starting

Do not warm the engine when thecar is stationary or at high or low revs:in this way the engine will warm upgradually increasing consumption andemissions. You should drive off slowlystraight away avoiding high revs sothat the engine will warm up morequickly.

Unnecessary actions

Avoid revving the engine whenstopped at traffic lights or beforeswitching off the engine and avoiddoubling the clutch as these actionshave no purpose of modern vehiclesand serve only to increase consump-tion and pollution.

Gear selections

As soon as the traffic and road con-ditions allow it, shift to a higher gear.Using a lower gear to liven up accel-eration greatly increases consumption.In the same way, improper use of thehigher gears will increase consump-tion, emissions and wear and tear onthe engine.

Top speeds

Fuel consumption increases consid-erably as speed increases. For exam-ple, when accelerating from 90 to 120km/h, fuel consumption increases upto approximately +30%. Your speedshould be kept as even as possible andsuperfluous braking and accelerationavoided as this increases both con-sumption and emissions. A “smooth”driving style should be adopted by at-tempting to anticipate manoeuvres toavoid imminent danger and to keep asafe distance from the vehicle in frontto avoid braking sharply.

Acceleration

Accelerating violently increasing therevs will greatly effect consumptionand emission: acceleration should begradual and not exceed the maximumtorque.

CONDITIONS OF USE

Cold starting

Frequent cold starting will not en-able the engine to reach optimal run-ning temperature. It follows, there-fore, that consumption will be higher(from +15 to +30% in towns) as willthe production of toxic emissions.

170

Traffic and road conditions

Heavy traffic and higher consump-tion are synonymous: for example,when driving slowly with frequent useof lower gears or in towns where thereare numerous traffic lights.

Winding roads, mountain roads andbumpy roads also have a negative ef-fect on consumption.

Enforced halts

During prolonged stops (trafficlights, level crossings, etc.) the engineshould be switched off.

CHEAP RUNNING THAT RESPECTSTHE ENVIRONMENT

LOOKING AFTER EMISSIONCONTROL DEVICES

The correct use of pollution controldevices not only ensures respect forthe environment but also has an effecton the car’s performance. Keepingthese devices in good condition istherefore a fundamental rule for dri-ving that is easy on your pocket andon the environment too.

The first step to take is to follow theService Schedule to the letter.

Only use unleaded petrol for petrolengines.

If you have trouble starting, do notkeep turning the ignition key for longperiods. Be especially careful to avoidbump starting the car by pushing,towing or rolling downhill: these areall manoeuvres that can damage thecatalytic exhaust. Use an auxiliarybattery for start-ups only.

Environmental protection has beenone of the guiding principles in theproduction of the Lybra. It is no acci-dent that its pollution control equip-ment is much more effective than thatrequired by current legislation.

Nonetheless, the environment can-not get by without a concerted effortfrom everyone.

By following a few simple rules youcan avoid harming the environmentand often cut down fuel consumptionat the same time.

On this subject, a few useful tipshave been given below to supplementthose marked by symbol # at variouspoints of the handbook. You are askedto read both the former and lattercarefully.

171

If the engine begins to “loose itssmoothness” when travelling, con-tinue your journey but reduce the de-mands you are making on the engineand have the car seen to at a LanciaDealership soon as you can.

When the instrument panel fuel re-serve warning light comes on, fill upas soon as possible. A low level of fuelcan cause an uneven supply of fuel tothe engine with the inevitable increasein the temperature of the exhaust gasand serious damage to the catalyticconverter.

Never run the engine with the sparkplugs disconnected even for testingpurposes.

Do not warm up the engine by let-ting it idle for a while before movingoff unless the outside temperature isvery low and, even in this case, onlydo so for less than thirty seconds.

When functioning nor-mally the catalytic con-verter reaches high tem-

peratures. For this reason do notpark the car over inflammablematerial (grass, dry leaves, pineneedles etc.): fire hazard.

Do not install other heat shields anddo not remove those already fitted tothe catalytic converter and exhaustpipe.

Do not allow anything to be sprayedonto the catalytic converter, lambdasensor and exhaust pipe.

Ignoring the above rulesmay lead to fire.

TOWING ATRAILER

IMPORTANT

The car must be fitted with a ho-mologated tow hitch and suitableelectrical system for towing a caravanor trailer.

Fit special rearview mirrors in ac-cordance with the highway code.

Remember that towing a trailermakes it harder for the car to climbthe maximum gradients specified.

Engage a low gear when drivingdownhill rather than constantly brak-ing.

The weight the trailer exerts on thecar’s tow hitch coupling reduces thecar’s loading capacity by the sameamount.

172

Snow chains cannot befitted to the compact sparewheel. So, if a front (drive)

wheel is punctured and chains areneeded, a rear wheel should be fit-ted to the front of the vehicle (in-flate the tyres to the specified pres-sure as soon as possible) and thespare wheel should be fitted to therear. This way, with two normaldrive wheels, snow chains can befitted to them to solve an emer-gency.

SNOW CHAINSThe use of snow chains is regulated

by the legislation in force in the coun-try the car is driven in.

Use only low profile chains withmaximum height off the tyre of9 mm.

The chains may only be applied tothe drive wheel tyres (front wheels).

Before purchasing or using snowchains, you should contact a LanciaDealership for advice.

Check the tautness of the chains af-ter driving some ten metres.

The ABS system will notcontrol the trailer brakingsystem. Great care should

therefore be taken when driving onslippery road surfaces.

Under no circumstancesmodify the car’s brakingsystem for trailer braking

control. The trailer’s braking sys-tem must be completely indepen-dent of the car’s hydraulic system.

In order to be sure you are not ex-ceeding the maximum towing weightyou have to take into account thetrailer’s fully laden weight, includingaccessories and personal luggage.

Do not exceed the speed limits fortowing a trailer in the country you aredriving in.

Keep you speeddown when snowchains are fitted.

Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid pot-holes, steps and pavements to pre-vent damaging the tyres, suspen-sion and steering.

173

– Make sure the handbrake is notengaged.

– Clean and protect the paintedparts using protective wax.

– Clean and protect the shiny metalparts using special compounds read-ily available.

– Sprinkle talcum powder on therubber windscreen and rear windowwiper blades and lift them off theglass.

– Slightly open the windows.

– Cover the car with a cloth or per-forated plastic sheet. Do not usesheets of non-perforated plastic asthey do not allow moisture on thebody to evaporate.

– Inflate the tyres to 0.5 bar abovethe normal specified pressure andcheck it at intervals.

– Do not drain the engine coolingsystem.

The following precautions should betaken if the car will not be used forseveral months:

– Park the car in covered, dry and ifpossible well-ventilated premises.

– Engage a gear.

– Make sure the handbrake is notengaged.

– Remove the cables from the bat-tery terminals (first remove the cableto the negative terminal), and checkthe battery charge. If the car is to bestored for long periods the batterycharge should be checked every three months and recharged if it fallsbelow 12.5 V.

IMPORTANT Where relevant,switch off the electronic car alarmwith the remote control and turn theemergency key to off (see “Electronicalarm” in the chapter “Getting toknow your car”).

REPEATEDCHECKS ANDCHECKS BEFORELONG TRIPS

Periodically, remember to check:

– tyre pressure and condition

– level of battery electrolyte

– engine oil level

– coolant level and condition of thesystem

– brake fluid level

– windscreen washer liquid level

– power steering fluid level.

STORING THE CAR

174

The use of cellular tele-phones, HAM radio sys-tems or other similar de-

vices inside the passenger com-partment (without an aerial) pro-duces radio-frequency electro-magnetic fields which, amplifiedby the resonance effects inside thepassenger compartment, maycause electrical systems equippingthe car to malfunction. This couldcompromise safety in addition toconstituting a potential hazard forthe passengers. In addition, trans-mission and reception of these de-vices may be affected by theshielding effect of the car’s body.

RADIO TRANSMITTERS ANDCELLULAR TELEPHONES

Cellular telephones and other radiotransceiver equipment (e.g. HAM ra-dio systems) must not be used insidethe car unless a separate aerial ismounted on the roof.

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER

175

IN AN EMERGENCY

People who find themselves in an emergencysituation need immediate and concrete help.

The following pages have been written to helpyou if the need arises.

As you will see, a host of little snags havebeen taken into account and, for each of them,the measures you yourself can take are sug-gested. If the problems are more serious, how-ever, you should have the car seen to at a Lan-cia Dealership.

With regard to this, we would like to remindyou that, in addition to the Owner Handbook,you have also been provided with the WarrantyBooklet where you will find details of all theservices LANCIA can provide should you findyourself in difficulty.

We nevertheless recommend you read thesepages. If in need you will be able to find theinformation you require much more quickly.

EMERGENCY START– UP ............................. 176JUMP STARTING............................................ 177BUMP STARTING ........................................... 178IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED ........................... 178IF A BULB BURNS OUT ................................. 185IF AN EXTERIOR BULB BURNS OUT ........... 188IF AN INTERIOR BULB BURNS OUT ............ 193IF A FUSE BLOWS ......................................... 196IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT ............................ 205JACKING THE CAR........................................ 205TOWING THE CAR ....................................... 206IF AN ACCIDENT OCCURS............................ 207

176

EMERGENCYSTART-UP

If the Lancia CODE system cannotdeactivate the engine immobilisingsystem, the warning lights ¢ andUstay on and the engine will not start.Follow the emergency start– up pro-cedure to start the engine.

Read the whole procedure care-fully before trying to carry it out.

If you make a mistake in the emer-gency procedure, you must turn theignition key back to STOP and repeatthe whole operation from the begin-ning (step 1).

1) Read the five digit electronic codeon the CODE card.

2) Turn the ignition key to MAR.

3) Press and hold down the acceler-ator pedal. The injection systemwarning light U will come on forabout eight seconds, and then go out.At this point release the acceleratorpedal and get ready to count theflashes of warning light U.

4) Count the number of flashes thatcorresponds to the first figure of thecode on the CODE card, then pressthe accelerator pedal and keep itdown until the U warning lightcomes on for four seconds and thengoes out; release the accelerator pedal.

5) The U warning light will startflashing again: after it has flashed thenumber of times that corresponds tothe second figure on the CODE card,press the accelerator pedal to the floorand keep it there.

6) Do the same for the remainingdigts on the CODE card.

7) Once the final figure has been en-tered, keep the accelerator pedalpressed. The U warning light willlight up for four seconds and then goout; release the accelerator pedal.

8) The U warning light will flashrapidly for about four seconds to in-dicate that the operation has beencompleted correctly.

9) Start the engine by turning the ig-nition key from MAR to AVV.

If, however, warning light Ustayson, turn the ignition key to STOP andrepeat the procedure from step 1).

IMPORTANT After an emergencystart, you should contact a LanciaDealership as you will have to repeatthe procedure described each timeyou want to start the engine.

177

If the battery is flat, you can use an-other battery to start the engine. Itscapacity must be the same or slightlygreater than the flat battery (see the“Technical Specifications” chapter).

Proceed as follows:

1) Connect positive terminals A (fig.1) and B of the two batteries with ajump lead.

2) With a second lead, connect thenegative terminal C of the auxiliarybattery to the earth braid D of the carto be started.

IMPORTANT Do not directly con-nect the two negative terminals:sparks could ignite the flammable gasfrom the battery. If the other batteryis fitted in a vehicle, prevent acciden-tal contact between the metal parts ofthe two vehicles.

3) Start the engine.

4) When the engine has beenstarted, remove the leads in the re-verse order (i.e. D and C, B and fi-nally A).

If the engine fails to start after a fewattempts, do not keep turning the keybut have the car seen to at a LanciaDealership.

Do not carry out this pro-cedure if you lack experi-ence; if it is not done cor-

rectly it can cause very intenseelectrical discharges and even bat-tery explosion. Do not put nakedflames or lighted cigarettes nearthe battery and do not causesparks: risk of explosion and fire.

Never use a batterycharger to jump start theengine: you could damage

the electronic system, with specialreference to the ignition and injec-tion control unit.

fig. 1P

4T01

09

JUMP STARTING

178

BUMP STARTING

Signal the presence of thestopped car according tothe laws in force (e.g. haz-

ard lights, reflecting triangle, etc.). Any passengers on board should

get out, especially if the car isheavily laden. Passengers shouldstay clear from oncoming trafficwhile the wheel is being changed.

If the wheel is being changed ona steep or badly surfaced road,place wedges or other suitable ma-terial under the wheels to stop thecar from moving.

Do not bump start bypushing, towing or coast-ing downhill. This way of

starting could cause a rush of fuelinto the catalytic converter anddamage it beyond repair.

Remember that if the en-gine is not running, thepower brakes will not

work. You therefore have to useconsiderably more effort on thebrake pedal.

The space-saver sparewheel (where fitted) is ve-hicle-specific. Never use

the wheel on other models. Neveruse other models of spare wheelson your car.

IF A TYRE ISPUNCTURED

Follow the instructions on this andthe following pages to use the jackand spare wheel (or space-saver sparewheel, where fitted) correctly.

The space-saver sparewheel is narrower than astandard wheel and must

only be used to reach a service sta-tion where to have the puncturedtyre repaired. Do not exceed 80km/h with the spare wheel fitted.An adhesive label is attached tothe space-saver spare wheel sum-marising the main precautions toobserve when the spare wheel isfitted and the respective limita-tions. The following information isprovided in four languages on theadhesive label:

CAUTION! FOR TEMPORARYUSE ONLY! 80 KM/H MAX!

REPLACE WITH A STANDARDWHEEL AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.

DO NOT COVER THIS LABEL. Never apply a wheel cap on the

space-saver spare wheel. The han-dling of your car will change whenthe spare wheel is fitted. Avoid ac-celerating or braking suddenly,steering abruptly or fast cornering.

179

The life span of a space-saver spare wheel (wherefitted) is approximately

3000 km, after which it will needto be replaced with another sparewheel of the same type. Never fit astandard tyre on the spare-saverspare wheel rim.

Have the wheel replaced and re-fitted as soon as possible. Neveruse two or more spare wheels atthe same time.

Do not lubricate the bolt threadsbefore fitting them back: theycould come loose.

The jack should only be used tochange a wheel on the car forwhich it was designed. It shouldnot be put to other uses or em-ployed to raise other models of car.Under no circumstances should itbe used when carrying out repairsunder the car.

An incorrectly positioned jackmay cause the car to fall.

Do not use the jack to liftloads exceeding that indi-cated on the label attached

to the jack itself. Do not fit snow chains on space-

saver spare wheels (where fitted).If a front wheel (drive wheel) ispunctured and you require snowchains to proceed, take a standardwheel from the rear axle and fitthe space-saver spare wheel in itsplace. Having fitted two standardwheels on the drive axle, you canuse snow chains, thus solving theemergency situation.

The wheel cap may fly off whenthe car is moving if it is not fas-tened correctly. Never tamper withthe inflation valve. Do not inserttools between the rim and the tyre.

Check the tyre and spare wheelpressure regularly. Tyre pressureis shown in the “Technical Speci-fications” chapter.

CHANGING A WHEEL

Please note:

– The jack weighs 2.05 kg.

– The jack requires no adjustments.

– The jack cannot be repaired. If itbreaks it must be replaced with a gen-uine spare part.

– No other tool, part from the han-dle, can be fitted to the jack.

The car may be equipped with aregular size spare wheel.

fig. 2

P4T

0110

180

Change the wheel as follows:

1) Stop the car so that it is not ahazard for other road users or your-self when changing the wheel. Theground should be as flat and firm aspossible.

2) Engage the handbrake.

3) Engage first gear or reverse.

4) Open the boot, lift the carpet andfasten it to the edge with the specificbelt A (fig. 2).

You can remove the carpet bypulling it out from the boot. Removethe shim (fig. 3).

5) Release the locking device B (fig. 4).Take the tool kit C and the spare wheel Dand go to the wheel to be changed.

6) For cars with steel rims: removethe clipped on wheel cap E (fig. 5) bygrasping it from the slots and pullingit outwards. Alternatively, use the flattip screwdriver provided as a lever onthe edge.

7) For cars with alloy rims: removethe clipped on wheel hub cap leveringin the specific housing with the flat tipscrewdriver provided. Then rock thecar to make it easier to remove therim from the wheel hub.

8) Loosen the bolts by about half aturn with the supplied wrench (fig. 6).

fig. 4

P4T

0111

fig. 3

P4T

0281

fig. 5P

4T01

12fig. 6

P4T

0113

181

9) Position the jack under the carnear the wheel to be replaced in thepoints shown on the panelling underthe door:

– position 1 (fig. 7) to change a frontwheel

– position 2 (fig. 8) to change a rearwheel

10) Turn the handle F on the jack(fig. 9) by hand so to open it partiallyand position the jack under the car.

11) Extend the jack until groove G(fig. 9) on the jack fits onto the bot-tom edge H of the underbody cor-rectly.

12) Warn anyone nearby that thecar is about to be lifted. They muststay clear and not touch the car untilit is back on the ground.

13) Work the jack with handle L(fig. 10) until the car is a few cen-timetres off the ground. Make surethat the handle turns freely and is farenough from the ground so that youdo not scrape your hands. Do nottouch moving parts of the jack(screws or joints) as they can causeinjuries. If you dirty your hands withgrease, clean them carefully.

14) Loosen the wheel bolts and re-move the wheel.

fig. 8

P4T

0115

fig. 7

P4T

0114

fig. 9P

4T01

16fig. 10

P4T

0117

182

IMPORTANT Use the hexagonal re-cess on the upper part of the screw-driver grip (provided) to facilitate thisoperation. Insert the screwdriver bla-de in the hole in the grip to handle(fig. 11).

15) Make sure the surfaces of thespare wheel that come into contactwith the hub are clean and free fromany impurities which could result inthe wheel bolts working loose.

16) Put the spare wheel on, makingsure that centring pins M (fig. 12) onthe hub coincide with the holes on thewheel.

17) Tighten the four fastening bolts.

IMPORTANT Use the hexagonal re-cess on the upper part of the screw-driver grip (provided) to facilitate thisoperation. Insert the screwdriverblade in the hole in the grip to handle(fig. 11).

18) Turn the handle to lower the carand remove the jack (fig. 13).

19) Tighten up the wheel bolts in acriss-cross fashion following the ordershown (fig. 14).

fig. 11

P4T

0119

fig. 13

P4T

0118

fig. 12P

4T06

48fig. 14

P4T

0649

183

20) Fit the cup on a regular sizewheel with the inflation valve N(fig. 15) at the corresponding positionand press on the edge of the cup start-ing from near the inflation valve. Pro-ceed to complete fitting.

21) Place the removed wheel, thejack and the tools in the boot and fas-ten appropriately.

22) Reposition the shim (fig. 3).

Fasten the strap to the carpet asshown (fig. 16) before refitting thecarpet on the floor.

IMPORTANT Do not fit the hubcap or the wheel cap to the space-saver wheel.

REFITTING THE STANDARDWHEEL

1) Follow the procedure describedabove. Raise the car and remove thespare wheel.

2) Make sure the parts of the wheelthat comes into contact with the hubare clean and that there is no gritwhich could cause the wheel bolts towork loose.

3) Fit the wheel by making the cen-tring pins on the hub A (fig. 17) fitinto the holes in the rim.

fig. 15

P4T

0122

fig. 17

P4T

0124

fig. 16P

4T02

80

184

4) For cars fitted with alloy rims:fasten the pin provided B (fig. 18)onto the hub, then fit the wheel andtighten the three bolts. Remove thepin B and fasten the last bolt.

5) Tighten the bolts using the hexa-gon on upper part of the providedscrewdriver and holding the tool withthe screwdriver blade inserted in thehole on the handle (fig. 19).

6) Lower the car and remove thejack.

7) Tighten up the wheel bolts in acriss-cross fashion following the ordershown (fig. 20).

8) Position the cap on the wheel rimwith the inflation valve C (fig. 21) co-inciding with the recess. Press allround the cap starting from the valveuntil it is fitted properly.

9) For cars fitted with alloy rims: ex-ert a light pressure to refit hub cap.

IMPORTANT Failure to fit the capproperly could result in it flying offwhen the car is moving.

fig. 18

P4T

0125

fig. 19P

4T01

19fig. 21

P4T

0123

fig. 20

P4T

0126

185

Halogen bulbs containpressurised gas which, ifbroken, may cause small

fragments of glass to be projectedoutwards.

Only touch the metal partwhen handling halogenbulbs. You will reduce the

light intensity and possibly com-promise bulb life by touching theglass bulb. If you touch the bulbaccidentally, rub it with a clothmoistened with alcohol and leaveit to dry.

When you have finished:

1) Put the spare wheel back in theboot.

2) Insert the partially open jack intothe container and force it slightly sothat it does not vibrate when the caris moving.

3) Put the tools back into the con-tainer.

4) Position the tool kit inside thespare wheel and fix everything withdevice B (fig. 4).

5) Reposition the shim (fig. 3).

IF A BULB BURNS OUT

You should, where possi-ble, have your bulbs chan-ged at a Lancia Dealer-

ship. The correct operation andslant of headlights is essential forsafe driving and compliance withlegal requirements.

Modifications or repairsto the electrical systemcarried out incorrectly and

without bearing the features of thesystem in mind can cause mal-functions with the risk of fire.

The bulbs of (Xeno) gas-discharge headlights mustbe replaced by a Lancia

Dealership.

186

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

– When a light is not working, checkthat it has not fused before changingthe bulb.

– For the location of the fuses, refer to“If a fuse blows” in this chapter.

– Before replacing a bulb that doesnot work, check that the contacts arenot oxidised.

– Burnt-out bulbs must be replacedwith ones of the same type and power.

– Always check the slant of the head-light beam after changing a bulb forsafety reasons.

IMPORTANT On the inside surfaceof the headlight there could appear aslight coat of fogging; this does notshow a defect, since it is a natural oc-currence due to low temperature andto the degree of humidity in the air; itwill soon disappear as soon as thelights are turned on. The presence ofdrops inside the headlight shows water seepage, refer to the LanciaDealership.

TYPES OF BULBS

Several types of bulbs are installed inthe car (fig. 22):

A Glass bulbs

Snapped into position. Pull toremove.

B Bayonet connection bulbs

Remove from the bulb holder bypressing the bulb and rotating itanti-clockwise.

C Cylindrical bulbs

Remove by pulling away fromterminals.

D - E Halogen bulbs

To remove the bulb, release theclip holding the bulb in place.

fig. 22

P4T

0718

187

BULB TYPE POWERMain beam headlights

Dipped beam headlights

Gas-discharge main beam and dipped beam headlights

Front sidelights

Front direction indicators

Side direction indicators

Rear direction indicators

Front fog lights

Taillights

Brake lights

Third brake light (saloon)

Third brake light (SW)

Reversing light

Rear fog light

Number plate light

Front ceiling light

Courtesy lights

Rear side

Glove compartment (where fitted)

Boot (saloon)

Boot (SW)

Doors

E

E

–

A

B

A

B

D

B

B

–

B

B

B

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

A

H7

H7

D2R

W5WB

PY21W

PY5W

PY21W

H1

R10W

P21W

2.3W

H21W

P21W

P21W

C5W

W5W

C10W

C10W

C5W

C5W

C10W

W5W

55W

55W

35W

5W

21W

5W

21W

55W

10W

21W

2.3W

21W

21W

21W

5W

5W

10W

10W

5W

5W

10W

5W

188

The bulbs of (Xeno) gas-discharge headlights mustbe replaced by a Lancia

Dealership.

DIPPED AND MAIN BEAMHEADLIGHTS, FRONT SIDELIGHTS

The dipped beam, main beam head-lights and the front side lights arehoused in the front headlight cluster.

Press the upper tab A (fig. 23) andremove the cover B. To refit the coverB, insert tab C first then press on theupper part of the cover to clip tab Ainto place.

The bulbs are arranged as follows(fig. 24):

1) Dipped beam headlight

2) Main beam headlight

3) Front side light

Dipped beam headlight (fig. 25)

To replace the halogen E, 12V- H7/60W bulb:

1) Remove the connector from thebulb.

2) Release the fastening clip A andremove the bulb.

3) Insert the new bulb. Make the tabB on the metal part of the bulb coin-cide with the specific groove on theheadlight dish.

4) Refit the fastening clip and refitthe connector.

fig. 24P

4T01

28fig. 23

P4T

0127

fig. 25

P4T

0736

IF AN EXTERIOR BULB BURNS OUT

IMPORTANT For the type of bulbto be used and the relevant power, seethe summary table at the previouschapter “If a bulb needs replacing”.

189

Main beam headlight (fig. 26)

To replace the bulb:

1) Remove the connector from thebulb.

2) Release the fastening clip A andremove the bulb.

3) Insert the new bulb. Make the tabB on the metal part of the bulb coin-cide with the specific groove on theheadlight dish.

4) Refit the fastening clip and refitthe connector.

Front side light (fig. 27)

To replace the bulb:

1) Remove the bulb holder A byholding the tab and turning it slightly.

2) Remove the bulb B by pressing itslightly and turning it anticlockwise.

3) Replace the bulb and refit theclipped in bulb holder.

FRONT DIRECTIONINDICATORS

To replace the bulb:

1) Turn the bulb holder A (fig. 28)anticlockwise and remove it.

2) Remove the bulb B by pressingit lightly and turning it anticlockwise.

3) After replacing the bulb, refit thebulb holder on the lens.

fig. 27P

4T01

31fig. 28

P4T

0650

fig. 26

P4T

0719

190

FRONT FOG LIGHTS (fig. 29-30-31)

To replace the bulb:

1) Remove cap A by turning it anti-clockwise without disconnecting theconnector.

2) Remove connector B from thebulb.

3) Release clip C and remove thebulb.

4) Insert the new bulb making pinsD on the metal part coincide with thespecific recesses on the dish.

5) Fasten clip C and insert the con-nector B in the bulb.

6) Refit the cover A by turning itclockwise.

SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORS(fig. 32)

To replace the bulb:

1) Press the lens in direction 1, presstab A and remove the cluster from thefront 2.

2) Turn the arrow anticlockwise andremove bulb holder B.

3) Remove bulb C and replace it.

4) Refit the arrow in the bulb holderand refit the cluster by fastening therear part in recess D first.

fig. 29

P4T

0134

fig. 30

P4T

0135

fig. 31P

4T01

36fig. 32

P4T

0133

191

REAR LIGHT CLUSTER

Taillights, direction indicators,brake lights, reversing light andrear fog light (fig. 33-34-35)

To replace a bulb:

1) From inside the boot, turn knobA and lift cover B.

2) Loosen the screw C and removethe bulb holder D.

3) Remove the bulbs, pushing themslightly and turning them anticlock-wise.

E - Taillight bulb.

F - Brake light bulb.

G - Direction indicator bulb (or-ange).

H - Reversing light (right-hand clus-ter only).

Rear fog light (left-hand clusteronly).

4) After replacing the bulbs, refit thebulb holder D and fasten with screw C.

5) Lower the cover B and fasten byturning knob A.

fig. 33

P4T

0138

fig. 34P

4T01

39fig. 35

P4T

0140

192

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS (fig. 36)

To replace the bulb:

1) Loosen the screws A and removethe lens B.

2) Remove the bulb C by releasingthe side contacts and replace it.

3) Refit the lens B and fasten withscrews A.

ADDITIONAL BRAKE LIGHT(THIRD BRAKE LIGHT) (fig. 37-38-39)

To replace a bulb:

1) Grasp the light cluster A by theside recesses B and remove it bypulling it forwards.

2) Remove the connector C from thehousing on the rear window shelf.

3) Disconnect the connector byholding the retainer pressed.

4) Remove the additional brake lightcluster D from cover E by releasingthe side retainers F.

5) Insert a new additional brakelight cluster in cover E so that it clipsin the side retainers F.

6) Connect the electrical connectorC and insert it in its housing on therear window shelf.

7) Reposition the light cluster by in-serting tabs G in the housings H onthe rear window shelf. Push it back-wards to fit it back in place.

fig. 36

P4T

0141

fig. 37P

4T02

76

fig. 38

P4T

0277

fig. 39

P4T

0278

193

FRONT CEILING LIGHT

To replace a bulb:

1) Remove the ceiling light using ascrewdriver as a lever in point A (fig.40) and remove cover B.

2) Loosen the screws C (fig. 41).

3) Remove the ceiling light by push-ing it forwards and releasing it fromclip D (fig. 42).

4) Lift cover E (clipped on).

5) Release the bulbs F (fig. 43) fromthe contact and replace.

6) Close the cover E by fastening itin the recess.

7) Refit the ceiling light by fasteningclip D first and then press on the frontpart to engage the tabs G (fig. 42).

IMPORTANT When refitting theceiling light check that the electricalwires are positioned correctly.

8) Fasten screws C.

9) Refit cover B by fitting the frontpart first and then press on the backuntil it clips back.

fig. 40

P4T

0144

fig. 41P

4T01

45fig. 43

P4T

0147

fig. 42

P4T

0146

IF AN INTERIOR BULB BURNS OUT

194

GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT(where fitted) (fig. 46)

To replace a bulb:

1) Remove the lens by using ascrewdriver as a lever on clip A.

2) Remove bulb B by releasing itfrom the side contacts and replace it.

3) Refit the lens by inserting side Cfirst and pressing the other side to en-gage clip A.

REAR CEILING LIGHT (fig. 44)

To replace a bulb:

1) Remove the ceiling light using ascrewdriver as a lever in point A.

2) Remove bulb B by releasing itfrom the side contacts and replace it.

3) Refit the ceiling light by insertingside C first and pressing the other sideto engage clip D.

COURTESY LIGHT (fig. 45)

To replace a bulb:

1) Remove the ceiling light using ascrewdriver as a lever in point A.

2) Remove bulb B by releasing itfrom the side contacts and replace it.

3) Refit the ceiling light by insertingside C first and pressing the other sideto engage clip D.

fig. 44

P4T

0721

fig. 45P

4T01

49fig. 46

P4T

0150

195

BOOT LIGHT (fig. 47)

To replace a bulb:

1) Remove the lens by using ascrewdriver as a lever on clip A.

2) Remove bulb B by releasing itfrom the side contacts and replace it.

3) Refit the lens by inserting side Cfirst and pressing the other side to en-gage clip A.

DOOR LIGHTS (fig. 48-49)

To replace an bulb:

1) Remove the lens by using ascrewdriver as a lever on clip A.

2) Press the two sides of shield B atthe fastening clips and turn it.

3) Replace the clipped in bulb C.

4) Close shield B by clipping it intoits housing.

5) Refit the lens by inserting side Dfirst and pressing the other side to en-gage clip A.

fig. 49

P4T

0153

fig. 47

P4T

0151

fig. 48P

4T01

52

196

If a general fuse (MIDI orMAXI FUSE) blows, do notcarry out any repairs. Take

the car to a Lancia Dealership.

The devices protected by the generalfuses are listed in the tables on the fol-lowing pages.

GENERAL FUSES (MIDI AND MAXI FUSES)

The car is fitted with a set of generalfuses (MIDI and MAXI FUSES)which separately protect the variouselectrical system functions in addi-tional to the individual device fuses.

The general fuses are located in theengine compartment in a fusebox di-rectly connected to the positive bat-tery terminal (see “Fuses in the enginecompartment”).

If the fuse blows again, have the carinspected at a Lancia Dealership.

To locate the fuse, refer to the tableon the following pages.

GENERAL (fig. 50)

If an electrical device is not working,check whether the respective fuse isblown. The conductor should not bebroken. If it is, replace it with anotherwith the same amperage (same colour).

A - Undamaged fuse

B - Fuse with broken filament.

Use the tongs C to extract a fuse tobe replaced.

Never change a fuse withhigher amperage: FIRERISK.

Before changing a fuse,check the ignition key hasbeen removed and that all

the other electrical devices havebeen switch off.

fig. 50

P4T

0299

IF A FUSE BLOWS

197

fig. 53fig. 51

P4T

0154

fig. 52P

4T02

97

FUSES AND RELAYS IN THE FUSEBOX

The fuses protecting the main de-vices are arranged in a fusebox lo-cated under the dashboard on theright of the steering column.

Open flap A (fig. 51) to access thefuses.

In some versions, symbols indicatingthe main functions of the fuses in thefusebox and on the auxiliary fusebracket may be shown on the insideof flap A.

The fusebox also contains tongs B(fig. 52) for removing the fuses.

Spare fuses C (fig. 52) are housed(where fitted) in vertical position onthe right side of the fusebox. Thespare fuses present various amper-ages.

Remember to replace the spare fusesafter replacing a fuse.

The devices protected by the fuses inthe fusebox are listed in the tables onthe following pages.

You will need to remove the fuseboxto reach the relays (fig. 52). Have thisdone by a Lancia Dealership.

D - Horn relay

E - Heated rear window relay

F - Ignition cut-off powered devices.

IMPORTANT Fuse 13 fig. 52 andthe specific fuse (e.g. fuse 4 fig. 52 forthe right-hand dipped beam head-light) must both be intact for the op-eration of certain electrical utilities(dipped beam headlights andside/taillights). Check the conditionsof fuse 13 fig. 52 along with fuses 4,6, 7 and 8 if these utilities do notwork.

P4T

0722

198

fig. 54 fig. 55P

4T01

57

P4T

0156

fig. 56

P4T

0296

FUSES AND RELAYS ON THEAUXILIARY BRACKET (fig. 53)

The auxiliary bracket is located overthe fusebox. Open flap A (fig. 51) toreach it.

G - Fog lights relay (20A)

H - Dipped beam headlights relay(20A)

I - Heated seats device and controlrelay (50A).

FUSES AND RELAYS IN THEENGINE COMPARTMENT

On the bracket in frontof the battery (fig. 54)

To reach the fuses and the relays, re-move the clipped-on cover A.

B - Engine cooling fan 1st speed re-lay

C - Engine cooling fan 2nd speed re-lay (excluding 1.6 version with heaterand 1.8 version with heater).

In the fusebox over the battery(fig. 55-56)

To reach the fuses, open cover A,move clips B forwards and open theclipped-on cover C.

Tong D for removing the fuses canbe found in the fusebox.

Should fuses 1, 6 and 8(fig. 53) be replaced, theanti-crushing safety system

of the electric windows must bereinitialised. See “Electric win-dows” at chapter “Getting to knowyour car”.

199

fig. 57

P4T

0159

fig. 58P

4T01

60fig. 59

P4T

0161

Behind the battery (fig. 57)

To reach the fuses, remove the cov-ers A by releasing the fastening clips.

B - Main injection relay (30A)

C - Fuel pump relay (1.8 – 2.0 ver-sions: 20A), (1.9 jtd - 2.4 jtd versions:30A)

In the service area (fig. 58-59)

To reach the fuses and relays, re-move cover A (clipped on) by releas-ing the tabs B.

To refit the cover, insert the tabs inrecesses B first and then press thelower edge to clip it on.

– Climate control compressor relay(20A)

– Headlight washer timer relay

– Direction indicator double contactand centralised door locking systemrelay (versions without electronicalarm)

– Diesel fuel heater relay (1.9 jtd -2.4 jtd versions) (20A)

200

EXTERIOR LIGHTS FUSE AMPERE LOCATION

Right-hand main beam headlight 1 10 fig. 52Left-hand main beam headlight 2 10 fig. 52Right-hand dipped beam headlight 4 15 fig. 52Left-hand dipped beam headlight 8 15 fig. 52Right-hand and left-hand dipped beam headlight (relay enable) 15 10 fig. 53Front right side lights (on dashboard) 6 10 fig. 52Front left side lights (on dashboard) 7 10 fig. 52Rear right taillights (on dashboard) 7 10 fig. 52Left right taillights (on dashboard) 6 10 fig. 52Reversing light 1 10 fig. 53Reversing light (control) 1 10 fig. 53Rear foglight 6 10 fig. 52Right-hand brake light 6 10 fig. 52Left-hand brake light 6 10 fig. 52Third brake light 13 10 fig. 52Hazard lights 14 10 fig. 52Foglight 9 15 fig. 53Number plate light 7 10 fig. 52Direction indicators 13 10 fig. 52Foglights relay control (on dashboard) 7 10 fig. 52

INTERIOR LIGHTS FUSE AMPERE LOCATION

Glove compartment light (where fitted) 12 10 fig. 52Sun visor lights 1 10 fig. 53Passenger compartment front and rear ceiling lights 12 10 fig. 52Door lights 12 10 fig. 52

201

INTERIOR LIGHTS FUSE AMPERE LOCATION

Door controls lighting (electric windows control unit) 1 10 fig. 53Control lights on central dashboard unit 1 10 fig. 53Icon lights on switches 1 10 fig. 53Door handles lighting (electric windows control unit) 1 10 fig. 53Dashboard and climate control system lights 6 10 fig. 52Main beam headlights warning light 2 10 fig. 52

DEVICES AND UTILITIES FUSE AMPERE LOCATION

ABS (+ key) 2 10 fig. 53ABS (control unit) – (+ key) 13 10 fig. 52Cigar lighter 9 20 fig. 52Cigar lighter (enable relay) 10 7.5 fig. 53Air bag 3 10 fig. 53Diagnostic socket power 12 10 fig. 52Electronic injection utilities power (1.8 - 1.9 jtd - 2.4 jtd versions) 2 7.5 fig. 57Electronic injection utilities power 1 15 fig. 57Electronic injection utilities power (2.0 versions) 2 15 fig. 57Electronic alarm (+ key) 1 10 fig. 53Electronic alarm (control unit and remote control receiver) 12 10 fig. 52Front electric window winders 6 25 fig. 53Rear electric window winders 8 25 fig. 53Rear electrical window winders (control unit) 1 10 fig. 53Sound system 3 20 fig. 52

1 10 fig. 53

202

DEVICES AND UTILITIES FUSE AMPERE LOCATION

Boot (tailgate opening) 7 20 fig. 53Front electric window winders/centralised door locking system control unit 1 10 fig. 53 Injection electronic control unit. 4 7.5 fig. 53Centralised door locking system 3 20 fig. 52Horn 11 20 fig. 52Climate control system (control unit) 10 7.5 fig. 53Climate control system (lighting) 6 10 fig. 52Climate control compressor 5 20 fig. 52Headlight slant corrector (enable) 8 10 fig. 52Headlight automatic slant corrector (control unit) 1 10 fig. 53Cruise control 13 10 fig. 52Engine cooling fans (relay enable) 4 7.5 fig. 53BOSE HI-FI system 11 25 fig. 53Clutch switch (1.9jtd - 2.4jtd versions) 1 10 fig. 53Windscreen washer 10 20 fig. 52Headlight washer 5 20 fig. 52Headlight washer (enable) 8 10 fig. 52Headlight washer (relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53Rear window washer (relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53Heated rear window (relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53Heated rear window (defrosting) 15 30 fig. 52MAXI FUSE: glow plug preheating power (1.9jtd - 2.4jtd versions) 8 70 fig. 56MAXI FUSE: ignition switch (ignition switch powered devices) 2 30 fig. 56MAXI FUSE: engine cooling fan power (1.6 version with climate control system - 1.9jtd - 2.4jtd versions) 6 60 fig. 56

203

DEVICES AND UTILITIES FUSE AMPERE LOCATION

MAXI FUSE: engine cooling fan power (1.6 with climate control system - 1.8 with heater versions) 7 30 fig. 56

MAXI FUSE: engine cooling fan power (1.8 with climate control system versions) 6 50 fig. 56

MAXI FUSE: engine cooling fan power (2.0 versions) 6 60 fig. 56

MAXI FUSE: engine cooling fan power (1.9 with climate control system - 2.4jtd versions) 7 40 fig. 56

MAXI FUSE: engine electronic injection fuses and relays 5 30 fig. 56

MAXI FUSE: fuse no. 5-6-7-9-10-11-12-14-15 power (in fusebox) (fig. 52) 1 80 fig. 56

MAXI FUSE: fuse no. 3-4-8 power (in fusebox) (fig. 52 ) andfuse no. 6-7-8-9-11-12-13-14 (on auxiliary fuse bracket) (fig. 53) 3 70 fig. 56

MAXI FUSE: climate control system power 4 40 fig. 56

MIDI FUSE: additional heater power (1.9jtd - 2.4jtd versions) 10 70 fig. 56

MIDI FUSE: ABS system power 9 60 fig. 56

Navigator (display) 1 10 fig. 53

Current socket in passenger compartment 5 15 fig. 53

Instrument light dimmer 1 10 fig. 53

Centralised door locking system/alarm remote control receiver 1 10 fig. 53

Diesel fuel heater (1.9jtd - 2.4jtd versions) – 20 fig. 59

Electric driver's seat with memory 12 25 fig. 53

Electrical passenger's seat 13 30 fig. 53

Front seats (heating) 14 20 fig. 53

204

DEVICES AND UTILITIES FUSE AMPERE LOCATION

Electrical seats (memory/rearview mirror control unit 10 7.5 fig. 53Electrical seats (movement/heating movement relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53Climate control system pollution sensor 10 7.5 fig. 53Windscreen wiper rain sensor 1 10 fig. 53Windscreen wiper rain sensor (control unit relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53LANCIA ICS (display) 14 10 fig. 52Lancia CODE system 4 7.5 fig. 53

– 7.5 fig. 59Automatically adjustable internal rearview mirror 1 10 fig. 53External rearview mirrors (defroster relay enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53External rearview mirrors (movement) 1 10 fig. 53External rearview mirrors (defrosting) 15 30 fig. 52Instruments 13 10 fig. 52Cellular phone set-up 3 20 fig. 52

1 10 fig. 53Windscreen wiper/washer and headlight washer 10 20 fig. 52Rear window washer/wiper (SW) 10 20 fig. 52Rear window washer/wiper (SW) (relay enable). 10 7.5 fig. 53Sunroof 7 20 fig. 53Sunroof (enable) 10 7.5 fig. 53

205

The liquid in the batteryis poisonous and corrosive.Do not let it touch the skin

or eyes. Recharging the batteryshould be done in a well– venti-lated area away from nakedflames or possible sources ofsparks: explosion and fire risk.

IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT

RECHARGING THE BATTERY

You are advised to recharge the bat-tery slowly for a period of approxi-mately 24 hours at a low amperage.Charging for too long could damagethe battery.

Proceed as follows:

1) Disconnect the electrical systemfrom the battery terminals.

IMPORTANT Where relevant,switch the electronic car alarm offwith the remote control and deactivate

JUMP STARTING

See “Jump starting” in this chapter.

Under no circumstancesshould a battery chargerbe used to start the engine:

it could damage the electronic sys-tems and in particular the ignitionand injection control units.

the system by turning the emergencykey to “OFF” (see “Electronic alarm”in “Getting to know your car”).

2) Connect the charger cables to thebattery terminals.

3) Turn on the charger.

4) When you have finished, turn thecharger off before disconnecting thebattery.

5) Reconnect the cables to the bat-tery terminals. Make sure the polarityis correct.

The jack should only beused to change a wheel onthe car for which it was

designed. It should not be put toother uses or employed to raiseother models. Under no circum-stances should it be used whencarrying out repairs under the car.An incorrectly positioned jack maycause the car to fall. Do not use thejack to lift loads exceeding that in-dicated on the label attached to thejack itself.

Please note:

– The jack requires no adjustments;

– The jack cannot be repaired. If itbreaks it must be replaced with a newjack;

JACKINGTHE CAR

WITH THE JACK

See “If a tyre is punctured” in thischapter.

IMPORTANT If the battery is flat,the anti-crushing safety device of theelectric windows could be reini-tialised. See “Electric windows” atchapter “Getting to know your car”.

206

– No other tool, part from the han-dle shown in this chapter, can be fit-ted to the jack.

WITH A SHOP JACK OR ANARM HOIST

The car can only be jacked up bypositioning the jack arm under thefront A riser (fig. 60) or the rear riserB (fig. 61) and placing a suitablysized piece of wood in between.

fig. 60

P4T

0162

Be very careful not tosqueeze the brake pipes,the fuel pipes or the side-

member ribbing.

fig. 61P

4T01

63

IMPORTANT Respect the localrules for towing the car.

The car is provided with a front (fig. 62)and rear (fig. 63) attachments for fas-tening the tow ring.

To fit the tow ring, remove thebumper cover by using a screwdriveras a lever in point A.

fig. 62

P4T

0164

fig. 63

P4T

0165

Carefully clean thethreading before fasteningthe tow ring B. Make sure

that the tow hitch is fully fastened(by at least eleven thread turns).

TOWING THE CAR

207

When towing the car, youmust comply with the spe-cific traffic regulations re-

garding the tow ring and how totow on the road. Before starting totow, turn the ignition key to MARand then to STOP. Do not removethe key. If the key is removed, thesteering lock engages automati-cally which prevents the wheelsbeing turned. While the car is be-ing towed with the engine off, re-member that the brake pedal andsteering will require more effort asyou no longer have the benefit ofthe power brakes and power steer-ing. Do not use flexible cables totow. Avoid jerking. Whilst towing,ensure that the coupling to the cardoes not damage the surroundingcomponents.

Do not tow the car withthe engine running.

IF AN ACCIDENTOCCURS

– It is important to keep calm.

– If you are not directly involved inthe accident, stop at least ten metresaway from the accident.

– If you are on a motorway, do notobstruct the emergency lane with yourcar.

– Turn off the engine and turn onthe hazard lights.

– At night, illuminate the scene ofthe accident with your headlights.

– Act carefully, you must not riskbeing run over.

– Mark the accident by putting thered triangle at the regulatory distancefrom the car where it can be clearlyseen.

– Call for rescue making the infor-mation you give as accurate as youcan. On the motorway use the specialcolumn– mounted emergency phones.

– Remove the ignition keys from thevehicles involved.

– If you can smell petrol or otherchemicals, do not smoke and makesure all cigarettes are extinguished.

– Use a fire extinguisher, blanket,sand or earth to put out fires no mat-ter how small they are. Never use wa-ter.

– In pile– ups on the motorway, par-ticularly when the visibility is bad,there is a high risk of other vehiclesrunning into those already stopped.Get out of the car immediately andtake refuge behind the guard rail.

– If the doors are blocked, do not at-tempt to smash the windscreen to getout of the car. It is made of layeredglass and is very hard. Side and rearwindows are much more easily bro-ken.

208

IF ANYONE IS INJURED

– Never leave the injured personalone. The obligation to provide as-sistance exists even for those not di-rectly involved in the accident.

– Do not congregate around the in-jured person.

– Reassure the injured person thathelp is on its way and will arrive soon.Stay close by to calm him/her downin case of panic.

– Unfasten or cut seat belts holdinginjured parties.

– Do not give an injured person any-thing to drink.

– Do not move an injured person un-less the following situations arise.

– Pull the injured person from thecar only if it risks catching fire, it issinking in water or is likely to fall overa cliff or similar. Do not pull his/herarms or legs, do not bend the headand, as far as possible, keep the bodyhorizontal.

FIRST-AID KIT

It is a good idea to keep a fire extin-guisher and blanket in the car in ad-dition to the first-aid kit.

209

CAR MAINTENANCE

Lancia Lybra is brand new throughout, evenin its servicing schedule. Its first service sched-ule coupon is to be used only at 20,000 km.You should still, however, check the level of thevarious liquids and tyre pressure regularly.

You should nonetheless bear in mind that theproper maintenance of your car is certainly thebest way to keep it in tip-top condition foryears to come and safeguard its performanceand safety features, while respecting the envi-ronment and keeping running costs down.

Also remember that the following servicingregulations marked with the symbol areessential to ensure the warranty remains valid.

SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................... 210SERVICE SCHEDULE ........................................... 211ANNUAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE .................... 213ADDITIONAL CHECKS ......................................... 213CHECKING FLUID LEVELS................................. 215AIR CLEANER ....................................................... 221POLLEN FILTER .................................................. 222DIESEL FILTER .................................................... 222BATTERY .............................................................. 222ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS.......................... 225SPARK PLUGS....................................................... 226WHEELS AND TYRES .......................................... 227RUBBER TUBING .................................................. 228WINDSCREEN WIPERS ........................................ 228HEADLIGHT WASHERS ....................................... 230CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................. 230BODYWORK .......................................................... 231INTERIORS............................................................ 233

210

Correct maintenance of the car is es-sential for ensuring it stays in tip-topcondition for a long time to come.

This is why LANCIA has pro-grammed a number of service opera-tions every 20,000 kilometres.

IMPORTANT The Manufacturerrequires the Service Schedule coupon-related checks to be carried out. Fail-ure to do so could result in the war-ranty being cancelled for those defectsthat can be attributed to such failure.

Scheduled Servicing is performed atall Lancia Dealership and there is aset time scale for such operations.

If it is seen that further replacementsor repairs are necessary in addition tothe work being carried out, these willonly be done after the customer hasgiven his/her consent.

IMPORTANT You are recom-mended to get in touch with a Lan-cia Dealership immediately if anyminor running problems crop upwithout waiting for the next coupon.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

211

SERVICE SCHEDULE

Check tyre conditions and wear; adjust pressure, if required

Check light operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights, boot, passenger compartment, oddment compartments,instrument panel warning lights, etc.)

Check windscreen and rear window wiper operation and adjust nozzles

Check position and wear of windscreen/rear window blades

Check front disc brake pad wear warning light operation

Check rear drum brake shoe wear

Inspect conditions of: outside bodywork, underbody protection, piping/hosing (exhaust - fuel lines - brake lines), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.)

Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication

Check conditions of accessory drive belts and/or poly-V belts

Check handbrake lever stroke

Check/adjust tappet clearance (jtd versions)

Check diesel engine smokiness in exhaust (jtd versions)

Replace fuel filter (jtd versions)

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180thousands of kilometres

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

212

Check fuel evaporation system operation

Replace air cleaner cartridge (petrol versions)

Replace air cleaner cartridge (jtd versions)

Check and top up fluids (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc.)

Inspect conditions of timing belt

Replace timing belt (*)

Replace accessory drive poly-V belt

Replace spark plugs (petrol versions)

Check engine control systems via diagnostic socket (through diagnosis socket)

Check gearbox oil level

Change engine oil

Replace engine oil filter

Change brake fluid (or every 2 years)

Replace dust/pollen filter (or every year)

(*) Or every three years, in the event of demanding use (cold climate, use in cities, long idling, dusty areas)Or every five years, regardless of the distance travelled.

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180thousands of kilometres

ç ç

ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç

ç

ç

ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç

ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç

213

The following annual inspectionschedule is recommended for carstravelling less than 20,000 km ayear (e.g. approximately 10,000km). The schedule includes thefollowing operations:

– Check tyre condition and wear andadjust pressure, if required (includingspare wheel).

– Check operation of lights (head-lights, direction indicators, hazardlights, boot light, passenger compart-ment ceiling light, glove compartmentlight, instrument panel lights, etc.).

– Check windscreen wiper/washerand adjust nozzles.

– Check position wear of wind-screen/rear window wiper blades.

– Check front brake pad conditionsand wear.

– Check for bonnet and boot lockcleanness, lever cleanness and lubri-cation

– Inspect conditions of. engine, gear-box, transmission, piping (exhaust -fuel feed - brakes), rubber parts(boots - sleeves - bushings - etc.),brake and fuel line hoses.

– Check battery charge status.

– Check conditions of various con-trol belts.

– Check and top up fluid levels (en-gine coolant, brakes, windscreenwasher, battery, etc.).

– Change engine oil.

– Replace engine oil filter.

– Replace pollen filter.

ADDITIONALCHECKS

Every 1,000 km or before long trips,check and top up as necessary:

– engine coolant level– brake/hydraulic clutch fluid level– power steering fluid level– windscreen/rear window washer

liquid level– tyre pressure and conditions. You are recommended to use the

products designed and producedspecifically for LANCIA cars (see“Capacities” in “Technical specifica-tions”).

Every 3,000 km check the engineoil level and top up as necessary.

ANNUAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE

214

Maintenance of your carshould be entrusted to aLancia Dealership. For or-

dinary routine maintenance oper-ations which you are able to carryout yourself, ensure that you havethe necessary tools and originalLancia spare parts and fluidsavailable. Do not carry out servic-ing operations if you have no ex-perience.

IMPORTANT - Air cleaner

Replace the air cleaner more fre-quently if the car is used on dustyroads.

If you are in doubt about how oftenthe engine oil or the air cleaner shouldbe changed in relation to how you usethe car, contact a Lancia Dealer-ship.

IMPORTANT - Diesel filter

The different grades of purity indiesel fuel normally available mightmake it necessary to replace the filtermore frequently that indicated in theService Schedule. If the engine mis-fires it shows the filter needs chang-ing.

IMPORTANT - Pollen/dust filter

If the car is often used in dusty orextremely polluted environments, youshould change the filter element morefrequently. It should be changed es-pecially if the amount of air intro-duced into the passenger compart-ment is introduced.

IMPORTANT - Engine oil

Change the engine oil more fre-quently than shown in the ServiceSchedule is the car is normally drivenin one of the following particularly se-vere conditions:

– towing a trailer

– on dirty roads

– for short, repeated trips (less than7-8 km) with outside temperature be-low zero

– with engine frequently idling or forlong distances at low speed (e.g. taxi,door-to-door deliveries, prolongedstorage).

IMPORTANT - Battery

The charge in your battery should bechecked, where possible at the start ofthe winter, to limit the risk of the bat-tery electrolyte freezing.

This check should be carried outmore frequently if the car is mainlyused for short trips or if it is fittedwith accessories that permanentlytake in electricity even when the igni-tion key is removed, especially in thecase of after market accessories.

If the car is used in very hot climatesor particularly demanding conditionscheck the battery electrolyte more fre-quently than shown in the “ServiceSchedule” in the “Car maintenance”chapter.

215

CHECKING FLUIDLEVELS

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery - 3. Brakefluid - 4. Windscreen washer fluid -5. Engine coolant - 6. Power steeringfluid.

fig. 1 - 1.6 version

P4T

0651

fig. 2 - 1.8 version

P4T

0652

Be careful not to mix upthe various types of fluidswhen you are topping up:

they are all mutually incompatibleand could damage the car.

Do not smoke whileworking in the enginecompartment: the presence

of flammable gas and vapourcould cause a fire.

216

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery - 3. Brakefluid - 4. Windscreen washer fluid -5. Engine coolant - 6. Power steeringfluid.

fig. 3 - 2.0 version

P4T

0653

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery - 3. Brakefluid - 4. Windscreen washer fluid -5. Engine coolant - 6. Power steeringfluid.

fig. 4 - 1.9 jtd version

P4T

0654

217

1. Engine oil - 2. Battery - 3. Brakefluid - 4. Windscreen washer fluid -5. Engine coolant - 6. Power steeringfluid.

fig. 5 - 2.4 jtd version

P4T

0655

218

Be very careful under thebonnet: you risk burningyourself. Remember that

when the engine is hot, the fan canstart up and cause injuries.

ENGINE OIL (fig. 6-7-8-9-10)

Check engine oil with the car onlevel ground and while the engine isstill warm (approximately five min-utes after stopping the engine).

The oil level should be included be-tween the MIN and MAX referencelines on the dipstick.

If the oil level is near or even belowthe MIN line, pour in oil through thefiller hole until it reaches the MAXline.

The oil level must never exceed theMAX line.

fig. 6 - 1.6 version

P4T

0656

fig. 7 - 1.8 version

P4T

0657

fig. 8 - 2.0 versionP

4T06

58

fig. 9 - 1.9 jtd version

P4T

0659

fig. 10 - 2.4 jtd version

P4T

0660

In 1.6 version, lift the upper part ofthe cap and remove it.

During the beginning of the car’s lifethe engine is be tuned in. Engine oilconsumption can only be consideredstabilised after the first 5,000 - 6,000km.

219

Used engine oil and re-placed oil filters containsubstances which can harm

the environment. We recommendyou have the car seen to at a Lan-cia Dealership for the oil and filterchange. It is suitably equipped fordisposing of used oil and filters inan environmentally-friendly waythat complies with the law.

Do not add oil with dif-ferent specifications fromthe oil already in the en-

gine. Only the use of semi-syn-thetic oil (see “Lubricant and fluidspecifications” in the “Technicalspecification” chapter) can ensurethe distances prescribed in theService Schedule.

The engine cooling sys-tem works with PARAFLUUP. Top up only with the

same fluid contained in the cool-ing circuit. PARAFLU UP cannotbe mixed with other fluids. Shouldthis take place, do not start the en-gine and contact Lancia Dealer-ship.

IMPORTANT After topping up orchanging the oil, let the engine turnfor a few seconds and wait a few min-utes after stopping it before you checkthe level.

Check coolant level when the engineis cold. The level should be includedbetween the MIN and MAX referencelines on the reservoir.

If the level is low, top up slowlythrough the filler A on the reservoirwith a 50-50% mixture of distilledwater and PARAFLU UP fluid as re-quired.

ENGINE COOLANT (fig. 11)

Do not remove the reser-voir cap when the engine ishot: you risk scalding your-

self.

fig. 11P

4T01

70fig. 12

P4T

0171

The cooling system ispressurised. If necessary,replace the cap with a gen-

uine spare part to avoid compro-mising the system efficiency.

220

WINDSCREEN/REARWINDOW/HEADLIGHTWASHER FLUID (fig. 12)

To top up, remove cap A and fillerB and pour in a mixture of water andTUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35fluid in the following concentrations:

30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 70% of water in summer.

50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 50% of water in winter.

If the temperature falls below –20°C,use TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35 undiluted.

IMPORTANT Do not travel withthe windscreen washer reservoirempty. The windscreen washer is fun-damental for improving visibility.

POWER STEERING FLUID (fig. 13-14)

Check the oil level when the engineis cold. It should be included betweenthe MIN and MAX reference lines onthe reservoir.

When the oil is hot, the level can ex-ceed the MAX reference line.

To top up, loosen cap A and pour oilinto the reservoir.

IMPORTANT Make sure that the oilhas the same specifications as the oilin the system.

Oil consumption is extremely low. Ifthe oil level needs topping up again as short period of time, have the sys-tem checked for leakage at a LanciaDealership.

BRAKE AND HYDRAULICCLUTCH FLUID (fig. 15)

Check that the level of the fluid inthe reservoir is at the MAX line.

From time to time check the instru-ment panel warning light by pressingthe reservoir cap (with the ignitionkey at MAR), the warning light xshould come on.

Use DOT 4 fluid only for toppingup. We recommend TUTELA TOP 4that the braking system was originalfilled with.

Do not let the powersteering fluid come intocontact with hot engine

parts. It catches fire very easily.

fig. 14 - 1.8 - 2.01.9 jtd - 2.4 jtd versions

P4T

0172

fig. 13 - 1.6 version

P4T

0661

fig. 15

P4T

0173

221

Make sure that the highlycorrosive brake fluid doesnot drip onto the paint-

work. If it does, wash it off imme-diately with water.

Loosen cap A holding sensor B still.

The fluid level in the reservoir shouldnever exceed the MAX reference line.

IMPORTANT Brake fluid is hygro-scopic (meaning it absorbs humidity).This is why the fluid should bechanged more frequently than shownin the Service Schedule if the car ismainly driven in areas with a highpercentage of humidity in the air.

The air cleaner replace-ment procedure is pro-vided for indicative pur-

poses only. Have the operationcarried out at a Lancia Dealership.

Car safety can be compromised ifthe cleaner replacement procedureherein described is not carried outcorrectly.

Replace the air cleanermore frequently than shownin the Service Schedule if

the car is used on dusty roads.

The cleaner can be dam-aged if it is cleaned andconsequently the engine

can be damaged.

The symbol π on thecontainer indicates syn-thetic brake fluid distin-

guishing it from mineral fluid. Us-ing mineral type fluid would dam-age the special rubber brakingsystem gaskets beyond repair.

fig. 16

P4T

0174

AIR CLEANER The air cleaner is connected to the

air temperature and intake sensorswhich send the electrical signals re-quired for the correct operation of theinjection and ignition system to thecontrol unit.

Consequently, the cleaner must al-ways be in perfect conditions to en-sure correct operation of the engineand in order to contain consumptionand exhaust emissions.

REPLACEMENT (fig. 16)

Loosen the screws A, lift the cover Band remove the filtering element to bereplaced.

222

fig. 18P

4T06

62

The presence of water inthe fuel feed circuit can se-verely damage the injec-

tion system and make the enginemisfire. Go to a Lancia Dealershipas soon as possible when the cwarning light comes on to have thebleeding operation carried out.

POLLEN FILTER Have the pollen filter (fig. 17) re-

placed at a Lancia Dealership.

If the car is often used in dusty orextremely polluted environments, youshould change the filter element morefrequently. It should be changed es-pecially if the amount of air intro-duced into the passenger compart-ment is introduced.

DIESEL FILTER (1.9 jtd - 2.4 jtd versions)

DRAINING THE CONDENSE (fig. 18)

fig. 17

P4T

0175

BATTERY The battery is located in the engine

compartment in point 2 (fig. 1, 2, 3,4, 5).

The battery is of the “limited main-tenance” type. Under normal condi-tions it will not need to be topped upwith distilled water.

See “ In an emergency” for instruc-tions on how to recharge the battery.

223

Incorrect fitting of elec-trical and electronic acces-sories can seriously dam-

age the car.

REPLACING THE BATTERY

If required, replace the battery witha genuine spare part presenting thesame specifications.

Batteries contain sub-stances that are very harm-ful for the environment.

You are advised to have the batterychanged at a Lancia Dealership. Itis properly equipped for disposingof used batteries in an environ-mentally-friendly way that com-plies with the law.

The liquid in the batteryis poisonous and corrosive.Do not let it touch the skin

or eyes. Do not bring naked flamesor possible sources of sparks nearto the battery: risk of fire and ex-plosion.

USEFUL ADVICE FORLENGTHENING THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY

When you park the car, ensure thedoors, boot and bonnet are closedproperly. The ceiling lights must beoff.

Do not keep accessories (e.g. soundsystem, hazard lights etc.) switchedon for a long time when the engine isnot running.

IMPORTANT A battery which iskept at a charge of less than 50% forany length of time will be damaged bysulphation leading to a reduction incranking power and a higher risk ofthe battery electrolyte freezing (thismay even occur at –10°C).

If the car is inactive for a long periodof time, refer to “Storing the car” inthe chapter “Getting to know yourcar”.

CHECKING THE BATTERYFLUID LEVEL (electrolyte)

Check the electrolyte level and topup, if required, at the frequencyshown in the “Service schedule” inthis chapter. Have this operation car-ried out at a Lancia Dealership.

Should the battery be re-placed, the anti-crushingsafety system of the electric

windows must be reinitialised. See“Electric windows” at chapter“Getting to know your car”.

If a battery with different specifica-tions is fitted, the frequencies shownin the “Service schedule” in this chap-ter will no longer apply. Refer to theinstructions provided by the batterymanufacturer.

224

If you want to add accessories afterbuying the car (alarm, free – handphone kit, radio navigator and anti–theft system, etc.) visit a LanciaDealership. They can suggest themost suitable accessories to get andcheck whether the electric system cansupport the required load or whethera larger capacity battery and alterna-tor are required.

These devices in fact in take elec-tricity also when the ignition key is re-moved (car parked, engine off) andcan gradually drain the battery.

The overall intake of these devices(standard and after-market) must beless that 0.6 mA x Ah (of the battery),as shown in the following table.

Battery Maximumidle intake

50 Ah 30 mA

60 Ah 36 mA

70 Ah 42 mA

It is also important to remember thathigh intake devices (such as bottlewarmers, vacuum cleaners, cellularphones, etc.) will speed up batterydischarging when powered whenthe engine is not running.

IMPORTANT Please note thatwhen installing additional systems inthe car incorrect wiring can be dan-gerous, especially when concerningsafety systems.

BATTERY WITH HYDROMETER

Description

For versions/markets where applic-able, the battery can be fitted with anindicator for checking the electrolytelevel and battery charge. The batteryis of the “Low Maintenance” type fit-ted with an indicator; therefore, un-der normal conditions of use toppingup the electrolyte with distilled wateris not required. A periodical check ishowever necessary to make sure it isin efficient conditions through the in-dicator on the battery cover whichshould be dark in colour with a greencentral area.

If the indicator is a bright colour, ordark without the green central area,contact a Lancia Dealership.

225

ELECTRONICCONTROL UNITS

When the car is being used nor-mally, special measures are not nec-essary.

The following instructions must befollowed very carefully, however, ifyou work on the electrical system orin cases where emergency starting isnecessary:

– Never disconnect the battery fromthe electrical system while the engineis running.

– Disconnect the battery from theelectrical system if you are rechargingit. The modern battery chargers candischarge voltage up to 20V.

– Never perform emergency start–ups with a battery charger. Alwaysuse an auxiliary battery.

– Be particularly careful when con-necting the battery to the electricalsystem. Make sure that the polarity iscorrect and that the connection is ef-ficient.

Brightwhite colour

Dark colour withoutgreen central area

Dark colour with greencentral area

Top upelectrolyte

Low batterycharge

Electrolyte leveland charge sufficient

Contact a Lancia Dealership

Charge the battery (advisable tocontact a Lancia Dealership)

No action needed

Checking the battery charge

The quality of the battery chargecan be checked through the indicator.Depending on the colour of the indi-

cator, proceed as described in thetable below or on the label on the bat-tery.

226

– Do not connect or disconnect theterminals of the electronic units whilethe ignition key is at MAR.

– Do not check polarity throughsparking.

– Disconnect the electronic units ifyou are electrically welding the carbody. Remove the units if tempera-tures exceed 80°C (special operationson the bodywork, etc.).

SPARK PLUGSThe cleanness and soundness of the

spark plugs (fig. 19) are very impor-tant for keeping the engine efficientand polluting emissions down.

The appearance of the spark plug, ifexamined by an expert eyes, is a goodway of pinpointing a problem even ifit has nothing to do with the ignitionsystem. Therefore, if the engine hasproblems, it is important to have thespark plugs checked at a LanciaDealership.

Modifications or repairsto the electrical systemcarried out incorrectly and

without bearing the features of thesystem in mind can cause mal-functions with the risk of fire.

fig. 19P

4T02

40

The spark plugs must bechanged at the times spec-ified in the Service Sched-

ule. Only use the type of plugs in-dicated. If the heat ratio is lessthan required or the life specifiedis not guaranteed, problems canarise.

Spark plug

LANCIA RC10YCC

1.6LANCIA BKR5EZ

Champion RC10YCC

NGK BKR5EZ

LANCIA RC10YCC

1.8LANCIA BKR6EZ

Champion RC10YCC

NGK BKR6EZ

2.0LANCIA RC8BYC

Champion RC8BYC

227

IMPORTANT

As far as possible avoid sharp brak-ing and screech starts.

Be careful not to hit the kerb, pot-holes or other obstacles hard. Drivingfor long stretches over bumpy roadscan damage the tyres.

Periodically check that the tyreshave no cuts in the sidewalls, abnor-mal swelling or irregular tyre wear. Ifany of these occur, have the car seento at a Lancia Dealership.

Avoid overloading your car: this canseriously damage wheels and tyres.

If you get a flat tyre, stop immedi-ately and change it so as not to dam-age the tyre, the wheel, the suspensionand the steering.

Tyres age even if they are not usedvery much. Cracking of the tread rub-ber and the sidewalls are a sign of thisageing.

A - Correct pressure: tyre wearsevenly

B - Under inflated tyre: shouldertread wear

C – Over-inflated tyre: centre treadwear.

fig. 20P

4T02

39

If the pressure is too lowthe tyre overheats and thiscan cause it serious dam-

age.

WHEELSAND TYRES

TYRE PRESSURE

Check the pressure of each tyre, in-cluding the spare, every two weeks orso (every month anyway) and beforelong journeys.

The pressure must be checked whenthe tyre is rested and cold.

It is normal for the pressure to risewhen you are driving. If you have tocheck or restore the pressure when thetyres are warm, remember that thepressure value must be 0.3 bar abovethe specified value.

Tyre pressure must becorrect to ensure goodroad holding.

Wrong pressure causes uneven wearof the tyres (fig. 20):

Tyres must be replaced when thetread wears down to 1.6 mm. In anycase, comply with the laws in thecountry where the car is being driven.

228

WINDSCREENWIPERSBLADES

Periodically clean the rubber partwith suitable products. We recom-mend TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35.

Change the blades if the rubber edgeis warped or worn out. You should inany case change them approximatelyonce a year.

Travelling with wornwiper blades is dangerousbecause it reduces visibil-

ity in bad weather.

RUBBER TUBING Follow the Service Schedule to the

letter as concerns braking, powersteering and fuel line rubber tubing.Ozone, high temperatures and longabsence of fluid in the system can infact cause the hardening and crack-ing of the pipes with possible loss offluid. A careful check is therefore es-sential.

In any case, if the tyres have beenfitted for more than six years theyshould be examined by an expert whocan judge whether they are still fit foruse. Remember to check the sparetyre particularly carefully too.

If a replacement is necessary, alwaysuse new tyres and avoid using onesthe origin of which you are not certainabout.

The car fits tubeless tyres. Under nocircumstances use an inner tube withthese tyres.

If you replace a tyre it is a good ideato change the inflation valve, too.

To ensure the front and rear tyres allwear evenly, you are advised tochange the tyres over every 10-15thousand kilometres keeping them onthe same side of the car so as not toreverse the direction of rotation.

Do not change the tyresover in criss-cross fashionby moving a tyre from the

left hand side of the car to the rightand vice versa.

Some simple steps can reduce po-tential damage to the blades:

– If the temperature falls to belowzero, make sure the rubber blade isnot frozen to the windscreen. If neces-sary, free it with a de-icing compound.

229

2) If the blades are intact, continueby checking the operation. Operatethe windscreen washer and thewipers. If the blades clean the wind-screen perfectly they can be kept. Ifnot, replace them both.

Replacing the blades (fig. 21)

To replace rear window wiper bladesin Station Wagon versions, refer to thespecific chapter.

To replace the windscreen wiperblades:

1) Lift the windscreen wiper arm.

2) Press the lock spring tab and re-move the blade A from arm B.

– Remove any snow that has settledon the glass: besides saving the bladesyou will avoid straining the electricwindscreen wiper motor and causingit to overheat.

– Do not operate the windscreenwipers on dry glass.

Checking the blades

Before checking, clean the wind-screen and rubber blades carefullywith warm water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35 windscreenwashing fluid. The windscreen shouldbe perfectly clean and not greasy. Ifrequired, complete the cleaning oper-ation with degreasing products (am-monia based) or degreasing polishes.

The blades must also be perfectlyclean before starting the check. If re-quired, clean the corners with warmwater and soap.

1) Check the blades carefully. Theyshould not be broken or damaged inany part. Replace both the blades ifthey are broken or damaged.

3) Insert the new blade in the wind-screen wiper arm until the lock springclicks.

IMPORTANT After replacing, makesure that the blades are correctly fas-tened to the windscreen wiper arm.

fig. 21P

4T02

28

230

fig. 22

P4T

0176

The system is filled withR134a refrigerant whichwill not pollute the envi-

ronment in the event of leakage.Under no circumstances shouldR12 fluid be used as it is incom-patible with the system compo-nents and contains CFCS.

fig. 23P

4T02

74

HEADLIGHTWASHERS (where fitted)

Regularly check that the nozzles(fig. 23) are intact and clean.

The headlight washers are automat-ically switched on when the wind-screen washer is operated and theheadlights are on.

CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM

During the winter, the climate con-trol system must be turned on at leastonce a month for about ten minutes.

Before summer, have the systemchecked at a Lancia Dealership.

SPRAY NOZZLES (fig. 22)

If there is no jet of liquid, first makesure that there is liquid in the reser-voir (see “Checking fluid levels” inthis chapter).

Then make sure that the holes in thenozzles are not clogged up. Use a pinfor this if necessary.

The windscreen washer jets A can bedirected by adjusting the inclinationof the nozzles. Direct the spray so thatit reaches the highest point reached bythe blades.

231

TIPS FOR KEEPING THE BODYIN GOOD CONDITIONS

Paintwork

The paintwork is not only to makeyour car look attractive but also toprotect the steel.

If the paint is scuffed or scratcheddeeply you are therefore advised totouch up as necessary to prevent rustfrom forming.

Only use genuine products whentouching up the paintwork (see the“Technical specifications” chapter).

Ordinary maintenance of the paint-work means washing it. The fre-quency you should do this depends onthe conditions and the environmentthe car is driven in. For example, youshould wash your car more often if itis driven is areas with a high level ofair pollution or on road sprinkled withsaltwash.

– The use of zinc-plated sheet steelwhich is highly resistant to rust.

– The spraying of the underbody,engine compartment, inside thewheelhouses and other parts withwax– based products with a high pro-tective capacity.

– Spraying plastic-coating materialsto protect the most exposed points:under the door, inside the wings, theedges etc.

– The use of “open” box sections toprevent condensation and water frombuilding up and rusting the inside ofthe parts.

BODY AND UNDERBODYWARRANTY

Your Lybra is covered by warrantyagainst any original structural or bodypart being perforated by rust. Refer tothe Warranty Booklet for the generalterms.

BODYWORK

PROTECTING THE CAR FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS

The main causes of rust are:

– atmospheric pollution

– salt and humidity in the atmos-phere (coastal or very hot and humidareas)

– environmental conditions that arespecific to the season.

In addition, the abrasiveness of dustin the atmosphere and sand carriedby the wind as well as mud and stoneskicked up by other cars must not beunderestimated.

For your Lybra, LANCIA has usedleading– edge technological solutionsto effectively protect the body fromrust.

These are the most important:

– Painting systems and productsthat make the car particularly resis-tant to rust and scratching.

232

Detergents pollute water.For this reason, the carmust be washed in an area

equipped for the collection andpurification of the liquids usedwhile washing.

To wash the car properly:

1) Remove the aerial from the roofto prevent damaging it when washingthe car in an automatic carwash.

2) Wash the body using a low pres-sure jet of water.

3) Wipe a sponge with a slightlysoapy solution over the bodywork,frequently rinsing the sponge.

4) Rinse well with water and drywith a jet of air or a chamois leather.

When drying the car, be careful toget at those parts which are not soeasily seen e.g. the door frames, bon-net and around the headlights wherewater can most readily collect. Youshould leave the car out in the openso that any water remaining canevaporate more easily.

Detergents pollute water.For this reason, the carmust be washed in an area

equipped for the collection andpurification of the liquids usedwhile washing.

Do not wash the car after it has beenparked in the sun or while the bonnetis hot: it could take the shine off thepaint.

Outside plastic parts must becleaned following the usual car wash-ing procedure.

Where possible avoid parking thecar under trees; the resinous sub-stances that certain species of treeshed dull the paintwork and increasethe possibility of rust forming.

IMPORTANT Bird droppings mustbe washed off immediately and withgreat care as their acid is particularlyaggressive.

Windows

Use specific window cleaners to cleanthe windows. Use very clean cloths toavoid scratching the glass or damag-ing its transparency.

IMPORTANT To prevent damageto the electric heater element, wipethe inside of the heated rear windowgently in the same direction as the el-ements.

Engine compartment

At the end of each winter season,carefully clean the engine compart-ment. Have this done at a garage.

IMPORTANT The engine com-partment should be washed while theengine is cold and with the ignitionkey at STOP. After washing, makesure that the various protections (e.g.rubber boots and various guards)have not be removed or damaged.

233

INTERIORSFrom time to time check that water

has not collected under the mats(from dripping shoes, umbrellas,etc.) which could cause the steel torust.

Never use inflammableproducts like fuel oilether or rectified petrol

for cleaning inside the car. Theelectrostatic discharges generat-ed when rubbing to clean maycause fire. Do not keep aerosolcans in the car. There is the riskthey might explode. Aerosol cansmust never be exposed to a tem-perature above 50°C; when theweather starts to get hot the tem-perature inside the car might gowell beyond that figure.

PLASTIC PARTS INSIDE THE CAR

Use special products designed notto alter the appearance of the com-ponents.

IMPORTANT Do not use alcoholor petrol to clean the instrumentpanel.

CLEANING ALCANTARA SEATS

Alcantara upholstery is easy toclean. Follow the same instructionsprovided for velvet upholstery.

CLEANING VELVET SEATSAND FABRICS

– Remove dust with a soft brushand vacuum cleaner. Use a moistbrush to clean velvet upholstery.

– Brush the seats with a dampsponge with water and a neutralsoap.

CLEANING LEATHER ANDIMITATION LEATHER SEATS

– Remove the dry dirt with achamois leather or very slightlymoist loth without exerting toomuch pressure.

– Remove liquid or grease stainswith a dry absorbent cloth withoutrubbing. Then wipe with a chamoisleather or soft cloth moistened withwater and neutral soap. If the staindoes not come out, use a specialcleaning compound being particu-larly careful to follow the instruc-tions for use.

IMPORTANT Never use alcohol oralcohol-based products.

CLEANING SUHARA SEATS

Follow procedure A or B accordingto the type of stain to remove (seethe table below).

Type of stain Procedure

Oil, grease B

Chocolate A (lukewarm water)

Coffee A (lukewarm water)

Milk A (water and detergent)

Wax B (using a palette knife)

Fruit A (cold water)

Ballpoint pen A (water and detergent)

Mud A (water and ammonia)

Pencil B

Procedure ARemove the stain using a cloth

moistened with water or with a solu-tion of water and water-based deter-gent or ammonia (2 tablespoons perlitre of water) without rubbing.

Procedure BRemove the stain using a white cloth

moistened with undiluted or dilutedperchloro-ethylene without rubbing.

234

LYBRA STATION WAGON

You will find all the information specific tothe Lybra SW that differs from that alreadygiven in previous sections of this handbook.

The Lybra SW is a car that, as well as sharingall the features of safety, driving pleasure andenvironmental-friendliness with the Lybrasaloon, offers you the extra possibility of havingan extensive loading capacity permanently atyour disposal.

REAR WINDOW WASHER/WIPER ................ 235INTERIOR LIGHTS ........................................ 236SOUND SYSTEM ............................................ 236REAR TRIM AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................... 237BOOT .............................................................. 238ROOF RACK/SKI RACK ................................. 245TOWING THE CAR ........................................ 245IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED ........................... 246IF A BULB BURNS OUT ................................. 247

235

OPERATION (fig. 1)

This device only works with the ig-nition key at MAR:

To operate the rear window wiper,turn the ring A to '. The rear win-dow wiper will flick.

Push stalk B forward to operate therear window washer. It will be switchedoff when the stalk is released.

The wiper will be operated auto-matically for a few flicks when therear window washer is operated.

The rear window wiper will be au-tomatically operated for some secondswhen the windscreen wiper is work-ing and reverse gear is engaged.

REPLACING THE BLADES (fig. 2)

Replace the entire rear window wi-per blade and arm assembly.

1) Lift the cover A and remove thearm by loosening the nut B fasteningit to the pin.

2) Position the new arm correctlyand fasten the nut.

3) Lower the cover.

SPRAY NOZZLES (fig. 3)

If there is no jet of liquid, first makesure that there is liquid in the reser-voir (see “Car maintenance”).

The rear window washer jets can bedirected by adjusting the inclinationof the nozzles A.

fig. 1

P4T

0177

fig. 2P

4T01

78fig. 3

P4T

0179

REAR WINDOW WASHER/WIPER

236

INTERIOR LIGHTSCENTRAL REAR CEILINGLIGHT (fig. 4)

The ceiling light will come on whenthe switch A is in position 0 and thetailgate is opened.

The ceiling light will come on re-gardless of the doors and tailgate whenthe switch is in central position 1.

The ceiling light will be off regard-less of the doors and tailgate when theswitch is moved to the left (position 2).

IMPORTANT Make sure that theswitch is not in position 1 when leav-ing the car. The ceiling light will goout automatically after approximately15 minutes if the tailgate is left openwith the switch in position 0.

SOUND SYSTEM

REAR SPEAKERS (fig. 5)

The rear speakers A are housed inthe side boot shelves.

AERIAL

The aerial is located on the car roof.

Remember to remove the aerial fromthe roof before washing the car in anautomatic car wash to prevent dam-aging it.

CD PLAYER - CD-ROM DRIVEFOR LANCIA ICS WITHNAVIGATION SYSTEM (fig. 6-7)(where fitted)

The CD player A and the CD-ROMdrive B for the Lancia ICS with nav-igation system are housed in a com-partment on the left-hand side of theboot under flap C.

Pull handle D to remove the clippedon flap. To refit, insert the lower partfirst and then clip the flap back.

Compartment E for storing the CDscan be found over the compartment.

fig. 4

P4T

0180

fig. 5P

4T01

81fig. 6

P4T

0182

237

See “Sound system” in this hand-book for CD player instructions.

See the booklet attached to thisOwner Handbook for instructions onthe Lancia ICS with navigation sys-tem and the CD-ROM drive.

HI-FI AUDIO SYSTEM (where fitted)

Subwoofer (fig. 8-9)

A 14 dm3 bass box B is located in acompartment on the right-hand sideof the boot under flap A.

Pull handle C to remove the clippedon flap.

To refit, insert the lower part firstand then clip the flap back.

REAR TRIMAUTOMATICCONTROL SYSTEM(where fitted)

The car is equipped with a rear sus-pension self-bearing hydraulic-pneu-matic system with built-in self-level-ling functions (thanks to an active de-vice fitted in the shock absorber) anddampening functions in the place ofthe traditional shock absorber system.

The trim is lowered when the car isloaded (passengers, boot) accordingto the stiffness of the spring systemand the load. However, as soon as thecar starts off, the system employs themovements induced by the road sur-face on the wheels to increase its sup-porting capacity and lift the body toa pre-defined trim regardless of theload conditions.

fig. 7

P4T

0224

fig. 8

P4T

0225

fig. 9P

4T01

85

238

When using the boot,make sure the load you arecarrying does not exceed

the permitted weight (see “Techni-cal specifications”). The trans-ported load and its arrangement inthe boot will however effect roadholding also if the trim is keptconstant by the automatic system.

BOOTThe self-levelling rear suspensionsautomatically keep the rear of thecar’s height – and consequently itstrim – constant regardless of the loadin the boot.

OPENING THE TAILGATE (fig. 10-11)

Lift switch A or insert the key inlock B at turn it to position 1 to openthe tailgate.

The tailgate is locked by the centraldoor locking system.

Use handle C over the lock to openthe tailgate.

fig. 11

P4T

0805

fig. 10P

4T02

49

When using the boot,make sure the load you arecarrying does not exceed

the maximum allowed weight (seethe “Technical Specifications”chapter). Also ensure the items inthe boot are arranged properly andfastened with straps to the specifichooks to prevent them beingthrown forwards and injuring pas-sengers should you brake sharply.

239

fig. 12

P4T

804

OPENING THE TAILGATE WITHTHE REMOTE CONTROL

The tailgate can be opened from theoutside by pressing D (fig. 12) on theignition key.

The tailgate can be opened alsowhen the central door locking systemand the electronic alarm (where fit-ted) are on.

In this case, the alarm system im-plements the following strategy:

– volumetric protection off

– anti-lift sensor off

– boot sensor off.

The surveillance functions will be re-stored when the tailgate is closed.

CLOSING THE TAILGATE (fig. 13)

Use a handle A to close the tailgate.

CEILING LIGHT (fig. 14)

Ceiling light B on the right-handside of the boot comes on when thetailgate is opened. The light goes outeither when the tailgate is closed orafter a few minutes if the tailgate isleft open. In the latter case, close andopen the tailgate again to switch thelight back on.

fig. 13P

4T01

87fig. 14

P4T

0189

240

ODDMENT TRAY (fig. 16)

The oddment tray A is behind therear seat back.

The tray can be tilted by means ofhandle B to reach the boot from thepassenger compartment.

To remove the tray, tilt it and re-move the side pins from their recessesC. To reposition the tray, insert theside pin in recesses C and turn it for-wards.

UTILITY COMPARTMENTS (fig. 15)

These compartments are located on the right and left-hand sides of the boot. Pull handle A to open theclipped-on flap B and remove it. Torefit, insert the lower part first andthen clip the flap back.

The left-hand compartment is set upto house the CD player and the CD-ROM drive for the Lancia ICS withnavigator system (where fitted).

The subwoofer for cars with HI-FIsound system is housed in the right-hand compartment.

LUGGAGE COVER (fig. 17-18-19)

The semi-rigid luggage cover A canbe rolled up and removed.

To roll it up, remove the two rearpins B from their recesses C and re-lease the Velcro strips D on the sides.

fig. 16P

4T01

90

fig. 17

P4T

0191

fig. 18

P4T

0192

fig. 15

P4T

0183

In the event of an acci-dent or sudden braking,the objects placed on the

tray can be thrown around thepassenger compartment can causeinjuries.

241

PASSENGER COMPARTMENTSEPARATION NET (fig. 20-21-22-23) (where fitted)

The net for separating the passengercompartment and the boot is con-tained on a double reel A. The upperand lower sections of the net can beopened separately.

Hook the upper part of the separa-tion net to supports B.

Hook the lower part of the separa-tion net to hooks D.

The reel can be removed from theboot after wrapping up the upper andlower sections. To remove the reel,turn the knob on the right-hand sideforwards until the red triangle ap-

pears. Lift the right-hand side of thereel first and then the left-hand side.Remove the reel from the boot(fig. 23).

To reposition the reel, insert the left-hand side first and then the right-hand side. Turn the knob backwardsuntil it locks.

To remove the cover, roll it up andremove the two front pins E.

To refit the cover, insert the frontpins then extend it and insert the rearpins.

To not place heavy ob-jects on the cover: youcould damage it.

In the event of an acci-dent or sudden braking,the objects placed on the

cover can be thrown around thepassenger compartment can causeinjuries.

fig. 20P

4T01

94fig. 22

P4T

0196

fig. 21

P4T

0726

fig. 19

P4T

0193

242

REVERSIBLE FLOOR MAT

The floor mat can be reversed. Re-move it and turn it over with thewashable side facing up when carry-ing dirty loads.

SKI TUNNEL (fig. 26)

The tunnel can be used to transportlong objects (e.g. skis). Introduce ob-jects into the tunnel from the boot.

1) Lower the armrest A.

2) Press handle B and lower flap C.

3) Remove the cover (where fitted).

Push flap C towards the boot toclose it. It will lock automatically.

Heavy loads which arenot securely anchoredcould seriously injure pas-

sengers in the event of an accident.

ANCHORING THE LOAD (fig. 24-25)

The load can be secured with beltsattached to the specific rings in theboot corners.

The rings can also be used to fastenthe luggage net (optional, can be pur-chased at a Lancia Dealership).

fig. 25P

4T01

99fig. 26

P4T

0200

fig. 24

P4T

0198

fig. 23

P4T

0197

243

To totally extend the boot (fig. 29)

Fold both side of the seat to obtainmaximum boot capacity.

EXTENDING THE BOOT

The split rear seat allows to partiallyor totally extend the boot (one third,two thirds, or totally).

To make the most of the boot load-ing capacity, remove the luggagecover, the tilting oddment tray andthe passenger compartment separa-tion net (where fitted) as shown in thespecific paragraphs.

To partially extend the boot (one third) (fig. 27)

Fold the left-hand seat only. Youcan sit two passengers in the rear seaton the right-hand side.

To partially extend the boot (two thirds) (fig. 28)

Fold the right-hand seat only. Youcan sit one passenger in the rear seaton the left-hand side.

fig. 28P

4T02

02fig. 29

P4T

0203

fig. 27

P4T

0201

244

To return the seats to theirnormal position:

1) Move the seat belt sideways andbring the seat back to an upright po-sition. Check that it has caught prop-erly.

2) Tip the cushion back and makesure that the seat belt webbing is nottwisted in the hidden stretches be-tween the cushions and the seat back.

3) Refit the head restraints.

4) Refit the passenger compartmentseparation net (where fitted), the tilt-ing oddment tray and the luggagecover as shown in the specific para-graphs.

IMPORTANT If there is a fairlyheavy load in the boot and you aretravelling at night, it is a good idea tocheck and adjust the height of thedipped beam headlights (see “Head-lights”).

To extend the boot

1) Pull handle A (fig. 30) located inthe middle of each cushion and pull itforwards in the direction of the arrow.

2) Remove the head restraints fromthe rear seat (see "Head restraints")and insert them in the housings on thecushion (fig. 31).

3) Lift the handle by the sides of theseat backs to release the seats:

B (fig. 32) = right-hand seat

C (fig. 33) = left-hand seat.

4) Lift the seat belts sideways andtilt the seat back forwards as to ob-tain a single load platform with thefloor of the boot.

fig. 33

P4T

0206

fig. 32

P4T

0205

fig. 30

P4T

0204

fig. 31P

4T07

39

245

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK

FASTENERS (fig. 34)

An optional set of two roof rackcross bars is available for the LybraSW. These bars can be used to securespecific accessories for transportingobjects (ski racks, windsurf racks,etc.).

The car is equipped with three pairsof securing points for the cross bars.

To fit the cross bars, remove the sixcaps A using a screwdriver as a leverin point B and fasten with the specificscrews.

Keep caps A which will be used tocover the fastening points when thebars are removed.

To refit caps A, insert tab C andthen press on the other side to fastenthe caps in their housing.

After travelling a fewkilometres, check that thescrews securing the rack

are tight.

Never exceed the permit-ted weight (refer to the“Technical specifications”

chapter).

TOWING THE CAROR ANOTHERVEHICLE

To fit the tow ring, remove thebumper cover A (fig. 35) by using ascrewdriver as a lever in the specificrecess.

IMPORTANT For other informa-tion, warning and precautions to beadopted when towing the car or an-other vehicle, see “In an emergency”.

WARNING WHEN TOWINGTRAILERS

Observe the speed limits that arespecific to each country for vehiclestowing trailers. The top speed, how-ever, is 100 kph.

fig. 34

P4T

0207

fig. 35P

4T02

13

246

SPARE WHEEL AND TOOLS

The car may be equipped with aspace-saver or normal sized sparewheel (where fitted).

The spare wheel, the jack and thetool kit are in the boot in a compart-ment under the floor carpet.

To reach the compartment, open thetailgate, lift the carpet from the floorand fasten its upper edge with thespecific belt A (fig. 36). The floor car-pet can also be removed from the bootfrom the back.

Remove the shim B (fig. 37).

Release the locking device C (fig. 38).Take the tool kit D and the spare wheelE and go to the wheel to be changed

IMPORTANT For instructions onhow to change a wheel correctly andfor the warnings and the precautionsto be adopted see “In an emergency”.

When you have finished, put the re-moved wheel, the jack and the tool kitback in the boot and fasten then cor-rectly. Reposition the shim B (fig. 37).

Before lowering the floor carpet, fas-ten the belt to the carpet as shown(fig. 39).

If you removed the carpet from theboot, reposition it by inserting thefront tabs F (fig. 40) in the respectiverecesses on the floor.

fig. 36

P4T

0208

fig. 37

P4T

0209

fig. 38P

4T02

10fig. 39

P4T

0211

IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED

247

IMPORTANT Read the warningsand the precautions given in “In anemergency”.

CENTRAL REAR CEILINGLIGHT

To replace a C, 12V-C10W bulb:

1) Remove the ceiling light by lever-ing in point A (fig. 41).

2) Remove the bulb B (fig. 42) byreleasing the side contacts and replaceit.

3) Refit the ceiling light by insertingside C first and then pressing on theother side until it clips.

BOOT LIGHT (fig. 43)

To replace a C , 12V-C10W bulb:

1) Remove the lens by using ascrewdriver as a lever on clip A.

2) Remove bulb B by releasing theside contacts and replace it.

3) Refit the lens by inserting side Cfirst and then pressing on the otherside to engage clip A.

fig. 40

P4T

0212

fig. 41

P4T

0214

fig. 42P

4T02

15fig. 43

P4T

0216

IF A BULB BURNS OUT

248

REAR LIGHT CLUSTER

Taillights, direction indicators,brake lights, reversing light andrear fog light

To replace a bulb:

1) Remove flap A (fig. 47) from theright-hand or left-hand utility com-partment in the boot, pull handle Band remove the flap.

ADDITIONAL BRAKE LIGHTS(THIRD BRAKE LIGHT)

The light can be reached from theoutside with the tailgate open.

To replace a B, 12V-H21W bulb:

1) Remove the three covers A (fig.44) using a screwdriver as a lever inthe specific recesses.

2) Loosen the screws B (fig. 45) andremove the additional brake light C.

3) Turn the bulb holder D (fig. 46)anticlockwise and remove it.

4) Press and turn bulb E (fig. 46)anticlockwise and remove it.

5) Fit the new bulb by pressing andturning it clockwise.

6) Insert the bulb holder D (fig. 46)and turn it clockwise.

7) Reposition the additional brakelight on the tailgate and fasten screwsB (fig. 45).

8) Fasten the caps A (fig. 44) in therecesses on the screws.

fig. 44

P4T

0217

fig. 45

P4T

0218

fig. 46P

4T02

19fig. 47

P4T

0183

249

F - Reversing light bulb (right-handcluster only): B, 12V-P21W.

Rear fog light bulb (left-hand clus-ter only): B, 21V-P21W.

G - Upper taillight bulb: B, 12V-R10W.

H - Direction indicator bulb (or-ange): B, 12V-PY21W.

L - Brake light bulb: B, 12V-P21W.

5) Refit the bulb holder E (fig. 50)and fasten it with screw D (fig. 50).

6) Refit the light cluster and fastenthe nuts C (fig. 48).

7) Refit the utility compartment flapby inserting the lower part first andthen clipping it back.

2) Remove the light cluster by loos-ening the nuts C (fig. 48) with end A(fig. 49) of the tool supplied with thecar and pull it outwards without dis-connecting the connector. Use end B(fig. 49) of the tool in versions withHI-FI sound system to loosen theright-hand light cluster fasteningnuts. Fit the adapter C (fig. 49) pro-vided.

3) Loosen screw D (fig. 50) and re-move the bulb holder E.

4) Remove the bulb by pressing itslightly and turning it anticlockwise.Replace it (fig. 51).

fig. 48

P4T

0220

fig. 49P

4T03

01fig. 51

P4T

0222

fig. 50

P4T

0221

250

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motor and engineering enthusiasts as well asthose “in the trade” will probably start readingfrom this point in the handbook. This, in fact, iswhere a section jam-packed with facts, figures,formulae, measurements and tables begins. In asense, it is the Lybra’s identity card. A documentthat introduces the car and explains in technicaljargon all the features that go together to make ita model designed to give you superlative drivingsatisfaction.

IDENTIFICATION DATA ................................ 251ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS .. 253ENGINE .......................................................... 254TRANSMISSION ............................................. 258BRAKES.......................................................... 260SUSPENSIONS................................................ 261STEERING...................................................... 261WHEEL GEOMETRY ..................................... 261WHEELS ........................................................ 262ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.................................. 265DIMENSIONS.................................................. 266PERFORMANCE............................................. 268WEIGHTS ....................................................... 269CAPACITIES ................................................... 271FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS........................... 274FUEL CONSUMPTION .................................. 276CO2 EMISSIONS IN EXHAUST ...................... 277TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE....................... 278

251

fig. 1

P4T

0223

IDENTIFICATIONDATA

CHASSIS MARKING (A - fig. 1)

It is printed on the upper right-handshock absorber attachment.

It can be reached by opening thebonnet and includes the followingdata:

– Car model

– Chassis number.

ENGINE MARKING

The marking is stamped on thecylinder block and includes the modeland the chassis number.

MODEL PLATE

The plate (fig. 2) is fastened to thefront crossmember in the engine com-partment and bears the followingidentification information (fig. 3):

A - Manufacturer’s name

B - Homologation number

C - Car model code

D - Chassis number

E - Maximum vehicle weight fullyloaded.

F - Maximum vehicle weight fullyloaded with trailer.

fig. 2

P4T

0184

252

fig. 4P

4T01

37fig. 3

P4T

0250

G - Maximum vehicle weight onfront axle

H - Maximum vehicle weight on rearaxle

I - Engine type

L - Body version code

M - Spare part code

N - Smoke opacity index (for dieselengines).

BODYWORK PAINTIDENTIFICATION PLATE

The plate (fig. 4) is applied on theinner boot/tailgate panel.

It bears the following data:

A - Paint manufacturer

B - Colour name

C - Lancia colour code

D - Re-spray and touch up code.

253

ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS

Engine code Bodywork code

Saloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon

1.6 182B6000 182B6000 839AXF1A 12C 839BXF1A 13C

1.8 839A7000 839A7000 839AXG1A 14D 839BXG1A 15D

2.0 185A8000 185A8000 839AXH1A 16C 839BXH1A 17C

1.9 jtd 937A2000 937A2000 839AXN1A 22C 839BXN1A 23C

2.4 jtd 841C000 841C000 839AXP1A 24C 839BXP1A 25C

EURO 3 + D4 APPROVAL (for specific markets)

Engine code Bodywork code

Saloon Station Wagon

1.8 839A7000 839AXG1A 14E 839BXG1A 15E

254

ENGINE1.6 1.8 2.0

GENERAL FEATURESEngine code 182B6000 839A7000 185A8000Cycle Otto Otto OttoNumber and layout of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line 5 in lineNumber of valves per cylinder 4 4 4Diameter x stroke mm 20.5 x 78.4 82 x 82.7 82 x 75.65Total capacity cm3 1596 1747 1998Compression ratio 10.5 : 1 10.3 : 1 10.7 : 1Maximum power (EEC): kW 76 96 110

HP 103 130 150corresponding ratio rpm 5750 6300 6500

Maximum torque (EEC): Nm 140 156 181kgm 14.9 15.8 18.5

corresponding ratio rpm 4000 3800 3750

TIMINGIntake: opens BTDC 0° – –

opens ATDC – 3° 9°closes BTDC – – –closes ABDC 34° 41° 49°

Exhaust: opens ATDC – – –opens BBDC 24° 32° 40°opens BTDC – – 0°closes ATDC 0° 2° –

Tappet clearance for timing check: intake mm 0.45 0.45 0.45exhaust mm 0.45 0.45 0.45

Cold tappet clearance: intake mm Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydraulicexhaust mm tappets tappets tappets

255

1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd

GENERAL FEATURESEngine code 937A2000 841C000Cycle Diesel DieselNumber and layout of cylinders 4 in line 5 in lineNumber of valves per cylinder 2 2Diameter x stroke mm 82 x 90.4 82 x 90.4Total capacity cm3 1910 2387Compression ratio 18.5 : 1 18.45 : 1Maximum power (EEC): kW 85 110

HP 115 150corresponding ratio rpm 4000 4000

Maximum torque (EEC): Nm 275 305kgm 28 31,1

corresponding ratio rpm 2000 1800

TIMINGIntake: opens BTDC 0° 0°

opens ATDC – –closes BTDC – –closes ABDC 32° 32°

Exhaust: opens ATDC – –opens BBDC 40° 40°closes BTDC 2° 2°closes BTDC – –

Tappet clearance for timing check: intake mm 0.50 0.50exhaust mm 0.50 0.50

Cold tappet clearance: intake mm 0.30 0.30exhaust mm 0.35 0.35

256

FUEL FEED/IGNITION

Modifications or repairsto the fuel feed system thatare not carried out prop-

erly or do not take the system’stechnical specifications into ac-count can cause malfunctionsleading to the risk of fire.

1.6 version

Integrated electronic injection andignition system. A single control unitgoverns both function and processesinjection time (for fuel metering) andspark advance angle by means of aknock sensor.

– Type: Multipoint, phased, sequen-tial.

– Air cleaner: dry, with paper filter.

– Petrol pump: electrical, submergedin tank.

– Petrol filter in tank.

– Injection pressure: 3 bar.

– Stoichiometric air-to-fuel meteringof the basis of electronic processing ofthe data provided by the engine rpmand absolute pressure in intake mani-fold sensors.

– “Closed loop” information on con-sumption for petrol metering providedby the lambda sensor.

– Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2.

– Spark plugs:LANCIA RC10YCCLANCIA BKR5EZChampion RC10YCCNGK BKR5EZ

1.8 version

Integrated electronic injection andignition system. A single control unitgoverns both function and processesinjection time (for fuel metering) andspark advance angle.

– Type: Multipoint, phased, sequen-tial.

– Air cleaner: dry, with paper filter.

– Petrol pump: electrical, submergedin tank.

– Petrol filter in tank;

– Injection pressure: 3 bar.

– Metering of intake air directlymeasured by means of a hot film flowmeter.

– “Closed loop” information on con-sumption for petrol metering providedby the lambda sensor.

– Engine idling speed: 825 ± 50rpm.

– Phase variator on intake camshaft.

– Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2.

– Spark plugs:LANCIA RC10YCCLANCIA BKR6EZChampion RC10YCCNGK BKR6EZ

257

– Engine idling speed: 700 ± 50 rpm.

– Firing order: 1 - 2 - 4 - 5 - 3.

– Spark plugs:LANCIA RC8BYCChampion RC8BYC

2.0 versions

Integrated electronic injection andignition system. A single control unitgoverns both function and processesinjection time (for fuel metering) andspark advance angle.

– Type: Multipoint, phased, sequen-tial.

– Air cleaner: dry, with paper filter.

– Petrol pump: electrical, submergedin tank.

– Petrol filter in tank.

– Injection pressure: 3 bar.

Stoichiometric air-to-fuel meteringof the basis of:

– Preventive metering of intake airdirectly measured by means of a hotfilm flow meter;

– “Closed loop” information on con-sumption provided by the lambdasensor.

FUEL FEED

1.9 jtd - 2.4 jtd versions

Modifications or repairsto the fuel feed system thatare not carried out prop-

erly or do not take the system’stechnical specifications into ac-count can cause malfunctionsleading to the risk of fire.

Direct high pressure injection systemwith overboost and intercooler.

Fuel pump: high pressure, unijet;electrical pre-feed pump in tank.

– Firing order:1.9 jtd: 1 - 3 - 4 - 22.4 jtd: 1 - 2 - 4 - 5 - 3.

– Air cleaner: dry, with paper filter.

258

– Variable geometry turbochargeroperated by exhaust gas with waste-gate excess pressure valve.

– Supercharging pressure: 1 bar.

– Electronically controlled cooledEGR system according to engine rpm,load and temperature.

LUBRICATION

Forced lubrication by means ofgeared pump with built-in pressurelimiting valve.

Total capacity cartridge filter for oilpurification.

COOLING

Cooling system with radiator, cen-trifuge pump and expansion reservoir.

“Controlled by-pass” thermostat onsecondary circuit for recirculatingcoolant from the engine to the radia-tor.

Electrical fan for cooling the radia-tor controlled by the engine controlunit.

TRANSMISSION

CLUTCH

Hydraulically controlled, self-ad-justing pedal without idle stroke.

MECHANICAL GEARBOX ANDDIFFERENTIAL

Five gears forward and reserve withsynchromesh for forward gear en-gagement.

Reverse with synchromesh (1.9 jtdand 2.4 jtd versions).

259

The gearbox ratios are:

Saloon 1.6 1.8 2.0 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd

1st gear 3.909 3.909 3.909 3.800 3.800

2nd gear 2.238 2.238 2.238 2.235 2.235

3rd gear 1.520 1.520 1.520 1.360 1.360

4th gear 1.156 1.156 1.156 0.971 0.971

5th gear 0.971 0.971 0.946 0.707 0.763

reverse 3.909 3.909 3.909 3.545 3.545

Station Wagon 1.6 1.8 2.0 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd

1st gear 3.909 3.909 3.909 3.800 3.800

2nd gear 2.238 2.238 2.238 2.235 2.235

3rd gear 1.520 1.520 1.520 1.360 1.360

4th gear 1.156 1.156 1.156 0.971 0.971

5th gear 0.971 0.971 0.946 0.707 0.763

reverse 3.909 3.909 3.909 3.545 3.545

260

The differential ratios are:

BRAKES

SERVICE AND EMERGENCYBRAKES

Front: disc brakes with floatingshoes and one cylinder per wheel.

Rear: disc brakes with floating shoe

Crossed hydraulic circuit control.

8" vacuum brake booster with addi-tional chamber (1.6 - 1.8 and 1.9 jtdversions). 7" + 8" double tandemvacuum brake booster (2.0 and 2.4jtd versions).

Four sensor, four channel ABS.

Automatic take-up of friction linerwear.

Brake force distributor governed bythe ABS system.

HANDBRAKE

Controlled by a lever, it works me-chanically on the rear brakes.

DIFFERENTIAL

Final drive gear and differential as-sembly built into the gearbox.

Drive transmission to the frontwheels by means of drive shafts con-nected to the differential and to thewheels with CV joints.

Final reduction Numberdifferential torque of teeth

1.6 3,823 65/17

1.8 3,733 56/15

2.0 3,733 56/15

1.9 jtd 3,353 57/17

2.4 jtd 3,111 56/18

261

SUSPENSIONS

FRONT

Independent wheel, McPherson withtransverse lower wishbones.

Offset coil springs and dual effecttelescopic shock absorbers.

Anti-roll bar.

REAR

Independent wheel, BLG (guidedwishbone) multiple wishbone layout.

Coil springs.

Dual effect, telescopic, pressurisedgas shock absorbers and stabiliser.

STEERINGTelescopic, energy absorbing jointed

steering column with angular adjust-ment system.

Permanently lubricated rack andpinion.

Hydraulic power steering.

Permanently lubricated joints.

Minimum steering circle:

– 1.6 - 1.8 - 1.9 jtd versions = 10.5 m

– 2.0 - 2.4 jtd versions = 10.9 m.

Number of steering wheel turnslock-to-lock: approximately 2.5.

WHEELGEOMETRY

Toe-in measured from rim to rim:

– front wheels: –1 ± 1 mm.

– rear wheels: 2 ± 2 mm.

The values refer to the car in run-ning order.

This operation requires the use ofspecial equipment and must thereforebe carried out at a Lancia Dealer-ship.

262

WHEELS

RIMS AND TYRES

Printed steel or alloy rims (where fit-ted).

Tubeless tyres with radial carcass.

To ensure safety of the car in move-ment, it must be fitted with tyres ofspecified size and of the same makeand type on all wheels.

IMPORTANT Do not use innertubes with tubeless tyres. SPACE-SAVER SPARE WHEEL

Printed steel rim.

Tubeless tyre.

Rim Tyre

4.00B x 15” H35 T125/80 R15 96M

Rim Tyre

6J x 15H2 195/65 R15 91H1.6 - 1.9 jtd

61/2J x 15H2 - 37 (v)6J x 15H2 - 37 (■) 205/60 R15 91V (■)

1.8 6J x 15H2 195/65 R15 91V

61/2J x 15H2 - 37 (v)6J x 15H2 - 37 (■) 205/60 R15 91V (■)

2.0 - 2.4 jtd 6J x 15H2 195/65 R15 91V

61/2J x 15H2 - 37 (v)6J x 15H2 - 37 (■) 205/60 R15 91V (■)

61/2J x 16H2 - 37 205/55 R16 91V

(v) For some versions (■) Optional

SNOW TYRESRim Tyre

1.6 - 1.9 jtd 6J x 15H2 195/65 R15 91T (M + S)

1.8 - 2.0 - 2.4 jtd 6J x 15H2 195/65 R15 91H (M + S)

SNOW CHAINS

Use only low profile chains withmaximum height off the tyre of 9 mm.

Check the tautness of the chains af-ter driving some ten metres.

The homologated tyres are listed inthe log book.

IMPORTANT In the event of dis-crepancies between information givenin the Owner Handbook and thatshown in the Log Book, refer to thelatter only.

263

CORRECT TYRE READING

Below, please find the instructionsneeded to understand the meaning ofthe code stamped on the tyre.

The code may be in one of the waysgiven in the example.

Load index (capacity)

Example:

205/55 R 16 91 V

205 = Nominal width (distance inmm between sides).

55 = Percentage height/width ra-tio.

R = Radial tyre.

ZR = Radial tyre, with speed over240 km/h.

16 = Rim diameter in inches.

91 = Load index (capacity), e.g.91 = 615 kg. Not present in ZR

tyres.

W, Z = Maximum speed index. In ZRtyres the speed index Z is be-fore the R.

60 = 250 kg61 = 257 kg62 = 265 kg63 = 272 kg64 = 280 kg65 = 290 kg66 = 300 kg67 = 307 kg68 = 315 kg69 = 325 kg70 = 335 kg71 = 345 kg72 = 355 kg73 = 365 kg74 = 375 kg75 = 387 kg76 = 400 kg77 = 412 kg78 = 425 kg79 = 437 kg80 = 450 kg81 = 462 kg82 = 475 kg83 = 487 kg

84 = 500 kg85 = 515 kg86 = 530 kg87 = 545 kg88 = 560 kg89 = 580 kg90 = 600 kg91 = 615 kg92 = 630 kg93 = 650 kg94 = 670 kg95 = 690 kg96 = 710 kg97 = 730 kg98 = 750 kg99 = 775 kg100 = 800 kg101 = 825 kg102 = 850 kg103 = 875 kg104 = 900 kg105 = 925 kg106 = 950 kg

Maximum speed index

Q = up to 160 km/h.

R = up to 170 km/h

S = up to 180 km/h.

T = up to 190 km/h.

U = up to 200 km/h.

H = up to 210 km/h.

V = over 210 km/h.

ZR = over 240 km/h.

W = up to 270 km/h.

Y = up to 300 km/h.

Maximum speed indexfor snow tyres

Q M + S = up to 160 km/h.

T M + S = up to 190 km/h.

H M + S = up to 210 km/h.

264

Example:

6 1/2 J x 15 H2

UNDERSTANDINGRIM MARKING (fig. 5)

The following are the necessary in-dications to understand the meaningof the markings on the rim.

6 1/2 = rim width in inches (1).

J = rim drop centre outline (sideprojection where the tyrebead rests (2).

15 = rim nominal diameter ininches (corresponds to diam-eter of the tyre to be mounted(3 = ∅).

H2 = “hump” shape and number(relief on the circumferenceholding the tubeless tyre eadon te rim).

fig. 5P

4T08

00

ELECTRICALSYSTEM

Maximum nominal output current

1.6 80A - (80A or 90A with air conditioner)(105A alternative for versions/markets where applicable)

1.8 - 2.0 100A - (100A with air conditioner)(120A alternative for versions/markets where applicable)

1.9 jtd 85A or 100A (100A or 120A with air conditioner)(120A with supplementary heater)

2.4 jtd 120A

Output power

1.6 1.3 kW or 1.4 kW

1.8 - 2.0 1.1 kW1.9 jtd 1.8 kW or 2.0 kW2.4 jtd 2.1 kW

Modifications or repairsto the system that are notcarried out properly or do

not take the system’s technicalspecifications into account cancause malfunctions leading to therisk of fire.

20 hour discharge Cold crankingcapacity discarge current (–18°C)

1.6 50Ah - 60Ah (*) 250A - 380A (*)

1.8 - 2.0 50Ah - 60Ah (*) 250A - 380A (*)

1.9 jtd 60Ah - 70Ah (*) 380A - 450A (*)

2.4 jtd 70Ah 450A

(*) Alternative for versions/markets where applicable

Voltage: 12 Volts.

ALTERNATORDiode rectifier with built-in electronic voltage regulator. The battery starts recharging as soon

as the engine starts

STARTER MOTOR

BATTERYEarthed negative.

Batteries with higher electrical specifications are fitted in specific markets.

265

266

DIMENSIONSHeight is intended for an unladen car. Dimensions in mm.

Boot volume (as per VDA standards): 420 dm3

fig. 6P4T0027

267

Height is intended for an unladen car. Dimensions in mm.

Boot volume under luggage cover (as per VDA standards):

– normal conditions: 420 dm3

– extended: 800 dm3

Overall volume: 1,300 dm3

fig. 7 (•) Height including roof bars: 1578 mmP4T0028

268

PERFORMANCETop admitted speed after running-in (in km/h)

Saloon 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th R

1.6 48 84 123 161 185 48

1.8 54 94 137 180 201 54

2.0 55 96 141 186 210 35

1.9 jtd 36 62 102 143 190 39

2.4 jtd 39 65 108 151 214 41

Station Wagon 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th R

1.6 48 84 123 161 185 48

1.8 54 94 137 180 201 54

2.0 55 96 141 186 210 55

1.9 jtd 36 62 102 143 190 39

2.4 jtd 39 65 108 151 214 41

WEIGHTS (kg)

1.6 1.6 1.8 1.8 2.0 2.0 Saloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon

Kerb weight (including fuel, spare wheel, tools and accessories): 1,250 1,290 1,300 1,340 1,350 1,390

Payload (*) including driver: 520 525 520 525 520 525

Maximum admitted loads (**)

– front axle: 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050

– rear axle: 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050

– total: 1,770 1,815 1,820 1,865 1,870 1,915

Towable loads:– trailer with brakes 1,200 1,200 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400

– trailer without brakes 400 400 400 400 400 400

Maximum load on roof: 50 80 50 80 50 80

Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes): 75 75 75 75 75 75

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc,), the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.

269

270

1.9 jtd 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd 2.4 jtdSaloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon

Kerb weight (including fuel, spare wheel, tools and accessories): 1,310 1,350 1,370 1,410

Payload (*) including driver: 520 525 520 525

Maximum admitted loads

– front axle: 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050

– rear axle: 1,050 1,050 1,050 1,050

– total: 1,830 1,875 1,890 1,935

Towable loads:– trailer with brakes 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,400

– trailer without brakes 400 400 400 400

Maximum load on roof: 50 80 50 80

Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes): 75 75 75 75

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.), the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.

CAPACITIES

Fuel tank:including a reserve of:

Engine cooling system:

Engine sump: Engine sump and filter:

Gearbox/differential:

Hydraulic power steering:

CV cavities and joints (each):

Hydraulic brake circuit with ABS:

Windscreen/rear window washer reservoir (SW):

Windscreen/rear window/ headlight washer reservoir (SW)

(❒) For temperatures lower than –20°C, we recommend SELENIA PERFORMER SAE 5W-30.

Prescribed fuelRecommended products

Premium unleaded petrol witha RON not lower than 95

Mixture of distilled water andPARAFLU UP at 50%.

SELENIA 20K (❒)

TUTELA CAR MATRYX

TUTELA GI/A

TUTELA MRM 2

TUTELA TOP 4

TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35

TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35

1.6

litres kg

60 –8 –

8.0 –

3.5 3.13.8 3.4

1.98 1.8

0.9 –

– 0.095

0.52 –

4 –

5.5 –

1.8

litres kg

60 –8 –

6.80 –

3.9 3.54.3 3.85

1.98 1.8

0.9 –

– 0.095

0.56 –

4 –

5.5 –

2.0

litres kg

60 –8 –

8.6 –

4.3 3.85.0 4.45

1.98 1.8

0.9 –

– 0.095

0.56 –

4 –

5.5 –

271

272

1.9 jtd

litres kg

60 –8 –

7.27 –

4.2 3.754.8 4.25

1.98 1.8

0.9 –

– 0.095

0.56 –

4 –

5.5 –

2.4 jtd

litres kg

60 –8 –

7.4 –

4.8 4.3 5.5 4.9

1.98 1.8

0.9 –

– 0.095

0.56 –

4 –

5.5 –

Fuel tank:including a reserve of:

Engine cooling system:

Engine sump:Engine sump and filter:

Gearbox/differential:

Hydraulic power steering:

CV cavities and joints (each):

Hydraulic brake circuit with ABS:

Windscreen/rear window washer reservoir (SW):

Windscreen/rear window/ headlight washer reservoir (SW):

(❍) For temperatures lower than –15°C, we recommend SELENIA WR DIESEL SAE 5W-40.

Prescribed fuelRecommended products

Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (EN590 specifications)

Mixture of distilled water andPARAFLU UP at 50%.

SELENIA TURBO DIESEL (❍)

TUTELA CAR MATRYX

TUTELA GI/A

TUTELA MRM 2

TUTELA TOP 4

TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35

TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35

Windscreen washer fluid

Use a mixture of water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35 fluid in thefollowing concentrations:

30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 70% of water in summer.

50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 50% of water in winter.

If the temperature falls below –20°C,use TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35 undiluted.

NOTES ON FLUID USE

Oil

Do not add oil with different speci-fications from the oil already in theengine.

Engine coolant

A 50-50 mixture of PARAFLU UPand distilled water gives freeze pro-tection to -35°C.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

During the beginning of the car’s lifethe engine is be tuned in. Engine oilconsumption can only be consideredstabilised after the first 5,000 - 6,000km.

IMPORTANT Oil consumption de-pends on the driving style and theconditions of use.

273

274

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

PRODUCTS WHICH MAY BE USED AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS

Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Recommended Applicationsfor correct vehicle operation fluids and lubricants

Lubricantsfor petrol engines(❒)

Lubricantsfor diesel engines

(❒) For temperatures lower than –20°C, we recommend SELENIA PERFORMER MULTIPOWER SAE 5W-30.

SELENIA 20K

SELENIAPERFORMERMULTIPOWER

SELENIAWR DIESEL

SAE 10W40 synthetic-based multigrade oil exceeding ACEA A3 - 96, CCMC G5 and API SJ specifications

SAE 5W-30 synthetic-based multigrade oil exceeding ACEA A1 and API SJ specifications

SAE 5W-40 synthetic-based multigrade oil exceeding ACEA B3and API CF specifications

P4T

0631

Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Recommended Applicationsfor correct vehicle operation fluids and lubricants

Drive lubricantsand greas

Brake fluid

Radiator antifreeze

Diesel fuel additive

Windscreen/rearwindow/headlightwasher fluid

(●) IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with other fluids with specifications different from the prescribed ones.

SAE 75W85 synthetic-based lubricant exceeding API GL-4, MIL-L-2105 D specifications

Molybdenum disulphide, lithium soap based grease, water re-sistant, NLGI = 2 consistency

Synthetic fluid, NTHSA no. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925,SAE J-1703, CUNA NC 956-01

Protective, red colour, with antifreeze action, ethylene glycoland organic inhibitor based

Diesel fuel additive providing engine protection

Mixture of alcohol and surfactants CUNA NC 956-II

Mechanical gearboxand differential

CV joints

Hydraulic brake andclutch controls

Proportions:50% water and 50%PARAFLU UP

To be mixed withdiesel fuel(25 cc for 10 l)

To be used diluted or undiluted

275

TUTELACAR MATRYX

TUTELA MRM 2

TUTELA TOP 4

PARAFLU UP (●)

DIESEL MIX

TUTELAPROFESSIONALSC 35

276

The fuel consumption values shownin the following table were defined ac-cording to the type-approval specifi-cations in European Directives.

Consumption values are defined bymeans of the following procedures:

– an urban cycle: consisting of acold start and a simulated drive incity streets;

– an extra-urban cycle: consistingin frequent accelerations, in all gears,simulating normal conditions of use.Speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h;

– combined consumption consist-ing of 37% urban cycle and 63% ex-tra-urban cycle.

IMPORTANT Road and trafficconditions, weather, general con-ditions of the vehicle, driving style,fittings and accessories, use of theclimate control system, load, roofracks and other situations penal-ising aerodynamic penetration andeffecting rolling resistance will in-fluence fuel consumption rateswhich can be different from thevalues shown in the table (see“Cheap running that respects theenvironment” in “Driving yourcar” chapter).

Urban Extra-urban Average combined

Saloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon Saloon Station Wagon

1.6 11.2 11.4 6.4 6.5 8.2 8.3

1.8 11.8 12.4 6.3 6.5 8.3 8.7

2.0 13.8 14.0 7.5 7.7 9.8 10.0

1.9 jtd 8.1 8.4 4.7 4.8 5.9 6.1

2.4 jtd 8.9 9.1 5.3 5.4 6.6 6.8

CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO DIRECTIVE 1999/100/EC (liter x 100 km)

FUEL CONSUMPTION

CO2 EMISSION IN EXHAUSTThe CO2 emission in exhaust shown in the following tables refers to the combined consumption.

CO2 EMISSIONS AS PER DIRECTIVE 1999/100/EC (g/km)

277

1.6 1.8 2.0 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd

Saloon Station Saloon Station Saloon Station Saloon Station Saloon StationWagon Wagon Wagon Wagon Wagon

194 197 198 206 233 238 157 162 176 179

278

TYRE INFLATION PRESSURECOLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

Saloon Type Average load Full load Space-saverFront Rear Front Rear spare wheel

1.6 195/65 R15 91H 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2

1.8 195/65 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 4.2

2.0 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2

205/55 R16 91V 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 4.2

1.9 jtd 195/65 R15 91H 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2

2.4 jtd 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 4.2

205/55 R16 91V 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 4.2

(■) Optional

0.3 bar should be added to the values given if the pressure is measured while the tyre is hot.

Station Wagon Tyre Average load Full load Space-saverFront Rear Front Rear spare wheel

1.6 195/65 R15 91H 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

1.8 195/65 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

2.0 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

205/55 R16 91V 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 (2.8*) 4.2

1.9 jtd 195/65 R15 91H 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

2.4 jtd 195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

205/60 R15 91V (■) 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

205/55 R16 91V 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 (2.8*) 4.2

(■) Optional

0.3 bar should be added to the values given if the pressure is measured while the tyre is hot.

(*) Maximum load in boot with seats folded + 1 person + 350 kg.

279

280

kACCESSORY INSTALLATION

Genuine LANCIA accessories have beendesigned with the Lybra specifically in mindand have been selected and tested on the car.They are easy to use, reliable and practical,qualities that lead to enhanced comfort andsafety under all driving conditions.

If you wish to give your Lybra a sportier look,LANCIA has designed light alloy rims, leatherpanels, spoilers and sporty bumpers that arefully in keeping with the car’s line making itmore personal and aggressive.

To ensure child safety, the child safety seatsoffered by Lineaccessori LANCIA meet therequirements of the European standards cur-rently in force.

You can find the LANCIA accessoriesdescribed in a catalogue available from LanciaDealerships. Just ask the staff to give you allthe details.

The following pages show diagrams and giveinstructions for correctly fitting a number ofaccessories. Installation must always be en-trusted to the experts.

LANCIA has specially trained its Dealershipstaff for work on the Lybra.

TOW HITCH.................................................. 281

TOW HITCH INSTALLATION

The tow hitch must be fixed to thebody by an expert in accordance withthe following instructions and re-specting the additional and/or inte-grative information provided by thetow hitch manufacturer.

The tow hitch to be fitted must com-ply with the current regulations inforce, with reference to Directive94/20/EEC and subsequent modifi-cations.

Use a tow hitch suited for the max-imum towable load of the car versionon which the tow hitch is to be fitted.

Use a unified coupling for the elec-trical connections. The coupling isgenerally fitted on a specific mountfastened to the tow hitch.

For the electric connection, a 7 or 13pole 12VDC coupling must be used(CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN standards).Follow the instructions provided bythe manufacturer of the car and/orthe tow hitch.

TOW HITCH

281

The electrical brake (where relevant)or other device (electrical winch, etc.)must be powered directly from thebattery by means of a lead with across-section area no smaller than 2.5mm2.

In addition to the electrical connec-tions, only the power wire for an ad-ditional electrical brake and for inter-nal trailer lighting with a power notexceeding 15W can be connected tothe car’s electrical system.

282

INSTALLATION DIAGRAM

Fasten the tow hitch (fig. 1) in thepoints marked with a Ø symbol usinga total of:

– six M8x30 screws(of which five hexagonal headscrews and one countersunk Allenscrew)

– three M12x35 screws

– two M8x30 screws(existing on the car)

– two M10x110 screws(countersunk Allen screw).

Reinforcement plate 1 must be atleast 8 mm thick. Reinforcementplates 2 and 3 must be at least 6 mmthick.

After assembly, seal theholes to prevent exhaustfumes from entering the

passenger compartment.

fig. 1

P4T

0633

8020

(313)

496,5

442,5

M10

242

8725

,5

4

A

A

2

3

2

1 3

N°2

M8

1015

10

≥65

313

496,5

26,5

7035N°

3 M

12

87,5

107,

510

0N°

4 M8 M10

100

98

385 ± 35

Exi

stin

g nu

ts

Standard ball hitch

Rear wheel axlei

Load

A-A cross-section

Exi

stin

g ho

le

IMPORTANT Fasten a tag in aclearly visible position at the sameheight as the tow hitch. This tag iscompulsory. It must be adequatelysized, made of suitable material andcarry the following information:

MAX LOAD ON BALL COUPLING 75 kg

283

INDEX

ABS ...................................... 148

Accessories purchased

by the user .......................... 174

Accessory installation .......... 280

Aerial (SW - sound system) .... 236

Air cleaner ............................. 221

Air vents (adjustable) ............. 104

Airbags (front and side) ......... 43

Alternator ............................... 265

Armrest (front with oddment

compartment) ..................... 130

Armrests (front and rear) ....... 31

Ashtray .................................. 127

Battery

– electrolyte level ................. 223

– level gauge ....................... 223

– maintenance ..................... 223

– recharging ........................ 205

– specifications .................... 265

Bodywork

– maintenance ..................... 231

– versions ............................ 253

Bonnet .................................... 141

Boot ............................... 266-267

– anchoring the load .... 140-243

– ceiling light ...................... 239

– extending (saloon) ............ 139

– extending (SW) ................ 243

– opening and closing... 138-238

Boot light (saloon)

– replacing a bulb ............... 195

Boot light (SW)

– replacing a bulb ............... 247

Brake and clutch fluid level..... 220

Brake light

– replacing a bulb (saloon)... 191

– replacing a bulb (SW) ...... 248

Brakes

– fluid level ......................... 220

– service and emergency ...... 260

Bulbs (replacement) ............... 185

– bulb types ....... 162-186-187

– general ............................. 186

Capacities .................... 271-272

Car maintenance .................. 209

– additional checks ............. 213

– annual inspection schedule 213

– scheduled servicing ........... 210

– service schedule ................ 211

Card pocket ........................... 128

Ceiling lights (front and rear)

– controls ............................ 125

– replacing a bulb ....... 193-194

Cellular phone set-up ............. 144

Central rear ceiling

light (SW) .....................236

– replacing a bulb ............... 247

Centralised door lock ............. 134

284

– replacing a rear

bulb (SW) ......................... 248

– replacing a side bulb ........ 190

Door lights

– replacing a bulb ............... 193

Doors

– ceiling lights ..................... 135

– centralised locking system 134

– centralised window system 134

– child lock ......................... 135

Driving your car ................... 156

Electrical socket .................... 131

Electrical system

(specifications) .................... 265

Electronic alarm ..................... 21

– ministerial

homologation ............. 27-290

– remote control .................. 22

– centralised window

system .............................. 136

Chassis number ...................... 251

Cheap running that respects

the environment .................. 168

Check Control ........................ 58

– warning lights .................. 61

Checking fluid levels .............. 215

Child lock .............................. 38

Children

(transporting in safety) ....... 38

Cigar lighter ........................... 127

Climate control system ........... 105

– maintenance ..................... 230

Clutch (specifications) ............ 252

CO2 emission in exhaust ......... 277

Coin tray ................................ 128

Containing running costs

and pollution ....................... 168

– conditions of use .............. 169

– driving style ..................... 169

– general ............................. 168

Controls ................................. 118

Cooling ................................... 103

Courtesy lights ....................... 124

Cruise Control ........................ 122

Dashboard ........................... 15

Diesel filter

– draining the condense ...... 222

Differential

– specifications ................. 258

Dimensions .................... 266-267

Dipped beam headlights

– controls ............................ 116

– replacing a bulb ............... 188

– slant compensation ........... 146

Direction indicators

– controls ............................ 116

– replacing a front bulb ...... 189

– replacing a rear bulb

(saloon) ............................... 191

285

– replacing the remote

control batteries ............... 26

– switching the alarm off ..... 25

Electronic control units .......... 225

Engine

– cooling ............................. 258

– engine marking ................ 251

– fuel feed ................... 256-257

– identification code ............ 253

– ignition ............................. 256

– lubrication ........................ 258

– specifications ............ 254-255

– timing ...................... 254-255

Engine coolant level ............... 219

Engine coolant temperature

gauge .................................. 52

Engine oil

– checking the level ............. 218

– consumption ..................... 273

– specifications ............ 274-275

Engine oil consumption .......... 273

Engine oil level ....................... 218

EOBD system ......................... 147

ESP system ............................. 149

Flashing the headlights 116

Fog Sensor ............................. 113

Front foglights

– controls ............................ 119

– replacing a bulb ............... 190

– slant compensation ........... 146

Fuel

– at the filling station .......... 160

– fuel consumption .............. 276

– fuel cut-off switch ............ 120

– fuel filler cap .................... 143

– gauge ............................... 52

Fuel consumption ................... 276

Fuel cut-off switch ................. 120

Fuel filler cap ......................... 143

Fuel level gauge ..................... 52

Fuel tank

– cap ................................... 143

– capacity ................... 271-272

Fuses ...................................... 196

Gas discharge

headlights............................. 146

Gearbox

– transmission ratio ............. 258

– using the manual

gearbox ............................ 121

Gearbox (specifications) ......... 258

Getting to know your car ..... 14

Glove compartment light

– replacing a bulb ............... 194

Glove compartment ................ 126

Handbrake ................... 120-260

Handles .................................. 130

Hazard lights ......................... 118

Head restraints ....................... 30

Headlight washer

– controls ............................ 117

286

Oddment

compartments ............. 129-239

Oddment tray (SW) ............... 240

Paintwork ............................ 231

Paintwork plate ...................... 251

Paper pocket .......................... 130

Parking .................................. 160

Passenger compartment lights ... 125

– replacing a front ceiling

light bulb ......................... 191

– replacing a rear ceiling

light bulb ......................... 194

Passenger compartment

separation net (SW) ............ 241

Performance ........................... 268

Pollen/dust filter .................... 222

Power steering fluid level ....... 220

Power steering

– fluid level ......................... 220

Pretensioners .......................... 42

– fluid ................................. 219

– nozzles ............................. 230

Headlights

– beam adjustment .............. 147

– compensating the slant ...... 145

– front foglight slant

adjustment ....................... 145

– gas discharge headlights

(Xeno) .............................. 145

Heated rear window ............... 120

Identification data ........ 251

If an accident occurs .............. 207

Ignition switch ....................... 16

In an emergency ................... 175

Instrument panel .................... 48

– dimmer ............................ 119

Instruments ............................ 51

– dimmer ............................ 119

Interiors (maintenance) .......... 233

Jack (saloon) ................ 179-180

Jack (SW) .............................. 246

Jacking the car ....................... 205

Keys ..................................... 17

Kilometer counter .................. 53

Lancia CODE system ........... 17

Lancia ICS ............................. 62

– control LEDs .................... 61

Lubricant specifications .. 274-275

Luggage cover (SW) ............... 240

Lybra Station Wagon ........... 234

Main beam headlights

– controls ............................ 116

– replacing a bulb ............... 188

Model plate ............................ 252

Number plate light

– replacing a bulb ............... 192

287

Radio-frequency remote

control ........................ 290

Rain sensor

(windscreen wiper) .............. 118

Rear foglight

– controls ............................ 119

– replacing a bulb (saloon)... 191

– replacing a bulb (SW) ...... 249

Rear geometry

(automatic control - SW) .... 237

Rear suspensions (SW)

– automatic rear geometry

control .............................. 237

Rear window washer (SW)

– controls ............................ 235

– fluid level ......................... 219

– nozzles ............................. 230

Rear window wiper (SW)

– blade replacement ............ 235

– controls ............................ 235

Rearview mirrors

– external mirror adjustment 33

– internal ............................ 32

– storing external

mirror position ................. 33

Remote control batteries .... 21-26

Remote control homologation.. 290

Repeated checks and check

before long trips .................. 173

Rev counter ............................ 51

Reversing light

– replacing a bulb (saloon)... 191

– replacing a bulb (SW) ...... 248

Roof rack/ski rack

– fasteners (saloon) ............. 145

– fasteners (SW) .................. 245

Rubber tubing ........................ 228

Safe driving

– before getting behind

the wheel .......................... 164

– driving at night ................ 165

– driving in fog ................... 166

– driving in the mountains .. 167

– driving in the rain ............ 166

– driving on snow and ice .... 167

– driving with ABS .............. 167

– when travelling ................ 164

Seat belts

– front load limiting devices 35

– general instructions .......... 36

– height adjustment ............ 34

– maintenance ..................... 37

– use ............................ 34-35-36

Seats

– cleaning ............................ 233

– electrical adjustment ........ 29

– head restraints .................. 30

– manual adjustment .......... 28

– storing positions ............... 29

Side/taillights

– controls ............................ 115

– replacing a front bulb ...... 188

288

– replacing a rear bulb

(saloon) ............................ 191

– replacing a rear bulb

(SW) ................................. 248

Ski tunnel ...................... 141-242

Slant compensation

– foglights ........................... 147

– headlights ......................... 145

Snow chains ........................... 172

Sound system

– aerial (SW) ...................... 236

– CD player ............ 99-155-236

– description and operation.. 73

– HI-FI sound system .. 155-237

– rear speakers (SW) ........... 236

– speakers ........................... 154

– tape player ....................... 98

Spark plugs .................... 162-226

Speedometer ........................... 51

Starter motor ......................... 265

Starting the engine

– bump starting .......... 159-178

– emergency start-up ........... 176

– ignition switch .................. 16

– jump starting ................... 177

– procedure for diesel

engines ............................. 158

– procedure for petrol

engines ............................. 157

– stopping the engine .......... 159

– warming up a recently

started engine ................... 159

Steering wheel (adjusting) ...... 32

Steering wheel lock ................ 16

Steering wheel stalks

– left-hand stalk .................. 117

– right-hand stalk ............... 117

Steering .................................. 261

Storing the car ....................... 173

Sun visors .............................. 128

Sunroof .................................. 131

Supplementary heater ............ 115

Suspensions ............................ 261

Symbols ................................. 9

Technical

specifications .................... 250

Third brake light

– replacing a bulb (saloon)... 192

– replacing a bulb (SW) ...... 248

Tools .............................. 180-246

Top speeds ............................. 268

Towing a trailer

– instructions ...................... 171

– tow hitch

installation ............... 281-282

Towing the car (SW) .............. 245

Towing the car ....................... 206

Tyre inflation

pressure ............. 163-278-279

Tyres .............................. 278-279

– advice ............................... 227

– if a tyre is punctured 177-246

– inflation pressure ..... 278-279

– sizes ................................. 262

– winter tyres ..................... 262

289

Warning LEDs and LEDs

on controls .......................... 61

Warning lights ....................... 53

Weights .......................... 269-270

Wheel geometry ..................... 261

Wheel rims ............................. 262

Wheels

– advice ............................... 227

– replacement (saloon) ........ 179

– replacement (SW) ............ 246

– specifications .................... 262

Window winders (electric)....... 136

Window winders (rear) .......... 137

Window winders

– centralised window

system ............................... 136

Windows (cleaning) ............... 232

Windscreen washer

– controls ............................ 117

– fluid ................................. 219

– nozzles ............................. 230

– rain sensor ....................... 118

Windscreen wiper

– blades (replacement) ......... 228

– controls ............................ 117

– nozzles ............................. 230

Windscreen, rear window,

headlight washer fluid

level ..................................... 219

290

RADIO-FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: ministerial homologation

P4C

2000

2

International motoring code Country Homologation number

A AustriaB Belgium

CH SwitzerlandD Germany

DK DenmarkE SpainF France

GR GreeceH HungaryI ItalyL Luxembourg

NL NetherlandsP Portugal

BG Bulgaria P-14-540/2001CRO Croatia SRD 162/01CZ Czech Republic CCZJOR Jordan TRC/LPD/2001/01KWT Kuwait -OM Oman OMA/1150/075/01PL Poland 211/2001Q Qatar QTEL/DR/2001/R-215

RL Lebanon 6731/OMRO Romania ATR Nr 67SLO Slovenia C231-0989/01SK Sloval Republic R287 2001 NSX Saudi Arabia -

UAE United Arab Emirates 5/10-2/2309/3806

291

®

Always ask your mechanic for ®

The engine of your car is factory filled with Selenia,a range of lubricants which satisfies the most advanced

international specifications. Specific tests and high technical characteristicss allow the Selenia range to guarantee

the optimum and top quality performance of your engine.

SELENIA 20KAPI SL lubricant ,which guarantees optimumperformance and maximum wear protection toaspirated, turbocharged or multivalve petrol engines.

SELENIA PERFORMERIs particularly ideal for the protection of newgeneration petrol engines,Very effective even in the most severe weatherconditions. It guaranteees a reduction in fuelconsumption (Energy conserving ).

SELENIA TDOil for aspirated turbocharged or multivalve dieselengines, guarantees maximum engine cleanlinessand stability at high temperatures.

SELENIA WROil which has been specifically designed for use incommon rail andMultijet diesel engines. Effective dur-ing cold starts it offers maximim wear protection,hydraulic tappets control, consumption reductionand stability at high temperatures.

Oil change? The experts reccomend Selenia.

The Selenia range includes a number of of technologically advanced products:

For further information on Selenia products, please visit the website www.flselenia.com.

The complete Selenia range also includes Selenia 20K Alfa Romeo, Selenia Performer 5W-40, Selenia Racing and Selenia Digitech.

NOTES

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

ENGINE OIL CHANGE

FUEL CAPACITIES (litres)

Saloon Station WagonTyre Average load Full load Average load Full load Space-saver

Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear spare wheel

1.6195/65 R15 91H 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2205/60 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

1.8195/65 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2205/60 R15 91V 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

1.9 jtd195/65 R15 91H 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2205/60 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2

2.0 - 2.4 jtd195/65 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2205/60 R15 91V 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 (2.7*) 4.2205/55 R16 91V 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 (2.8*) 4.2

0.3 bar should be added to the values given if the pressure is measured while the tyre is hot.(*) Maximum load in boot with seats folded + 1 person + 350 kg.

1.6 1.8 2.0 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtdlitres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg

Engine sump 3.5 3.1 3.9 3.5 4.3 3.8 4.2 3.75 4.8 4.3Engine sump and filter 3.8 3.4 4.3 3.85 5.0 4.45 4.8 4.25 5.5 4.9

Dispose of waste oil properly.

1.6 1.8 2.0 1.9 jtd 2.4 jtd

Tank capacity 60 60 60 60 60

Reserve 8 8 8 8 8

Refuel petrol engines with unleaded petrol with an octane rating (RON) no lower than 95 only. Refuel diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles (EN590 specifications) only.

Fiat Auto S.p.A. - After Sales - Assistenza Tecnica - Ingegneria Assistenziale Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera – Torino (Italia)

Print n. 603.45.726 - X/2004 - 4th Edition - Printed by Satiz - Turin (Italy)Coordinamento Editoriale Satiz - Torino